Occult Science - An Outline
GA 13
V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds—Concerning Initiation
[ 1 ] At the present stage of evolution there are three possible conditions of soul in which man ordinarily lives his life between birth and death: waking, sleeping and, between the two, dreaming. The last-mentioned will be briefly dealt with in a later part of this book; for the moment we shall consider life simply as it alternates between its two main conditions—waking and sleeping. Before he can “know” for himself in higher worlds, man has to add to these two a third condition of soul.
During waking life he is given up to the impressions of the senses, and to the thoughts and pictures that these evoke in him. During sleep the senses cease to make any impression, and the soul loses consciousness. The whole of the day's experience sinks down into the sea of unconsciousness. Let us now consider how it would be if man were able to become conscious during sleep, notwithstanding that all impressions of the senses were completely obliterated, as they are in deep sleep. Now would any memory remain to him of what had happened while he was awake. Would he find himself in an empty nothingness? Would he now be unable to have any experience at all? An answer to this question is only possible if a condition resembling the description can actually be brought about in man, where his senses remain completely inactive and he has no memory of their activity in his waking hours, and is yet not asleep but awake to another world, a world of reality, even while in relation to the external world around him he is just as he is in sleep.
As a matter of fact, such a state of consciousness can be induced in man if he is prepared to evoke within him the kind of inner experience that spiritual science enables him to develop. And all that is here related about the worlds that lie beyond the world of the senses has been investigated in such a condition of consciousness. In the preceding chapters some information has been given concerning these higher worlds. The present chapter will tell—in so far as lies within the scope of this book—of the means whereby man may achieve the state of consciousness required for such research.
[ 2 ] It is in this one aspect alone that the higher state of consciousness resembles sleep: the sense receive no impressions from without, and the thoughts too which have been evoked by sense-impressions are obliterated. Whereas however in sleep man if bereft of the power to have conscious experience, in this new state of consciousness he retains the power. A capacity for conscious experience is aroused in him, which in ordinary life requires to be stimulated by sense-impressions. The awakening of the soul to this higher state of consciousness may be termed Initiation.
[ 3 ] The path that leads to Initiation takes man out of ordinary day-time consciousness and brings him into a new activity of soul whereas he makes use of spiritual organs of perception. These organs are present in man all the time, in a germinal condition; they require only to be developed.
Now it can happen that at some particular time in his life, without making any special preparation for it, a person discovers that higher organs of this nature have been developing within him. This will mean that a kind of involuntary self-awakening has taken place. He will find that he has through this become a completely changed man. His whole inner experience is no vastly enriched. And he will be fully persuaded that no knowledge of the physical world could ever afford him such bliss, such serene satisfaction, such inner warmth, as can the knowledge that opens up before him now that he has a faculty of cognition that is independent of physical impressions. Strength and confidence will stream into his will from a spiritual world.
Such instances of self-initiation do occur. They should however not lead one to imagine that the right thing to do is simply to wait for it and make no effort towards obtaining Initiation by means of a properly ordered training. We have no need to speak here any further of self-initiation, since it can come about without the person's following any rules or precepts. What we are concerned with is how the organs of perception that are latent in man's soul may be developed by spiritual training. If people do not feel any particular urge to take steps for their own inner development, it is easy for them to think that since the life of man goes forward under the guidance of spiritual Powers, he ought not to interfere in their leadership but should wait quietly for the moment when these Powers shall deem it right to open to him another world. They will feel that any desire to intermeddle in this way with the wisdom of spiritual guidance is quite unjustified, and bespeaks a kind of presumption. One who takes this view will only be persuaded to modify it when a certain line of thought begins to make a strong impression on him—namely when he is ready to say: “The wise guidance of spiritual Powers has given me certain faculties. It has not bestowed these faculties on me for me to leave them unemployed, but rather that I may put them to use. The wisdom of the guidance is to be seen in the fact that seeds have been planted in me of a higher state of consciousness; and I fail to understand the guidance aright if I do not regard it as a duty to set before me the high ideal: that whatever can become manifest to man through the development of his spiritual powers shall become so manifest.” When such a thought has taken strong enough hold, then the mistrust that was felt of any training for the attainment of a higher state of consciousness shall disappear.
[ 4 ] Misgiving can however arise on another account. The development of inner faculties of the soul, someone might feel, implies an intrusion into man's most hidden holy of holies. It involves a change in his whole nature and character, and the method by which the change is to be wrought can obviously not be thought out by the person concerned. Only one who knows the path from actual experience can tell him how he is to reach a higher world; and in applying to such a person for help, he is permitting that person to exercise an influence over the innermost holy of holies of his soul. Nor will this scruple be met if the means whereby the higher state of consciousness is to be attained are set forth in a book. For it makes little difference whether one receives instruction by word of mouth or whether someone who has knowledge of these means has written them in a book and one reads them there. There are moreover among those who possess the requisite knowledge some who think it inadmissible ever to entrust the knowledge to a book. These persons will generally also regard with disapproval all communications to others of truths concerning the spiritual world. To hold such a view in the present epoch of mankind's evolution must, however, be described as out of date. Only up to appoint, it is true, can the means to be employed for higher development be communicated. But if the pupil will apply himself diligently to what is given, he will be able to reach a stage in development whence he can find the way for himself. From all that he has gone through so far, he will obtain a right idea of his further path—and indeed he can do so in no other way.
On all these various grounds misgivings may arise in relation to the path of spiritual knowledge. They disappear, however, when one begins to grasp the true nature of the path of development which is set forth in the school of spiritual training appropriate to our age. Of this path we will now proceed to tell, hinting only briefly, as occasion arises, at other methods.
[ 5 ] The training in question provides one who has the will to seek higher development with instructions that he can follow and so bring about the necessary changes in his soul. Anything like an unwarranted intrusion into the individuality of the pupil could only come into question if the teacher were himself to effect the change by methods of which the pupil was quite unconscious. But a training for spiritual development that is rightly adapted for our times will never employ such methods, turning the pupil into a blind instrument for his own development. It offers him instructions, and the pupil carries them out. As and when there is occasion to do so, it explains to him why this or that instruction is given. The acceptance of the instructions, and their observance, have no need to rest on blind faith. Blind faith should indeed be altogether excluded. If we have studied the nature of the human soul, in so far as it shows itself to ordinary self-observation unassisted by spiritual training, then on learning of the measures recommended we can ask ourselves: What effect will these have on the life of the soul? Before any training is begun, this question, if approached with a healthy and unbiased mind, can receive adequate answer. For it is perfectly possible, before setting out to follow the recommendations, to form a clear and true conception of how they work. Naturally, we cannot have actual experience of their working until we have embarked on the training. But here too we shall find we can accompany the experience all the time with understanding, provided only we are free from preconceived ideas and bring healthy good sense to bear on each step we take. And a genuine spiritual science will in these days recommend for development only such means as will stand that test. Whoever is prepared to enter upon such a training and will not allow himself to be led away by any mistaken prepossession into an attitude of mere blind credulity, will soon find that all misgivings disappear. Objections he may hear others raise against a systematic training for the attainment of a higher state of consciousness will not disturb him in the least.
[ 6 ] Even for those who are endowed with the inner ripeness of soul which can lead them sooner or later to a self-awakening of the organs of spiritual perception—even for such, training is not superfluous; on the contrary, they have particular need for it. For there are few instances where such a person does not have to go down many a dubious by-path before he arrives at self-initiation. The training will spare him this. It will lead him straight forward on the right path. Where self-initiation occurs, it is due to the fact that the soul reached the necessary maturity in former lives. It may easily happen that the person has a dim feeling of his own ripeness, and this makes him disinclined to submit to training. The feeling may give rise to a kind of unconscious pride which hinders him from putting his trust even in a properly ordered school for spiritual training. Or it may be that the more advanced stage of soul may remain hidden in him until a certain age of life and only then begin to manifest. A training could in such an instance be the very means of bringing the ripeness to manifestation, and were the person to debar himself altogether from such training, it might well be that at the time when it should manifest, the faculty he possesses would still remain hidden and emerge again only in one of his later incarnations.
[ 7 ] In this matter of spiritual training, it is important not to let certain fairly obvious misunderstandings gain ground. People may, for instance, have the idea that the training is going to make a great difference to a person's whole conduct and behavior. But there is no question of giving the pupil general precepts on how to lead his life; he will be told of things he can do, inwardly in his soul, which, if he carries them out, will give him the possibility of beholding the supersensible. As for his other activities in life—activities that have nothing to do with observation of the supersensible—these are not directly influenced at all by what he undertakes in the course of training. What happens is simply that the pupil acquires, in addition to them, the gift of supersensible perception. This new activity is as different from the ordinary avocations of life as waking is from sleeping. The one cannot be allowed to disturb the other in the very least. Should anyone be inclined, for instance, to intersperse the ordinary course of his life with impressions that reached him from the supersensible, he would be like a sick person whose sleep was continually being interrupted by unwholesome periods of wakefulness. The trained observer will have it in his own control to evoke at will the state of consciousness wherein he can behold supersensible reality. Indirectly, the training is of course not unrelated to the general conduct and habit of life, inasmuch as anyone lacking in ethical stability and good feeling will either be unable to see into the supersensible, or if he can, it will do him harm. Very much therefore of the instruction that is given to lead the pupil to vision of the supersensible, contributes at the same time to the ennobling of his daily life. And besides this, through being able to see into the supersensible world, the pupil learns to recognize higher moral impulses that hold good also for the physical world. For there are ethical laws that can only be learned in higher worlds.
Another misunderstanding is possible. It might be imagined that some activity of the soul, intended to lead to supersensible cognition, were in some way connected with changes in the physical organism. As a matter of fact, such activities have nothing whatever to do with anything in man that belongs to the province of physiology, or to other aspects of natural science. They are processes purely of soul and spirit, as far removed from the physical as are ordinary healthy thinking and perceiving. The way in which they take place in the soul is no different from the way in which we think our thoughts or come to our decisions. As much or as little as healthy thinking has to do with the body, just so much and so little have the activities of a genuine training for supersensible knowledge. Any kind of training that affects man in a different way is no true spiritual training, but a caricature of it.
It may be assumed that the training now to be described fulfills the conditions we have seen to be necessary. It is only because supersensible knowledge is something that engages all man's faculties of soul that it might seem to demand overwhelming changes in him. Yet in reality it simply amounts to this: instructions are given which, if followed, will enable the pupil to have moments in his life when he can behold the supersensible.
[ 8 ] The ascent to a supersensible state of consciousness has necessarily to take its start from ordinary waking consciousness. The pupil is living in this consciousness before he sets out on the ascent, and the school of spiritual training holds out to him means whereby he may be led forth from it. Among the first of the means put forward in the school which concerns us here, are activities that are already familiar to the pupil in his everyday consciousness. The most significant of them are in fact those that consist in still and silent activities of the soul. The pupil has to give himself up entirely to certain thought-pictures. These are of such a kind as to have in them an awakening power; they awaken hidden faculties of the soul. They differ therefore from the thought-pictures that belong to everyday life, whose purpose it is to portray some external object. Indeed the more faithfully these do so, the truer they are; it belongs to their very nature to be true in this sense. The thought-pictures to which the soul has to devote itself for the purpose of spiritual training have no such part to play. Their function is not to depict an external object; they are formed in such a way as to have in themselves the property of awakening the soul. The best for the purpose are symbolic pictures. Others, however, can also be used. For the actual content is, in fact, of little importance, the main point being that the pupil shall direct the whole power of his soul upon the thought-picture and have nothing else whatever in his consciousness. Whereas in everyday life the soul's powers are distributed among many things, and thought-pictures are continually coming and going, in spiritual training everything depends on the entire concentration of the soul upon one idea of thought-picture, placed, by an act of will, in the very center of consciousness. It is for this reason that symbolic thought-pictures do better than those that depict external objects or activities; for the latter have their point of support in the external world, so that the soul is not driven to rely upon itself alone, as is the case with the symbolic thought-pictures which have been built up by the soul's own exertions. The essential thing is, not what the picture represents, but that it is formed and imagined in such a way as to set the soul entirely free from dependence on the physical.
[ 9 ] It will help us to form a clear conception of what this absorption in a thought-picture implies, if we call up before us the concept of memory. Say we have been looking at a tree and have then turned away so that we no longer see it. We can call up before our mind's eye the thought -picture or mental image of the tree. This thought-picture that we have when the tree is not in view is a memory of the tree. Suppose we hold on to this memory; we let our soul, as it were, come to rest in the memory-picture and try to shut out every other thought. Our soul is now immersed in the memory-picture of the tree. There you have an instance of absorption in a thought-picture—one that reproduces an outer object perceived by the senses. If we now do the same with a thought-picture we ourselves have placed into the field of consciousness, entirely of our will, we shall in time become able to achieve the desired end.
[ 10 ] In order to make this quite clear, let us take an example of absorption of the soul in a symbolic thought-picture. The first thing to be done is to build it up, and this we may do in the following way. We think of a plant, how it has its roots in the soil, how it sends out leaves one after another, and blossoms at length into flower. Now we imagine a man standing beside the plant. The thought lights up in our mind that the man has characteristics and capabilities which can truthfully be called more perfect than are those of the plant. He can move about at will, he can go this way or that way as he feels inclined; whereas the plant is rooted to the spot where it is growing. We may, however, then go on to think to ourselves: Yes, that is so, the human being is more perfect than the plant; but I also find qualities in him, the absence of which in the plant makes it appear to me more perfect in other respects than the human being. For he is filled with desires and passions, and these he sometimes follows in his behavior, with the result that he goes astray, falls into error. When I look at the plant, I see how it follows the pure laws of growth from leaf to leaf, how it opens its blossom, calmly and tranquilly, to the chaste rays of the sun. I perceive therefore that while man is in some respects more perfect than the plant, he buys this comparative perfection at the price of letting impulses and desires and passions have their seat within him, instead of what appear to be the pure forces at work in the plant. Then we can go on to picture to ourselves how the green sap flows right through the plant, and how this green sap is the expression of the pure, unimpassioned laws of growth. And if we then think of the red blood as it flows through the veins and arteries of man, we find in this red blood the expression of impulses and desires and passions.
We then let this whole thought live in our soul. Carrying it a little farther, we call to mind how man is after all capable of development; he possesses higher faculties of soul, by means of which he can refine and purify his impulses and passions. We recognize that thereby the baser element in them is purged away, and they are re-born on a higher level. The blood can then be thought of as the expression of these purified and chastened impulses and passions. And now we turn our thought, let us say, to a rose. We look in spirit at the rose and say to ourselves: In the red sap of the rose, I see the green color of the plant-sap changed to red; and the red rose follows still, no less than the green leaf, the pure, unimpassioned laws of growth. I can let the red of the rose be for me a symbol of a blood that is the expression of chastened impulses and passions which have thrown off their baser part and resemble in their purity the forces that are at work in the rose. And then we try, not merely to go on turning such thoughts over and over in our mind, but to let them come to life in our heart and feeling. A sensation of bliss can come over us as we contemplate the pure and dispassionate nature of the growing plant; and we feel obliged to admit that certain higher perfections have to be purchased by the acquisition at the same time of impulses and desires. This thought can change the bliss that we experienced before into a solemn feeling; and then a sense of liberation can come over us, a feeling of true happiness when we give ourselves up to the thought of the red blood that can become the bearer--even as the red sap in the rose—of experiences that are inwardly pure. In pursuing thus a train of thought that serves to build up such a symbolic picture, it is important to accompany the thought all the time with feeling. Then, having entered right into the experience of the thoughts and feelings, we can re-cast them in the following symbolic picture.
Imagine you see before you a black cross. Let this black cross be for you a symbol for the baser elements that have been case out of man's impulses and passions; and at the point where the beams of the cross meet, picture to yourself seven resplendent bright red roses arranged in a circle. Let these roses symbolize for you a blood that is the expression of passions and impulses that have undergone purification.1It is of no consequence how far the above thoughts can be justified from the side of Natural Science, the whole point being to evolve thoughts in regard to plant and man, which can be arrived at without reference to any theory, by simple and direct observation. Thoughts of this kind concerning objects in the world around us have their significance, alongside of the theoretical ideas of science which are, in their right place, no less significant. Here we are not putting forward thoughts for the purpose of presenting facts in scientific terms; what we ant to do is to create a symbolic picture that shall prove capable of influencing the soul, irrespective of any criticisms that could be leveled at the composition of the picture. Some such symbolic thought-picture shall the pupil of spiritual training call up before his soul, and he can do this in the same way as was explained above for a memory-picture. Devoting himself to it in deep, inner contemplation, he will find that the picture has power to call his soul awake. He must try to banish for the time being everything else from his mind. The symbol in question, and that alone, should now hover before him in spirit, as livingly as ever possible.
There is meaning in the fact that the symbolic picture has not simply been put forward as a picture that has in itself as an awakening power, but that it was first built up by a sequence of thoughts concerning plant and man. What such a picture can do for the pupil depends, before he uses it as an object of meditation. Were he to picture it without having gone through the construction of it in his own soul, it would remain cold and would have far less effect, for it is the preparation that endows it with power to enlighten the soul. The pupil should however not be recalling the preparatory steps while engaged in the meditation, but have then merely the symbolic picture hovering before him in spirit, quick with life—letting only the feelings that were aroused by the preparatory chain of thought echo on within him. In this way does the symbolic picture come to be a sign, appropriate to and accompanying the inner experience.
The efficacy if the experience depends upon how long the pupil is able to continue in it . The longer he can do so, without allowing any other idea to disturb the meditation, the greater its value for him. It is, however, also good if, apart from the times that he devotes to the meditation as such, he will frequently build up the picture all over again, letting the thoughts and feelings rise up in him in the way we have described, that the mood of the experience may not pale. The more ready the pupil is patiently to continue renewing the picture in this way, the greater significance will it have for his soul. (In my book Knowledge in the Higher Worlds and its Attainment, other subjects are suggested for meditations on the coming-into-being and passing-away of a plant, on the forces of growth that lie dormant in the seed, on the forms of crystals, etc. In the present book, the intention has been merely to illustrate, by means of an example, the nature of meditation.)
[ 11 ] A symbolic picture such as we have here described does not represent some external object that Nature has produced; and to this very fact it owes its power to awaken capabilities that belong entirely to the soul. Some persons may beg to differ! They may, for instance, say: Agreed, the symbolic picture as a whole is not to be found in Nature, but all its details are borrowed from Nature—the black color, the roses, and so forth; these have every one of them been first perceived by the senses. If any reader be disturbed in his mind by such an objection, let him reflect that these component parts of the picture, which are undoubtedly derived from sense-perception, do not in themselves lead to the awakening of higher faculties in the soul; the awakening is brought about solely by the way in which the single details have been put together to form the picture. For that, no prototype is to be found in the outer world.
[ 12 ] The endeavor has here been made, taking a particular symbolic picture as an example, to give a clear account of how meditation can take its course. For the purpose of spiritual training, a great variety of pictures of this kind can be used, and they can be built up in many different ways. Sentences, formulae, even single words, may also be given as subjects for meditation. In every instance the aim will be to wrest the soul free from sense-perception and rouse it to an activity for which the outer impressions of the physical senses are without significance, the whole import and aim of the activity being to unfold dormant faculties of the soul. Meditations that are directed wholly to certain feelings or emotions are also possible; they are indeed particularly valuable for the soul. Take the feeling of joy. In the ordinary course of life we can rejoice over something we see taking place. Suppose a man who has a healthily developed life of feeling observes someone performing an action that is inspired by real goodness of heart. He will be pleased, he will rejoice in the kind deed. And it may be, he will then to on to ponder over a deed of this nature in somewhat the following way. A deed that proceeded from kindness of heart, he may think to himself, is one in which the doer follows, not his own interests, but the interests of his fellow-man; I may therefore call it a “good” deed. But now he can go further. He can turn right away form the particular action that he observed and that gave him such pleasure, and create for himself the comprehensive idea of loving-kindness, “goodness of heart.” He can picture to himself how it arises in the soul, namely through the person's absorbing, as it were, the interest of his fellow, making them his own. And he can rejoice in this moral conception of kindness. The joy that he now has is no longer over this or that event in the physical world, it is joy in an idea as such. If we try to let joy of this kind live on in our soul for a considerable time we shall actually be practicing meditation upon a feeling. It is not the mere idea that will awaken the inner faculties, but he prolonged surrender of the soul to a feeling that is not just due to a particular external impression.
Supersensible cognition being able to penetrate more deeply into the real nature of things, feelings evoked by spiritual knowledge can be imparted and used for meditation. These will be all the more efficacious in unfolding the inner faculties of the soul. Necessary as this enhanced development will be for the higher stages of the pupil's training, he should nevertheless understand that meditations upon simple feelings and emotions such as the one concerning goodness of heart, if diligently carried out, can take him very far. Since people differ in nature and character, the means that prove most useful for individual pupils will naturally vary. As to the length of time that should be given to meditation, the thing of prime importance is that while engaged in it, the pupil shall remain calm and collected; its efficacy indeed depends on this. In the matter of time he should also be careful not to overshoot the mark. The exercises themselves will help him to acquire a certain inner tact which will teach him how far he may rightly go in this respect.
[ 13 ] The pupil will as a rule have to carry out such exercises for quite a long while before he himself is able to notice any result. Patience and perseverance are absolute essentials in spiritual training. Unless the pupil evokes these qualities within him, going through his exercises so quietly and so regularly that patience and perseverance may be said to constitute the fundamental mood of his soul, he will make little progress.
[ 14 ] It will be clear, from what has been said so far, that deep inner contemplation—meditation—is a means for the attainment of knowledge of higher worlds, and moreover that not just any thought-picture can be taken for meditation, but only one that has been built up in the way described.
[ 15 ] The path that has been indicated leads in the fist place to what may be called “Imaginative cognition”—the first stage, that is, of higher cognition. The cognition that depends upon sense-perception and upon the elaboration of sense-perceptions by an intellect that is bound to the senses—“objective cognition.” Above it are the various stages of higher cognition, the Imaginative being the first. The word Imagination may well raise distrust in the minds of those who take it to mean some idea that is engendered by mere fancy—some “imaginary” idea or mental picture unrelated to reality. In spiritual science however, Imaginative cognition is to be understood as a cognition that results from the soul's having attained to a supersensible state of consciousness. What is perceived in this condition of consciousness are spiritual facts and spiritual beings whereto the senses have no access. Since this first supersensible consciousness is awakened in the pupil by his giving himself up in meditation to symbolic pictures or “imaginations,” it may be termed “Imaginative consciousness” and the cognition connected with it “Imaginative cognition”—meaning by this a cognition that is able to have knowledge of what is real in another sense than are the facts and objects perceived with the physical senses. The content of the thought-picture in the imaginative meditation is not the important thing; what is important is the faculty of soul that is thereby developed.
[ 16 ] Another very understandable objection may be put forward to the employment of symbolic mental pictures. The building up of such pictures, it may be alleged, is carried out by a dreamlike thinking that makes use of arbitrary fancy, and the result can only be of questionable value. There is, however, no occasion to harbor any such misgiving in regard to the thought-pictures which form the basis of a right and sound spiritual training. Such thought-pictures are expressly chosen with this end in view—namely, that the relation they may have to external reality can be disregarded and their value sought purely in the power with which they work upon the soul when attention has been withdrawn from the outer world, when all sense-impressions and even all the thoughts the mind can entertain in response to sense-impressions have been eliminated.
If we want to form a clear and true picture of the process of meditation, we shall find it helpful to compare it with sleep. On the one hand it resembles sleep, while on the other hand it is the very opposite. For it is a sleep which in comparison with ordinary day-consciousness gives signs of a higher awakeness. The truth of the matter is that, having to concentrate upon one particular symbolic or other thought-picture, the soul is obliged to summon up from its depths much stronger forces than it is accustomed to employ in ordinary life or for the ordinary process of cognition. Its inner activity is enhanced thereby. The soul liberates itself from the body, even as it does in sleep. Only, instead of going over into unconsciousness, it now has living experience of a world it did not know before. Thus, the soul is in a condition which, although in its liberation from the body it may be likened to sleep, has nevertheless to be described as an enhanced awakeness in comparison with ordinary consciousness. The soul comes in this way to a living experience of itself in its inmost, true and independent being, whereas in ordinary waking life, when its forces are less strongly developed, it is only with the help of the body that the soul attains consciousness at all. It does not under these conditions have any conscious experience of itself, becoming conscious only in the picture which, like a reflection from a mirror, the body—or, one should rather say, the bodily processes conjure up before it.
[ 17 ] The symbolic pictures that are built upon in the way described cannot of course be said to have relation as yet to anything real in the spiritual world. Their purpose is to detach the soul from sense-perception, and from the instrument of the brain with which in ordinary life the intellect is bound up. This detachment cannot be effected until man feels; Now I am forming a thought-picture by the use of forces that need not assistance from the senses or from the brain. The very first experience that befalls the pupil on his path is this liberation from the physical organs. He can then say to himself, My consciousness is not extinguished when I abandon sense-perceptions and abandon also my ordinary intellectual thinking; I can lift myself right out of this thinking, and I then feel myself a living spiritual being, side by side with what I was before. Here then we have the first purely spiritual experience: the pupil becomes aware of himself as an I, an Ego, purely in the soul and spirit. A new self has arisen out of the self that is bound up with the physical senses and the physical intellect. Had the pupil freed himself from the world of the senses and the intellect without deep inner meditation, he would have fallen into the void of unconsciousness. Naturally, he already had in him this being of pure soul and spirit before he practiced meditation, but it had then no instruments whereby it could observe in the spiritual world. It was not unlike a physical body that has no eyes to see with, no ears to hear with. The force that has been expended in achieving meditation has created organs of soul and spirit, has called them forth out of what was hitherto unorganized soul-and-spirit being.
What the pupil has in this way himself created, is also what he first perceives. Therefore his first experience is a kind of self-perception. It is in accord with the whole nature of spiritual training that, thanks to the self-education that he is undergoing, man is at this stage fully conscious that he is perceiving himself in the picture-worlds (Imaginations) which appear as a result of the exercises. These pictures seem to the pupil to be alive, and in a new world; yet he must recognize that, to begin with, they are nothing else than the reflection of his own being, strengthened as this now is by reason of the exercises he has carried out. Moreover not only has the pupil to come to a right conclusion on this point; he must in addition develop such a strong will that he is able at any moment to wipe out the pictures, to dismiss them altogether from consciousness. He must have it in his power to exercise authority over them in perfect freedom and confidence. And he will be able to do this, provided the training has been on sound lines. Otherwise, the pupil would be in the same plight in the realm of spiritual experience, as a man would be in the physical world if, when he turned to look at some object, his eye were to remain fettered to that object so that he was quite unable to look away from it. There is however one exception. One group of inner picture-experiences must not be blotted out at this stage of spiritual training. It is a group that relates to the heart and kernel of the pupil's own being; in the Imaginations of this group he is made acquainted with the very ground of his being, with that within him which passes through repeated earth lives. At this moment in his development he begins to feel—as a direct experience—the reality of repeated earth lives. In respect of everything else that he experiences in this realm there must be the freedom of which we spoke.
Only after the pupil has acquired the faculty of wiping out the Imaginations, does he approach the real external world of the spirit. In place of the pictures that have been wiped out, something else appears, and in this the pupil begins to attain knowledge of spiritual reality. His feeling of himself, from being dim and vague, reaches a clarity and definition hitherto unknown. And he has now to go further; he has to advance from this perception of himself to observation of the world of soul and spirit that surrounds him. This he will be able to do when he directs his inner experience in a way that will now be indicated.
[ 18 ] To begin with, the soul is weak over against all that offers itself for perception in the world of soul and spirit. The pupil will already have had to expend considerable energy of soul in order to hold fast in meditation the symbolic or other pictures which he built up out of the data of the world of sense. But if he wants in addition to attain to actual observation in a higher world, he will have to do more than this. He must be able to abide in a condition wherein not only the stimuli of the external world no longer influence his soul, but even the Imaginative thought-pictures are completely obliterated from his consciousness. For the moment has now arrived when that which has been formed and fashioned within him by dint of deep inner concentration of soul can come to view. Everything now depends upon the pupil's having sufficient inner energy of soul to allow it to be actually seen by him spiritually; it must not escape his notice, as invariably happens when the forces of the soul are too little developed. The soul-and-spirit organism that has come to development within him and that the pupil has now to apprehend in self-perception is frail and evanescent. Many and serious are the disturbances that come from the outer world of sense and from memories of the same, and that persist in the mind even when the pupil does his utmost to shut them out. Nor is it only the disturbances of which we can be aware that come into question; still more serious are those of which we are totally unaware in ordinary life.
The very conditions however under which the life of man takes its course make possible here a transition stage. What the soul is unable to achieve when awake on account of these disturbances from the physical world, it can achieve in sleep. One who devotes himself to meditation will, if sufficiently attentive, begin to notice something new about his sleep. He will be aware that he is not always fully asleep the whole time, but that there are moments when his soul, although he is asleep, is nevertheless active in some way. At such times, the natural processes of sleep keep away the influences of the external world which he is not yet strong enough to keep away by his own efforts while awake. And now that the exercises in concentration and meditation have begun to take effect, the soul is released from complete unconsciousness during sleep and is able to eel the world of soul and spirit. This can come home to the pupil in either of two ways. He may be well aware during his sleep: “I am now in another world,” or he may have the memory when he wakes up: “I have been in another world.” A greater inner energy is of course required for the first way than for the second, which will accordingly for a beginner be the more frequent of the two. And it may be that gradually the point is reached when the pupil, on awakening, has the impression: During the whole time that I have been asleep I have been in another world; I emerged from it only when I awoke. Moreover his memory of the beings and facts of this outer world will grow more and more definite. This will mean that the pupil has attained in one or another form what may be called “continuity of consciousness” (the persistence of consciousness during sleep.) There is no implication that he will always retain consciousness during sleep. He will have made good progress in this direction if, while in general he sleeps as others do, there are times when during sleep he can be consciously giving into a world of soul and spirit; or again if, when awake, he can look back upon short periods of such consciousness.
It must not be forgotten that this is only a transition state. It is good for his spiritual training that the pupil should go through this stage, but he must not imagine that it can afford him conclusive evidence in regard to the world of soul and spirit. He is, in this condition, still uncertain and cannot yet rely on his perceptions. Thanks however to experiences of this nature he does gradually gather power to attain the like result also in waking life—that is, to hold off the disturbing influences of the physical world upon his senses and upon his inner life, and so attain that “observing” in soul and spirit where no impressions enter by way of the senses, where the brain-bound intellect is silent, and where even those thought-pictures are banished from consciousness, upon which he had been meditating in preparing for seeing in the spirit. (Things published in the name of spiritual science should invariably be the outcome of spiritual observations made in a fully wide-awake condition.)
[ 19 ] There are two inner experiences, important in the course of spiritual training. The one enables the pupil to say to himself: If I now turn aside from every impression that can reach me from the surrounding physical world, I do not, when I look within, behold there a being that is totally inactive, but a being that is conscious of itself in a world of which I can know nothing as long as I only lay myself open to impressions that come to me through sense-perception and through everyday thinking. At this moment, the pupil can have the feeling that he has himself given birth to a new being that is there within him as the very heart and kernel of his soul, a being possessed moreover of entirely different qualities from those that have been his up to now.
The second experience is as follows. The pupil discovers that he can now have beside him the self he has been hitherto, as if it were another and distinct self. He is in a sense confronted by the being within which he has until now been confined. He feels he is temporarily outside what he has hitherto been accustomed to call his very own self, his I. It is as if he were living, with perfect calm and composure, in two selves. The first of them he knew before; the second self now confronts the first as a new-born entity. Moreover he feels the first becoming in a way self-subsistent, independent of the second, rather as man's body has an independent existence of its own apart from this first self. This is an experience of very great moment; for the pupil knows now what it means to live in that higher world which, with the help of his training, he has been endeavoring to reach.
[ 20 ] The second, the new-born self, can now be brought to perceive in the spiritual world. Within it there can unfold for the spiritual world what the sense-organs are for the physical. When this development has reached the required stage, the pupil will be able to do more than feel himself as a new-born I. Just as he perceives the physical world by means of his senses, so will he now begin to perceive around him spiritual facts and spiritual beings. Here we have then a third significant experience. In order to pass through this stage successfully, the pupil will have to reckon with the fact that along with the strengthening of the soul's forces, self-love and self-conceit begin to assume proportions that are quite unknown in ordinary life. It would argue a complete lack of understanding, were we to imagine that this was no more than the ordinary kind of selfishness and self-love. Self-love grows so strong at this stage of the pupil's development, that it can actually seem to him like a force of Nature working within him, and a strenuous disciple of the will is required to et the better of this prodigious self-conceit. The latter does not come as a result of spiritual training. This self-conceit is always there in man, but only when the pupil comes to have real experience of the Spirit is it raised up into consciousness. Hand in hand therefore with spiritual training must always go the training of the will. The pupil is conscious of a tremendous urge to feel blissfully happy in the world which he has created within him. What he must now be able to do is to wipe out, as described above, the very thing he has taken such pains to achieve. Having reached the Imaginative world, he must there contrive to extinguish self. In opposition to this self-effacement are ranged within him the excessively strong impulses of self-opinion and self-conceit. It might easily be imagined that exercises for spiritual training were something quite apart and had nothing whatever to do with moral development. To this one can only reply that the moral force needed to overcome this self-conceit cannot possibly be acquired unless the whole ethical tone and disposition of the pupil be raised to a proportionate level. Progress in spiritual training is out of the question, unless progress be made at the same time in the ethical sphere. Lack of moral strength makes conquest of self-conceit impossible . The allegation that genuine spiritual training is not ipso facto moral training is entirely mistaken
Only one who has no personal knowledge of such experience could here interpose the question: How are we to know, when we think we have spiritual perceptions, that we are facing realities and not the mere creations of our fancy—visions, hallucinations and the like? As a matter of ace, a pupil who has reached the above stage in proper spiritual training can distinguish between the figments of his own fancy and spiritual reality, just as a person of normal intelligence is able to distinguish between the mental picture of a hot iron and a real one he touches with his hand; he knows the difference by virtue of a sound and healthy experience of life. So too in the spiritual world, life itself provides the touchstone. In the world of the senses, we know that if we imagine a hot iron, then however hot we picture it, it will not burn our fingers; so does the pupil of Spirit know whether he is only imagining that he confronts a spiritual fact or whether real facts and real beings are making their impressions on the organs of spiritual perception that have been awakened in him. The instructions he will need to follow during his training to save him from falling a victim to illusion in this regard will be set forth in the following pages.
[ 21 ] It is of the utmost importance that by the time the pupil becomes conscious of a new-born self within him, his whole character and morale shall have reached a high level. For it is like this. It belongs to man's I or Ego, to control his sensations and feelings and ideas, also his impulses, desires and passions. Perceptions, mental pictures and ideas cannot be simply let loose in the soul; they must e regulated by the exercise of a thoughtful discretion. The I, the self, administers the laws of thought, thereby bringing order into man's thinking and ideation. It is the same with his desires and impulses, his inclinations and passions. These are guided and controlled by his moral principles. Thus the self, by the exercise of ethically sound judgment and discretion, becomes man's guide in this domain. When now we have succeeded in drawing out of our ordinary self a higher self, the former will become to some extent independent. But it will at the same time be deprived of the energies now devoted to the higher self. Let us see what will happen if a pupil wants to give birth to his higher self, when he has not yet developed adequate ability or certainty in his application of the laws of thought nor in his power of judgment and discretion. He cannot leave to his ordinary self any more ability in the field of thought than he has hitherto developed. Should this not suffice, then his everyday self, continuing on its own, will exhibit a thinking that is disordered, confused and fantastic. Since for such a person the new-born self can only be weak, the lower self, confused as it is, will gain control over his beholding in the supersensible, and he will fail to show discrimination in regard to what he observes there. Had he developed sufficiently his faculty for logical thinking, there would have been no difficulty in allowing his everyday self to assume independence.
The same applies in the realm of ethics. If a pupil has not acquired firmness in moral judgment, if he is not sufficiently master of his inclinations, his impulses and passions, he will be conferring independence on his everyday self when it is still in a condition of relative subjection to them. It can happen that such a person will not recognize in reference to his supersensible experience the same need to conform to a high standard of truth as he does in respect of what the outer physical world presents to his consciousness. Should he thus have a lax regard or truth, he could easily take for spiritual reality all manner of things that are nothing but figments of his own fancy. What is needed is that, before the higher self begins to be active in its quest for knowledge of the supersensible, the pupil's sense of truth be infused with a firmness of moral judgment and with a stability of character and of conscience, that have been developed in the self now left behind. This is not by any means said with intention to frighten people away from spiritual training; it is nevertheless a consideration that needs to be taken very seriously.
[ 22 ] If the pupil is firmly resolved to leave nothing undone that will help to make his first self reliable in the strict performance of its functions, then he has no need to be afraid of this event that comes as a result of spiritual training—the liberation, that is, of a second self for attainment of knowledge in the supersensible. He must however not forget that self-deception is apt to be particularly strong when one is deeming oneself “ripe” for some new step. In the school of spiritual training we have here described, the pupil's life of thought undergoes a development which precludes the danger, so very often alleged, of being led astray. Thanks to the development of the life of thought, the pupil is able to undergo all necessary experiences of the inner life in such a way that there is no fear of their being accompanied by delusive and mischievous creations of the fancy. Where adequate development of the life of thought has been lacking, the experiences can well evoke serious uncertainty in the soul of the pupil. If the pupil is prepared in the way here recommended, he will acquire knowledge of the new experiences in much the same way as a man of healthy mind gets to know the objects he perceives in the physical world. Development of the life of thought tends rather to make him an observer of what he himself is experiencing, whereas without it he is absorbed in the experience—as it were, unreflective and unheeding.
[ 23 ] In a proper school of spiritual training certain qualities are set forth that require to be cultivated by one who desires to find the path to the higher worlds. First and foremost, the pupil must have control over his thoughts (in their course and sequence.) over his will, and over his feelings. The control has to be acquired by means of exercises , and these are planned with two ends in view. On the one hand, the soul has to become so firm, so secure and balanced that it will retain these qualities when a second self is born. And on the other hand, the pupil has to endow this second self, from the start, with strength and steadfastness.
[ 24 ] The quality that thinking needs above all is objectivity. In the world of the physical senses life itself is our great teacher in this respect. Let a man fling his thoughts hither and thither in a purely arbitrary manner, he will find himself obliged to suffer life to correct him if he does not want to come into conflict with it. He must of necessity bring his thinking into correspondence with the facts. But when he turns his attention away from the physical world, this compulsory correction fails him; and if his thinking has not then the ability to be its own corrector, it will inevitably follow will-o'-the-wisps. The pupil of the spirit must therefore undertake exercises in thinking in order that his thinking may be able to mark out its own path and goal. Stability, and the capacity to adhere firmly to a once chosen subject, are what the pupil's thinking has to acquire. There is therefore no occasion for the exercises to deal with remote or complicated objects, much rather should they have reference to simple objects that are ready to hand. Whoever succeeds in directing his thought, for at least five minutes daily, and for months on end, to some quite commonplace object—say, for example, a needle or a pencil—and in shutting out during those five minutes all thoughts that have no connection with the object, will have made very good progress in this direction. (A fresh object may be chosen each day, or one may be continued for several days.) Even a person who considers himself a trained intellectual thinker should not be too proud to qualify for spiritual training by an exercise of this simple nature. For when we are riveting our thought for a considerable time upon something that is entirely familiar, we may be quite sure that our thinking is in accord with reality. If we ask ourselves: what is a lead pencil made of? How are the different materials prepared? How are they put together? When were lead pencils invented? And so on, we can be more sure of our thoughts being consistent with reality than if we were to ponder the question of the descent of man—or, let us say, of the meaning of life. Simple exercises in thinking are a far better preparation for forming commensurate conceptions of Saturn, Sun and Moon evolution than are complicated and learned ideas. As to our thinking, what is important at this stage is not the object or event to which it is directed, but that it should be strong and vigorous and to the point. If it has been educated to be so in reference so simple physical realities that lie open to view, it will acquire the tendency to be so even when it finds itself no longer under the control of the physical world and its laws. The pupil will find he gets rid in this way of any tendency he had before to loose and extravagant thinking.
[ 25 ] As if in the world of thought, so also in the sphere of the will, the self has to become master. Here too, as long as we remain in the world of the physical senses, life itself may be said to be our master. Some vital need asserts itself and the will feels impelled to satisfy the need. But one who undergoes a higher training has to acquire the habit of strict obedience to what he tells himself to do on his own initiative. In learning this he will be less and less inclined to cherish pointless desires. Dissatisfaction and instability in the life of will come from setting one's heart on some aim, of the realization of which one has formed no clear notion. Dissatisfaction of this kind can bring the whole inner life into disorder at the moment when a higher self is ready to come forth from the soul. A good exercise for the will is, every day for months on end, to give oneself the command: Today you are to do this, at this particular hour. One will gradually manage to fix the hour and the nature of the task so as to render the command perfectly possible to carry out. In this way we rise above that deplorable state of mind which finds expression in words such as: I would like to do this, I wish I could do that—when all the time there is no real expectation of fulfillment. A great poet made a prophetess say: “Him I love who craves for the impossible”2Goethe, Faust, Part II, Act II. And the same poet says in his own name: “To live in the Idea is to treat the impossible as thought it were possible.”3Goethe: Proverbs in Prose. Such words should however not be quoted as refuting the above recommendation. For the demand that Goethe and his prophetess (Manto) are making can only be met by one who has first educated himself in the achievement of desires that are possible of fulfillment—in order then, by dint of his strengthened will, to be able to treat the “impossible” in such a way as to change it by his will into the possible.
[ 26 ] Passing on now to the world of feeling, the pupil must succeed in reaching a certain equanimity of soul. For this he will need to have under his control all outward expression of pleasure or pain, of joy or sorrow. Such advice will be certain to meet with prejudice. Surely, if he is not to rejoice over what is joyful, not to sorrow over what is sorrowful, the pupil will become utterly indifferent to the life that is going on around him! But this is not at all what is meant. The pupil shall by all means rejoice over what if joyful and sorrow over what is sorrowful. It is the outward expression of joy and sorrow, of pleasure and pain that he must learn to control. If he honestly tries to attain this, he will soon discover that he does not grow less, but actually more sensitive than before to everything in his environment that can arouse emotions of joy or of pain. If the pupil is really to succeed in cultivating this control it will undoubtedly involve keeping close watch upon himself for a long time. He must not be slow to enter with fullness of feeling into pleasure and pain, but must be able to do so without losing self-control and giving involuntary expression to it. What he has to suppress is not the pain—that is justified—but the involuntary weeping; not the horror at a base action, but the outburst of blind fury; not the caution in face of danger, but the giving way to panic—which does no good whatever.
Only by the practice of an exercise of this kind can the pupil attain the inner poise and quiet that he will have need of when the time comes for the higher self to be born in the soul, and more especially when this higher self becomes active there. Otherwise the soul may lead an unhealthy lie of its own alongside the higher self—like a kind of double. It is important not to fall a victim to self-deception in this manner. It may seem to many a pupil that he already possesses a good measure of equanimity in ordinary life and will not therefore need this exercise. In point of fact, such a one is doubly in need of it. A man may remain perfectly calm and composed in relation to the exigencies of everyday life, and then, when he rises into a higher world, exhibit a sad lack of poise—all the more so indeed, since the tendency to let himself go was there all the time, only suppressed. It must be clearly understood that what a pupil appears to have already of some attribute of the soul is a little account for spiritual training; what is far more important is that he should practice regularly and systematically the exercises he needs. Contradictory as such a statement may sound, it is true nevertheless. Say that life has endowed us with this or that virtue; for spiritual training it is the virtues we ourselves have cultivated that are of value. Are we by nature easily excitable, it is for us to rid ourselves of this excitability; are we by nature calm and imperturbable, we must bestir ourselves to bring it about through our own self-education that the impressions we receive from without awake in us the right response. A man who cannot laugh has just ad little control over his life as a man who without self-control is perpetually giving way to laughter.
[ 27 ] It will be a further help to the education of his thinking and feeling, if the pupil acquire a virtue that I will call positiveness. A lovely legend is related of Christ Jesus. It tells how He is walking with a few other persons, and they pass by a dead dog. The other turn away from the revolting sight. Christ Jesus speaks admiringly of the beautiful teeth of the animal. One can train oneself to meet the world with the disposition of soul that this legend displays. The spurious, the bad and the ugly should not hinder us from finding, wherever they are present, the true, the good and the beautiful. Positiveness must not be confused lack of discrimination, or with an arbitrary shutting of one's eyes to what is bad, or false, or “good for nothing.” He who admires the “beautiful teeth” of a dead animal sees also the decaying body. The unsightly corpse does not, however, prevent him from seeing the beautiful teeth. We cannot deem a bad thing good or an error true; but we can take care not to be put off by the bad from seeing the good, nor by the false from seeing the true.
[ 28 ] The thinking, and together with it the willing, reaches a certain maturity if one tries never to let past experiences rob one of open-minded receptivity for new ones. To declare in the face of some new experience: “I never heard of such a thing, I don't believe it!” should make no sense at all to a pupil of the Spirit. Rather let him make the deliberate resolve, during a certain period of time to let every thing or being he encounters tell him something new. A breath of wind, a leaf falling from a tree, the prattle of a little child, can all teach us something, are we but ready to adopt a point of view to which we have perhaps not hitherto been accustomed. One can, it is true, carry this too far. We must not, at whatever age we have reached, put right out of our minds everything we have experienced hitherto. We have most decidedly to base our judgment of what confronts us now upon past experience. That is on the one side of the balance, but on the other there is the need for the pupil of the Spirit to be ready all the time for entirely new experiences; above all, to admit to himself the possibility that the new may contradict the old.
[ 29 ] These then are five qualities of soul the pupil has to acquire n the coursed of a right and proper training: control over the direction of his thoughts, control of his impulses of will, equanimity in the face of pleasure and pain, positiveness in his attitude to the world around him, readiness to meet life with an open mind. Lastly, when he has spent consecutive periods of time in training himself for the acquisition of these five qualities, the pupil will need to bring them into harmony in his soul. He will have to practice them in manifold combinations—two by two, three and one at a time, and so on, in order to establish harmony among them.2Goethe, Faust, Part II, Act II.
[ 30 ] These exercises have been assigned a place in spiritual training, because when thoroughly and effectually carried out they have not only their more immediate result in the cultivation of the desired qualities, but indirectly a great deal more will follow from them that is of no less importance for the pupil on his path to the spiritual worlds. Whoever gives sufficient time and care to their practice will, while he is doing them, come up against many blemishes and shortcomings in his soul, and will moreover find in the exercises themselves the means of strengthening and stabilizing his thought life, as well as his life of feeling and indeed his whole character. He will undoubtedly need many more exercises, adapted to his own individual faculties, to his particular character and temperament. These will emerge when the above have been practiced in all thoroughness. One will indeed discover, as time goes on, that these six exercises give one indirectly more than at first appears to be contained in them. Suppose the pupil is lacking in self-confidence. He will after a time begin to notice that, thanks to the exercises, he is gaining the self-confidence of which he stands in need. And it will be the same with other qualities of soul wherein he may be deficient. (Several exercises, described in more detail, will be found in my book Knowledge of the Higher Worlds and its Attainment.)
It is important that the pupil shall find it possible to go on developing the said six qualities in ever increasing measure. His control over this thoughts and sensations must become great enough to enable him to set aside times of complete inner quiet, when all the joys and sorrows, all the satisfactions and anxieties of everyday life—nay more, even all its tasks and demands are banished from mind and heart. In such times that alone which he himself wills to admit shall be allowed entry to his soul. Here again it is possible that some reader may feel misgiving. Will not the pupil become estranged from daily life and its tasks, if he withdraws from it in this way, banishing it from mind and heart for certain stated times during the day? In reality, however, this is far from being so. One who devotes himself in this way to periods of inner quiet, will find that he grows stronger in many respects for the tasks of daily life, and fulfils them, not only no less well, but decidedly better than before.
Such periods will have special value for the pupil if during them he refrains entirely from thinking of his own personal affairs and rises to the contemplation of the concerns of mankind at large. Should he be able at such times to fill his soul with communications that come from higher spiritual worlds, letting these take no less firm hold upon his interest than do his personal cares and concerns in ordinary life, he will be richly rewarded.
One who makes serious endeavor to gain this mastery over his life of soul will also find his way to a self-observation by means of which he will be able to regard his own concerns as coolly and quietly as if they had no connection with himself. To be able to look upon all experiences that come to one in life, all joys and sorrows, in the very same way as one looks upon those of others is a good preparation for spiritual training. The pupil will find he can gradually attain the necessary ability in this direction, if every evening when the day's work is done, he lets pass before his mind's eye pictures of the day's experiences, watching himself go through them. This will mean that he is looking at himself as he is in daily life—from without. To begin with, let him take small sections of the day. That will give him practice; and he will find that he grows more and more skilful in this “looking backward” until at last he is able to picture the whole day through in quite a short span of time. This beholding of our experiences in backward direction has a special value for spiritual training: it helps us disengage our thinking from its accustomed habit of holding on to the outer, material and sense-perceptible events. When we think backwards, we picture the events correctly, but we are no longer sustained by the obvious external sequence. The pupil needs this liberation if he is to make his way into the supersensible world. He will find too that by this freedom his thinking and ideation are strengthened, and in a thoroughly healthy manner. It is accordingly good also to review other things in backward order—a play, for example, a story, a melody, and so on.
A pupil of the Spirit will have it increasingly as his ideal to meet the events of life with inner quiet and confidence, forming his judgment on them, not as to how they accord with his own particular disposition but on the basis of their inherent meaning and inner value. By holding this ideal ever before him, he will be laying in his soul the foundation for that deep inner contemplation—of symbolic and other thoughts and also of feelings—of which we have been hearing.
[ 31 ] It is essential for the pupil to fulfill the above conditions, for supersensible experience has to be built upon the ground on which he stands in ordinary life before he enters the supersensible world. His experience there is dependent in two ways on the point he reached before setting out. If he has not taken special care to see that an ability for sound judgment is at the very foundation of his spiritual training, he will develop supersensible faculties which perceive the spiritual world inaccurately and falsely. His organs of spiritual perception will evolve in a wrong way. As in the world of the senses we cannot see correctly with imperfect or diseased eyes, so in the spiritual world we cannot perceive correctly with organs lacking the foundation of sound judgment and discrimination.
Should it happen that a pupil sets out on the path with an immoral character, his power of vision, when he mounts up into the spiritual worlds, will be dim and clouded. He will be like a man in the world of the senses who gazes at it in a condition of stupor. With this difference, however: whereas the latter will have little of any consequence to tell, the observer in the spiritual world—even in his stupor—is more awake than man is in ordinary consciousness, and will accordingly give information of what he sees there. The information will however be erroneous.
[ 32 ] The trustworthiness of the Imaginative stage of cognition can be assured if the pupil will lend support to his meditation by acquiring the habit of what may be called “sense-free” thinking. When we form a thought, basing it on something we have observed in the physical world, the thought is dependent on the physical senses. This is, however, not the only kind of thought we are able to entertain. There is no need for our thinking to be empty of content when it is no longer being filled with the data of sense-observation. The surest way to attain sense-free thinking, the way too that lies nearest at hand for the pupil, is to let his thinking lay hold of the facts of the higher world, communicated in spiritual science. These facts cannot be observed with the physical senses. Yet the pupil will find that with sufficient patience and perseverance he can grasp them. It is impossible to undertake research in the higher world, impossible to observe there for oneself, without spiritual training; one can however without higher training understand what is communicated by those who have carried out such research. If someone asks: But how can I take on trust what spiritual researchers say, when I cannot see it for myself?—the question is in reality unjustified. For it is perfectly possible, by simple reflection, to arrive at the sure conviction that the communications are true. If anyone finds himself unable to do so, it is not because it is impossible to “believe” something one does not see; it is due to the fact that the thought he has given to it has not been sufficiently free from prejudice, not comprehensive or deep enough. To be quite clear on this point, we must be ready to recognize that man's thinking can, if he applies it with energy and determination, grasp more than is generally supposed. For this thinking has within it an inner reality of being which has connection with the supersensible world. Man is, as a rule, unconscious of the connection, since he is accustomed to apply his thinking faculty to the sense-world alone; hence, when he hears of communications from the supersensible world, he sets them down as incomprehensible. They are however thoroughly comprehensible—and not alone to those whose thinking has been educated through spiritual training, but to every thinking person who is conscious of the full power of his thinking and ready to apply it.
By continuously apprising ourselves of what spiritual science tells, we grow accustomed to a thinking that does not take its start from outer observation by the senses. We learn now within our mind thought weaves on thought, thought seeks out thought, even when the connections have not been suggested by sensory observation. We make the significant discovery that the world of thought is inherently alive, and that when we are really and truly thinking we are already in the realm of a supersensible and living world. We say to ourselves: There is something in me that is developing a living organism of thought; moreover I myself am at one with it. As we continue to devote ourselves to sense-free thinking, we actually come to feel that there is something of real being—real inner substance—flowing into our inner life, even as when we observe with the senses there flow into us by way of our physical organs the properties of the things of sense.
[ 33 ] Out there in space, says the observer of the sense-world, is a rose. I do not feel it in any way strange or remote, for it makes itself known to me by means of its color and its scent. We need only be sufficiently free from preconceived ideas to be able also to say, when sense-free thinking is at work in us: Something quite real is making itself known to me, uniting thought with thought, forming within me a living body of thought. Yet there is an essential difference between the feeling we have towards the things we see in the external world of sense and on the other hand towards the reality of being that communicates itself to us in sense-free thinking. The observer of the external world of the senses will feel that he himself is outside the rose he is seeing with his eyes, while one who is devoting himself to sense-free thinking will feel within him the reality that is making itself known to him. He feels himself at one with it. And anyone who (whether quite consciously or less so) is only prepared to attribute reality to what confronts him as an external object, will naturally not entertain the idea that something inherently real can also become known to him through his being inwardly united and at one with it. There is an inner experience we need, to see the matter rightly. We have to learn to distinguish between the associations of thought which we ourselves produce more or less arbitrarily, and those we experience within us when we have silenced our own arbitrary will. In the latter instance we can say: I remain perfectly still, I myself bring about no association of thought with thought; I give myself up to that which “thinks in me.” We are then perfectly justified in saying: Something real is at work in me—no less justified than when on seeing the rose color and perceiving its scent, we say: A rose is there making an impression on me.
The fact that we receive the content of the thoughts from communications made by the researcher in the Spirit does not contradict this. True, the thoughts are already there; but it is not possible for us to think them without creating them anew every time in our soul. That is really the whole point. The researcher in the Spirit awakens in his hearers and readers thoughts that they have to evoke out of themselves, whereas one who is describing a “real” object—real in the world of the senses—is calling attention to what his hearers and readers can observe in the external world.
[ 34 ] (The path that leads to sense-free thinking by way of the communications of spiritual science is thoroughly reliable and sure. There is however another that is even more sure, and above all more exact; at the same time, it is for many people also more difficult. The path in question is set forth in my books The Theory of Knowledge implicit in Goethe's World-Conception and The Philosophy of Spiritual Activity. These books tell of what man's thinking can achieve when directed, not to impressions that come from the outer world of the physical senses, but solely upon itself. When this is so, we have within us no longer the kind of thinking that concerns itself merely with memories of the things of sense; we have instead pure thinking which is like a being that has life within itself. In the above-mentioned books you will find nothing at all that is derived from communications of spiritual science. They testify to the fact that pure thinking, working within itself alone, can throw light on the great questions of life—questions concerning the universe and man. The books thus occupy a significant intermediate position between knowledge of the sense world and knowledge of the spiritual world. What they offer is what thinking can attain, when it rises above sense-observation, yet still holds back from entering upon spiritual, supersensible research. One who wholeheartedly pursues the train of thought indicated in these books is already in the spiritual world; only it makes itself known to him as a thought-world. Whoever feels ready to enter upon this intermediate path of development will be taking a safe and sure road, and it will leave him a feeling in regard to the higher world that will bear rich fruit through all time to come.)
[ 35 ] The end in view for which the pupil engages in meditation upon symbolic thought-pictures or upon certain feelings, is neither more nor less than the development, within the astral body, of higher organs of perception. These organs are created out of the substance of the astral body itself; they bring the pupil into contact with a new world, and in this new world he learns to know himself as a new I or Ego. They differ from the organs with which we observe the world of the physical senses in that they are active. Eye and ear remain passive, allowing light and sound to act upon them; of the organs of perception that belong to the soul and spirit it can truly be said that while they are perceiving they are in continual activity, and furthermore that they comprehend, quite consciously, the objects and facts that they perceive. This gives us the feeling that when we “know” with our soul and spirit, the very knowing is at the same time a blending with the facts we come to know; we feel we are living within them.
The several organs of soul and spirit that develop in this manner may be called, by way of comparison, lotus-flowers; the name accords with the form in which supersensible consciousness has to picture them—picture them, that is Imaginatively. (It need hardly be said that such a designation has no more direct relation to reality than has the expression “Flügel” or “wing” in the word “Lungenflügel” meaning “Lobe of the lung.”) Specific kinds of meditation work upon the astral body in such a way as to lead to the development of one or other of these “lotus flowers.” After all that has been given in this book, it should be quite unnecessary to stress the fact that we have not to think of these organs of perception as though the symbolic picture of them which the name suggests were a direct imprint of their real nature. They are supersensible and consist in a definite activity of the soul; indeed they only exist in so far and for so long s the activity continues. We could as little speak, in connection with them, of anything observable by the senses, as we could of seeing a mist or cloud around a man when he is thinking! Those who insist on picturing the supersensible in sensual terms will inevitably be involved in misunderstandings. Superfluous as this remark should be, I let it stand, since one is constantly meeting with people who believe in the supersensible and yet want to picture it in far too sensual a way; also there are opponents of supersensible knowledge who imagine that when the scientist of the Spirit speaks of “lotus flowers” he thinks of them as tangible objects howsoever refined—objects perceptible to the outer senses.
Every meditation undertaken for the attainment of Imaginative cognition has its influence, if rightly carried out, upon one or other of these organs. (In my book Knowledge of the Higher Words and its Attainment meditations and exercises are given that take effect on this or that particular organ.) A proper spiritual training will arrange the several exercises in such order as to enable these organs of the soul to develop singly, together, or in due succession, as the case may be. This development asks for great patience and perseverance on the part of the pupil. The degree of patience a man gains in the ordinary course of life will not suffice. For it will be a long time—in many instances a very long time indeed—before the organs are so far developed that the pupil can make use of them for perceiving in the higher world. The moment he does become able to do this, he enters upon the stage of Enlightenment, so-called in contradistinction to the stage of Preparation, Probation or Purification, where the pupil is engaged upon the exercises that are given for the development of the organs. (The word “Purification” is used, because by means of the exercises he undergoes, the pupil “cleanses” a certain region of his inner life, casting out from it everything that has its source in the external world of the senses.) It may well happen that even before he reaches the stage of Enlightenment, a man will frequently experience sudden flashes that come from a higher world. These he should receive with thankfulness. The fact that he has them enables him already to bear witness to the spiritual world. He must however not weaken in his resolve if no such moments come during the time of Preparation—which may perhaps seem to him to be lasting all too long. Anyone who allows himself to grow impatient because he can still “see nothing” has not yet succeeded in finding his right relation to a higher world. He alone has done so who can look upon the exercises he undertakes in his training as an end in themselves. With these he is in very truth doing work upon something in him that is of the nature of soul and spirit, namely, upon his astral body. And even when as yet he “sees nothing,” he can feel: I am really working and functioning in soul and spirit. If however he has made up his mind beforehand as to what he is going to “see,” he will not have this feeling. He will in that case be disregarding what is in truth of incalculable significance. He should on the contrary be paying careful attention to all that he experiences while doing the exercises. For this is radically different from anything he meets with in the world of sense. Already at this stage he will remark that in working upon his astral body he is not working into some indifferent substance, but that in his astral body lives a world of quite another kind—a world of which his life amid the outer senses tells him nothing. Even as the external world of the senses works upon the physical body, so are the higher Beings working upon the astral body. The pupil will “impinge” upon the higher life in his own astral body, provided he himself does not stand in the way. If he is continually saying to himself: “I can perceive nothing at all,” it will generally mean that he has formed his own idea of what the spiritual percept has to look like, and since he does not see it in the form he has imagined, he says: “I see nothing at all.”
[ 36 ] The pupil who has the right attitude to his exercises will find increasingly that the very doing of them is something he can love for its own sake. He knows moreover that the doing of them places him already in a world of soul and spirit, and he waits with patience and above all with devotion for what is to come. This mood in the pupil can be best lifted into consciousness in the following words: “I am resolved to carry out whatever exercises are right for me, and I know that I shall meantime be receiving as much as is important for me to receive. I do not demand it, I am not impatient; I simply hold myself ready all the time to receive it.” It is quite wrong to contend: “So then the pupil is to grope his way on in the dark, perhaps for an incredibly long time, with no means of knowing that he is on the right path until success prove it to him!” For it is simply not true that the pupil has to wait for the exercises to achieve their end before he can be assured of their validity. If he undertakes them in the right spirit he need not wait for their eventual outcome; the satisfaction that he has in doing them will of itself make it clear to him that he is on the true path. Proper practice of exercises belonging to a path of spiritual training brings with it a sense of satisfaction that is no mere satisfaction but certain knowledge. The pupil knows: I am engaging in an activity which I can see is taking me forward in the right direction. Every pupil of the Spirit can have this certainty at every moment, if only he observes his experiences with sensitive discernment. If he is crudely inattentive, he is letting them go past him like a person out walking who is so deeply absorbed in his own reflections that he does not see the trees on either side of his path—although he could quite well be seeing them if he would only turn his eyes in their direction.
It is indeed undesirable that any other result than this one, which always attends the doing of the exercises, should be induced before the time is due. For it may well be that a seemingly successful result is no more than the smallest fraction of what should ensue in right and proper course. In spiritual development a partial success will often lead to a prolonged postponement of complete success. Moving familiarly among such forms of spiritual life as disclose themselves at an imperfect stage renders one insusceptible to influences that lead to higher levels of development. The seeming boon—namely the fact that one has after all had sight of the spiritual world—is not really a boon at all; this kind of “beholding” cannot impart objective truth but only delusive pictures.
[ 37 ] The organs of soul and spirit, the lotus flowers, that are in course of development in one who is undergoing training, reveal themselves to supersensible consciousness in the neighborhood, as it were, of particular bodily organs. From among the number of these organs of the soul, mention will here be made of the following. There is, first, the organ that is perceived as though about midway between the eyebrows (the so-called two-petalled lotus-flower;) then, the organ in the region of the larynx (the sixteen-petalled lotus-flower;) thirdly, the organ in the region of the heart (the twelve-petalled lotus-flower;) and then a fourth in the neighborhood of the pit of the stomach. Others come to view near other parts of the physical body. (The appellation two-or sixteen-petalled is not inappropriate, for the organs in question are in appearance comparable to flowers with these numbers of petals.)
[ 38 ] The lotus-flowers become manifest to the consciousness of the pupil in his astral body. As soon as he has developed one or other of them, he knows that he has it. He feels he can make use of it and that in doing so he does actually enter a higher world. The impressions he receives there still resemble in many respects those of the physical world. One who has attained Imaginative cognition will thus be able, in speaking of this new higher world, to describe his impressions by reference to sensations, for example, of warmth or of cold; or he may compare them to hearing music or speech, or to the effect upon him of light or color. For this is the kind of feeling he has of them. He is however conscious that perceptions acquired in the Imaginative world tell of something altogether different from those acquired in the world of sense. He knows that what gives rise to them is not physical or material, but of the nature of soul and spirit. Suppose he receives an impression resembling the sensation of warmth. He will not ascribe it, for example, to a piece of hot iron, but will consider it as emanating from some soul situation or event of a kind that he has hitherto been aware of only in his inner life of soul. He knows that his Imaginative perceptions are due to things and happenings of the nature of pure soul and spirit, even as his physical perceptions are due to facts and entities of a material, physical nature.
Along with this resemblance of the Imaginative to the physical world there is at the same time a significant difference between them. One ever-present feature of the physical world shows itself in the Imaginative world in a totally different way. In the physical world we can observe a continual coming into being and passing away again, a constant alternation of birth with death. In the Imaginative world we find instead perpetual transformation taking place—one thing changing into another. For instance, in the physical world we see a plant droop and die. In the Imaginative world, as the plant fades away, another form—invisible to the physical senses—is all the time seen to be arising, into which the dying plant gradually changes. When the plant has quite disappeared, before us in its place is this new form, fully developed. Birth and death are conceptions which lose their meaning in the Imaginative world. In their place we have the concept of transformation or metamorphosis—one thing changing into another.
This is how it is that the truths concerning the being of man which have been communicated in the chapters on “the Nature of Humanity” become accessible to Imaginative cognition. With the physical senses, only the processes of the physical body can be perceived, and these take place in the “realm of birth and death.” The other members of man's nature—the life-body, the sentient body and the I—are subject to the law of transformation; Imaginative cognition is therefore able to perceive them. One who has progressed to this stage can see how at death something as it were releases itself from the physical body and lives on further in a different kind of existence.
[ 39 ] But spiritual development does not come to an end in the Imaginative world. If we wanted to remain in that world and go no farther, we would be unable to give any explanation for the changes that were taking place; we could not find our bearings in the world to which we had gained access. The Imaginative world is a restless place. Everywhere in it there is movement, nothing but movement and change; nowhere does it come to rest. Only when we develop beyond the stage of Imaginative cognition and reach what may be called “cognition through Inspiration” do we find a resting-place.
It is not essential that one who sets out to attain knowledge of the supersensible world shall first acquire Imaginative knowledge in full measure and only then proceed to Inspiration. A pupil's training may be so regulated that exercises leading to Imagination are continued side by side with exercises for the development of Inspiration. He will then, in due time, come into a higher world where he does not merely perceive but can also orientate himself—a world in which he can begin to see meaning. In point of fact, it will indeed generally happen that as the pupil progresses, glimpses of the Imaginative world are first of all vouchsafed him, and that then, after a time, he has the feeling: Now I am beginning also to find my bearings.
Yet it must also be realized that the world if Inspiration is something different and new, compared to that of Imagination. With Imaginative cognition we perceive events and processes in mutual transformation. With Inspiration we come to know the inner qualities of the beings who are undergoing transformation. With Imagination we see the manifestation of these beings in the realm of soul. With Inspiration we penetrate to their inner spiritual nature; above all, we come to know a multiplicity of beings and learn of the connections between them. In the physical world we also have to do with a multiplicity of beings or entities of various kinds, but in the world of Inspiration this multiplicity is of quite another character. There each single being has its distinctive connections with other beings, connections that are determined, not as in the physical world by some outward impressions that the beings make upon one another, but by their inner character and spiritual nature. When we perceive a being in the world of Inspiration, we are not looking at some external influence that the being is exerting upon another being, comparable with the influence exerted by one physical being upon another; what confronts us there is a relationship between two beings that comes about solely through the inner character both of the one and of the other. There is in the physical world one kind of relationship to which this may bear comparison—such a relationship as obtains between the several sounds or letters of a word. Say we have before us the word “bold.” The word comes about through the sounding together of the sounds b-o-l-d. The sounds b and o, for example, do not collide or react on one another in some external way; they act together and each fulfils it part within the whole by virtue of its inner character. The activity of “observing” in the world of Inspiration can therefore be compared with reading. The beings in that world present themselves to the observer like letters that he must first learn and that will then be revealed to him in their several relationships, forming as it were a spiritual script or supersensible writing. Spiritual science may therefore avail itself of this comparison and call the knowledge acquired through Inspiration: the Reading of the Hidden Script.
[ 40 ] How the Reading of the Hidden Script is done, and how what is read may be communicated shall now be explained with reference to the earlier chapters of the present book. A description was given in the first place of the being of man, telling of how it is built up of several members. Then it was shown how the world in which man is evolving has itself passed through various stages of evolution—the Saturn condition, then the Sun, the Moon and now the Earth condition. Imaginative cognition brings within our reach perceptions that make us acquainted, on the one hand with the members of man's being, on the other hand with the successive conditions of our Earth and the changes it has undergone up to the present time. We then had to go further and learn of the relationship that exists between the Saturn condition of our Earth and the physical body of man, between the Sun condition and his ether-body and so on. We were shown how the seed for the physical body came into being as long ago as the Saturn condition, and has continued developing throughout Sun, Moon and Earth conditions right up to its present form. It became necessary also to show, for example, what changes came about in the being of man owing to the separation of the Sun from the Earth, and again what further changes were wrought in him by the parallel event in respect of the Moon; and then what kind of co-operation was needed to bring about those still later changes in mankind that found expression during the Atlantean time and the epochs that followed it—the Indian, Persian, Egyptian and so on. The picture that was given of these connections was derived not from Imaginative perception, but from knowledge attained through Inspiration, from Reading in the Hidden Script. In relation to this “reading” the perceptions of Imagination are like the individual letters or sounds. Nor is it only explanations of this kind for which the reading is required. The course of man's life could not be understood if we were to study it with the help of Imaginative knowledge alone. We would, it is true, perceive how at death the soul-and-spirit members disengage themselves from what remains behind in the physical world; but we would not understand how the events that happen to man after death are related to past and future conditions, unless we already know our way about the world we perceived Imaginatively. Without the knowledge acquired through Inspiration, the Imaginative world is like a script at which we merely stare, without being able to read it.
[ 41 ] When the pupil of the Spirit goes forward from Imagination to Inspiration, he very quickly realizes what a mistake it would be to neglect to cultivate an understanding for the great events and phenomena of the Universe and to want to restrict his attention to the facts that bear upon his more immediate human interests. It can easily happen that one who has not been initiated into these matters will say: “The one thing of importance for me is to learn about the destiny of the soul of man after death. If I can receive information upon that, then I am satisfied. Why does spiritual science set before me such remote matters as the Saturn and Sun conditions of our Earth, the separation of the Sun—and later of the Moon—from the Earth, and so on? Whoever has been introduced in the right way to the whole subject of higher knowledge will come to see that he cannot attain authentic information about man's destiny after death, until he has first learned about those greater themes that might have seemed unnecessary. A picture of the condition into which man is brought after death will remain for him quite unintelligible and therefore worthless, if he cannot bring it together with conceptions that have grown out of these more remote themes. The very simplest observation that can be made by means of supersensible cognition requires him to be acquainted with them. When, for instance, a plant passes from the flowering stage and begins to bear fruit, then if we are watching it with supersensible powers of observation, we see a change taking place in an astral entity which in the flowering time has been enveloping the plant from above like a cloud. But for the “fertilization” as it is called (leading from flower to fruit,) this astral entity would have passed on into an altogether different form from the one it has assumed in consequence of fertilization. And we can only comprehend the whole process when seen with supersensible perception if we have prepared our understanding by studying the great cosmic event which the Earth and all her inhabitants experienced at the time of the separation of the Sun. Before fertilization the plant it is in a similar condition to that of the whole Earth before the Sun went out from her. After fertilization, the flower of the plant is like the Earth was when the Sun had left and the Moon forces were still within her. If we have mastered the conceptions that can be acquired by studying the separation of the Sun from the Earth, then the significance of the “fertilization” of a flowering plant will present itself to us in a way we can express by saying that before it the plant is in a Sun-like, and after it in a Moon-like condition. It is not too much to say that the smallest event in the world can only be rightly comprehended when we recognize in it an image of the great cosmic events. Without this recognition we are as far from understanding its real nature as we would be from understanding a Raphael Madonna that was all covered over except for one little patch of blue.
Everything that happens to man is in this way an image, having its prototype amid those great events of cosmic evolution with which his existence is bound up. If we would understand what supersensible consciousness perceives in human life—whether in the life between birth and death, or in the life between death and a new birth—we shall find we are able to do so if we take to our help the sublime conceptions that can be gained from dwelling on the great events of cosmic evolution. These will furnish us with the key to an understanding of the life of man. From the point of view of spiritual science, study of Saturn, Sun and Moon evolution is thus at the same time study of man.
[ 42 ] Through Inspiration we learn how the Beings of the higher world are related to one another. A still further stage of knowledge opens up the possibility of coming to know these Beings in their innermost nature. This stage may be given the name of Intuitive cognition. (the words “intuitive” and “intuition” are sometimes used for a kind of vague insight or sudden notion that may or may not quite accord with truth. What is here meant by “Intuition” is altogether different. It means a kind of cognition that is of the utmost light-filled clarity, a cognition that carries with it absolute assurance of its validity.) To have knowledge of an object perceived by the senses is to be outside the object and judge it in accordance with the impression it makes upon us from without. To know a Spirit-Being through Intuition is to become one with that Being, to be inwardly united with him. Stage by stage the pupil of the Spirit rises to a knowledge of this kind. With Imagination, he is already beyond feeling that his perceptions reveal the mere external characteristics of the Beings he perceives. Imagination leads him to recognize, in his perceptions, emanations of a living reality of soul and spirit. Inspiration takes him a step further into the inner essence of the spiritual Beings: he learns to understand what they are to one another. In Intuition, he penetrates right into their inner being.
Once again we can refer to the account of evolution that has been given in this book, in order to demonstrate the significance of Intuition. The foregoing chapters do not only relate how Saturn, Sun and Moon evolution took their course, they also tell of Beings who took part in this progress in many different ways. Allusion was made to the Thrones or Spirits of Will, to the Spirits of Wisdom, Spirits of Movement and so forth. And in connection with Earth evolution itself, the Spirits of Lucifer and of Ahriman were mentioned. The whole edifice of the Universe was traced back to Beings who all had their share in bringing it into existence. What can be learned concerning these Beings is acquired by Intuitive cognition. And the Intuitive cognition is likewise needed if we want to understand the course of human life. What is released from the physical body after death passes through various stages, as time goes on. The situation in which man finds himself immediately after death is, up to a point, capable of description by the exercise of Imaginative cognition. What happens later, however, when man is further on in the time between death and a new birth, would have to remain totally incomprehensible if Inspiration did not supervene. Inspiration is required to discover what can be said about the life of man in Spirit-land when the time of purification is over. Then comes a state where even Inspiration no longer suffices, where it loses the way and fails to understand. In the course of man's development between death and a new birth, he enters upon a time where Intuition alone can follow him. The part of man that undergoes this experience is however always in him, and if we would understand it in its true inwardness, then we must look for it also—again by means of Intuition—during the time between birth and death. Whoever is content with a knowledge of man acquired by Imagination and Inspiration will find himself without means of access to what goes on in man's very innermost being from one incarnation to the next. It is therefore only with Intuitive cognition that adequate research can be made into repeated lives on Earth and into the workings of Karma. Everything that claims to be true information concerning these must be derived from research that is made by means of Intuitive cognition. And if man desires knowledge of himself in his inmost being, this too he can attain only through Intuition. By means of Intuition he perceives that within him which goes forward from one Earth-life to another.
[ 43 ] The faculties of cognition that belong to Inspiration and Intuition—these too can only be attained by means of exercises in the realm of soul and spirit. The exercises are akin to those given for the attainment of Imagination, described above ads deep inner contemplation (meditation.) Whereas however the exercises leading to Imagination are still associated with sense-impressions, in those that lead to Inspiration all such association must be increasingly eliminated. In order to make quite clear what has now to happen, let us return once more to the symbol of the Rose Cross. When we meditate upon the Rose Cross we have before us a picture, the component parts of which are derived from the sense-world—the black color of the cross, the roses, and so forth. But the assembling of the parts to form the Rose Cross is a deed the origin of which is no longer in the sense-world. If now the pupil of the Spirit will try to let the black cross and also the red roses—pictures, both of them, of objects real in the world of the senses—disappear completely from his consciousness, retaining there nothing but the spiritual activity which brought the parts together, in this activity he has the substance of the kind of meditation that can lead him, in course of time, to Inspiration. He should look into his own soul and ask himself: What was I doing when I brought cross and roses together to form a symbolic picture? What I was doing—the process I was bringing about in my soul—that will I now hold fast; the picture itself I will let disappear from consciousness. And now, without letting the picture rise up before me, I will feel what my soul was doing to produce the picture. I will for the time being live a completely inward life, living solely in my own activity that created the picture. I will enter, that is, into deep contemplation, not of any picture, but of my own picture-creating activity.
Meditation of this kind has to be undertaken by the pupil in connection with many different thought-pictures. It will in time lead him to knowledge through Inspiration. To take another example. We meditate the thought-picture of a sprouting, and then again of a dying plant. First, we let the picture rise up in our mind of a plant that is gradually coming into being; we see it sprouting from the seed, we see how it unfolds leaf after leaf and finally brings forth blossom and fruit. Then we see it begin gradually to wither, until at last it died right away. Meditating upon such a picture, we begin to acquire a feeling of the process as such—the process of coming-into-being and dying-away. If we want to go further and reach the corresponding Inspiration, we shall have to do the exercise in another way. We shall have to concentrate our attention on the activity of soul that we ourselves engaged in, in order for the picture of the plant to arrive at the idea of the coming-into-being and dying-away. The plant has now to disappear entirely from consciousness, and we then left meditating upon what we have been doing in our own soul. Only by means of such exercises is the ascent to Inspiration possible.
To begin with, the pupil will not find it altogether easy to be quite clear in his mind as to how he is to set about an exercise of this nature. If he has been accustomed to let his inner life be determined by external impressions, then, when he wants to develop in his soul an inner life that has broken loose from all connection with external impressions, then, when he wants to develop in his soul an inner life that has broken loose from all connection with external impressions, then, he will be at a loss how to proceed. Hence on the path to Inspiration it will be still more essential than before to accompany the given exercises with all those precautionary measures that were recommended to him when setting out to attain Imagination—measures for ensuring stability and confidence, alike in his powers of discrimination, in his life of feeling and in his conduct and character. If he succeeds with these, the pupil will find they have a twofold effect upon him. He will not run the risk of losing his balance when he attains to vision of the supersensible; and he will also become capable of fulfilling quite exactly and faithfully the demands made upon him by the new exercises. The pupil will need to develop here a specific mood and disposition of soul, with the feelings that rightly belong to it; till he has done so, he may well find the exercises difficult. If however he will patiently and perseveringly cultivate within him the qualities of soul that are favorable to the birth of supersensible cognition, it will not be long before he finds himself able to understand the exercises and also to carry them out. Let him make a habit of communing often with his own soul—but not with a view to musing upon himself! Rather should he set out before his mind's eye the successive experiences he has met with in life and consider them quietly. The effort will be well rewarded. He will find that his thought and ideas, and also his feelings, are enriched by bringing these experiences into relation with one another. He will come to realize how true it is that we gain new experience not only by having new impressions or undergoing new events in life; but also by letting the old work on within us. The pupil who really succeeds in letting his experiences—yes, and even the opinions he had gained—play upon one another, as though he himself, with his sympathies and antipathies, his personal interests and feelings, were in no way concerned, will be preparing within him particularly good ground for the growth of the faculty of supersensible cognition. He will in very truth develop what one may call a rich inner life.
What is throughout of the very first importance is that balance and harmony should reign among the various qualities and inclinations of the soul. When man devotes himself to some particular activity of soul, he tends all too easily to become one-sided. Having realized how beneficial is the habit of inner reflection, of sojourning now and again in the world of one's own thoughts, he may grow so fond of doing this that he tends increasingly to shut himself off from the impressions of the world around him. Such a habit could only lead to a bare and arid inner lie. He will advance farthest who retains, along with the ability to withdraw into his own soul, an open-minded receptiveness for all that the external world offers for his perception. And here we should not have in mind merely such objects and events as are commonly considered important; everyone—be his situation in life never so mean and never so circumscribed—can find experience enough within its walls, provided he foster in mind and heart a sensitiveness to all that goes on around him. He has no occasion to go out in search of experiences; they are around him on every hand.
Emphasis has also to be laid on the way in which we receive and reflect upon our experiences. You may, for instance, happen to discover one day that a person whom you revere has some feature in his character which you cannot but regard as a blemish. As you think it over, the discovery may affect you in either of two ways. You may simply say to yourself: Knowing what I now know, I can no longer revere him as I did. Or, you may ask yourself the question: How can it have come about that this person, for whom I have such veneration, has to labor under a defect of this kind? Ought I not perhaps to look upon the fault, not just as a fault, but as a result of the life he has led, perhaps even consequent upon his qualities of greatness? Having seriously faced this question, you may perhaps find that your reverence for him is, after all, undiminished by the discover of a flaw in his character. Every such experience will have taught you something: your understanding of lie will be the truer for it. You would of course be making a bad mistake if you let your appreciation of this way of meeting life mislead you into excusing anything and everything in people or in things to whom or to which you are partial; or if you allowed yourself to drift into a habit of shutting your eyes to whatever is blameworthy, imagining that you were thereby furthering your own inner development. For this you will certainly not be doing, if it is to satisfy your own inclinations that you refrain from blaming faults and try instead to understand and condone them. It will e helpful only if this attitude is called for by the nature of the case, irrespective of whether you yourself are to gain or lose by its adoption. It is undoubtedly true that one can never learn by passing judgment on a fault but only by coming to understand it. Anyone however who in his desire to understand the fault proceeds to banish from his mind all sense of displeasure at it, will be making little headway in his development. So here we have again an instance where what is required is not one-sidedness in one or other direction, but balance and harmony between the several virtues of the soul.
This is true in quite a special degree of on property of the soul that is of outstanding significance for higher development—I mean, the feeling of reverent devotion. One who cultivates this feeling or who has always possessed it as a kind of gift of Nature, has a good foundation upon which to build the faculties of supersensible cognition. Has he been able in childhood to look up with devotion and admiration to persons who stood for him as lofty ideals, then his soul will provide good ground whereon new powers of cognition can grow and flourish. And whoever in later life, in years of riper judgment, gazes up at the starry heavens, filled with wonder and boundless devotion at the revelation he there divines of sublime spiritual powers, will be well on the way to grow ripe for knowledge of supersensible worlds. The same holds true of one who is able to feel wonder and admiration at the powers that are active in the life of man. And of no less significance is also that reverence which a person of maturer years may continue to cherish in full measure for other human beings whose worth he divines or recognizes. Indeed only where such reverence is present, is it possible to come within sight of the higher worlds. A man who is incapable of reverence will not progress very far on the path of knowledge. To one for whom there is nothing in all the world that he deems worthy of his esteem, the real nature of things will ever remain a closed book.
Should anyone on the other hand allow himself to be misled by feelings of reverence and devotion to the complete annulment of his own healthy self-assertion and self-confidence, he too will be sinning against the law of harmony and balance. The pupil of the Spirit will work continuously at his development, that he may grow ever more and more mature; and if he is doing this, then it is only right that he should have confidence in himself and feel assured that his powers are growing all the time. Would he see the whole matter in its true light, let him say to himself: Hidden within me are spiritual powers, and I can call them forth out of my inner life. Hence when I see something that commands my respect because is higher than I, not only should I feel reverence for it, but I may be confident that I myself shall in time come to the stage of development where I am like it.
[ 44 ] The more a man is able to be attentive to happenings or situations in his life which in the ordinary course are unfamiliar to him and would elude his judgment, the greater ability will he have to lay the foundation for right development on the path into the spiritual worlds. An example can help make this clear. A person comes into a situation where it is open to him to carry out some particular action—or to leave it undone. His judgment says to him: Do it! But he has in his soul an unaccountable feeling that draws him back. It may happen that he pays no heed to this feeling but simply goes ahead in accordance with the verdict of his judgment. Or again, it may happen that he yields to this inexplicable urge within him, and refrains. If then he follows up the matter to see what happens later, it may turn out that had he obeyed his judgment, harm would have come of it, but that good has resulted from his leaving the action undone. Such an experience can set going in the pupil a train of thought that may run as follows. Within me, he may say to himself, lives something which guides me better than can my faculty of judgment at its present stage of development. I must keep an open mind for this “something” which is on a much higher level than I can reach with my present powers. If we pay careful heed to situations of this kind as we meet them in life, we shall receive considerable benefit from doing so. We shall begin to sense (and this itself is already a sign of health in our inner life) that there is more in man than comes within the range of his ordinary judgment. The very recognition of such a fact widens the soul. Here again, however, we might be led into highly questionable byways. Should we acquire the habit of constantly shutting down our faculty of judgment because some dim feeling impels us to take another course, we might well become the plaything of all manner of undefined motives. And from such a habit the way leads all too quickly into weak-mindedness and superstition.
Fatal for the pupil of the Spirit is superstition of every sort. He can only hope ever to find the right and true path to the realm of Spirit-life by carefully guarding himself from superstition, from flights of fancy, and from all day-dreaming. A person who feels glad when he is brought up against something in life which is “beyond human understanding” will not be the one to enter the spiritual world in the right way. Fondness for the “inexplicable” is emphatically not a qualification for discipleship of the Spirit. Indeed the pupil should utterly discard the notion that a true mystic is one who is always ready to surmise the presence of what cannot be explained or explored. The right way is to be prepared to recognize on all hands hidden forces and hidden beings, yet at the same time to assume that what is “unexplored” today will be able to be explored when the requisite ability has been developed.
[ 45 ] There is a certain mood of soul which it is important for the pupil to maintain at every stage of his development. He should not let his urge for higher knowledge lead him to keep on aiming to get answers to particular questions. Rather should he continually be asking: How am I to develop the needed faculties within myself? For when by dint of patient inner work some faculty develops in him, he will receive the answer to some of his questions. Genuine pupils of the Spirit will always take pains to cultivate this attitude of soul. They will thereby be encouraged to work upon themselves, that they may become ever more and more mature in spirit, and they will abjure the desire to extort answers to particular questions. They will wait until such time as the answers come.
Here again, however, there is the possibility of a one-sidedness, which may prevent the pupil from going forward in the way he should. For at some moment he may quite rightly feel that—according to the measure of his powers—he can answer for himself even questions of the highest order. Thus at every turn moderation and balance play an essential part in the life of the soul.
[ 46 ] Many more qualities of soul could be cited that may with advantage be fostered and developed, if the pupil is seriously wanting to work through a training for Inspiration; and in connection with every one of them we should find that emphasis is laid on the supreme importance of moderation and balance. These attributes of soul help the pupil to understand the exercises that are given for the attainment of Inspiration, and also make him capable of carrying them out.
[ 47 ] The exercises for Intuition demand from the pupil that he let disappear from consciousness not only the pictures to which he gave himself up in contemplation in order to arrive at Imaginative cognition, but also that meditating upon his own activity of soul, which he practiced for the attainment of Inspiration. This means that he is now to have in his soul literally nothing of what he has experienced hitherto, whether outwardly or inwardly. If, after discarding all outward and inward experience, nothing whatever is left in his consciousness—that is to say, if consciousness simply slips away from him and he sinks into unconsciousness—then that will tell him that he is not yet ripe to undertake the exercises for Intuition and must continue working with those for Imagination and Inspiration. A time will come however when, after all experiences, inner and outer, have been banished from it, consciousness is not left empty, but something remains in it to which the pupil can now give himself up in deep contemplation even as he formerly gave himself up to what came to him from outer or inner impressions. This “something” is of a very special nature. In relation to all that the pupil has hitherto experienced and learned it is entirely new. When he feels it there in his consciousness, he knows: This is something of which up to now I have had no knowledge at all. It is a clear perception and I perceive it, just as I should perceive a note of music that my ear was hearing; yet it can only enter my consciousness through Intuition, even as the music can only enter there by way of the ear. In Intuition the impressions man receives are stripped bare of the last remnant of connection with the physical senses. The spiritual world now begins to lie open for his cognition in a form that has nothing in common with the properties of the sense-world.
[ 48 ] Imaginative cognition is attained when the lotus-flowers unfold from the astral body. As a result of the exercises undertaken for the attainment of Inspiration and Intuition, movements and currents make their appearance of man's ether- or life-body, which were not there before. These movements are the organs that enable man to add to his faculties the “Reading of the Hidden Script” and yet further powers that lie beyond. The changes that are wrought in his ether-body when a pupil has attained Inspiration and Intuition, reveal themselves to supersensible cognition in the following way. Somewhere as if in the neighborhood of the physical heart one becomes conscious of a new center in the ether-body, which forms itself into an etheric organ. From this center all manner of movings and streamings run out to the various parts of the physical body. The most important of these go to the lotus-flowers, flow right through them and through their several petals, then turn outwards and pour themselves into outer space like rays of light. The more highly developed a pupil is, the larger is the circle around him in which these currents are perceptible. Under a properly regulated training this center in the neighborhood of the heart does not however develop right at the beginning. Preparation has to be made for it. A preliminary center appears first in the head, is then transplanted into the region of the larynx and finally comes to rest in the neighborhood of the physical heart. If development is irregular, it may be that this organ is formed in the region of the heart form the outset. There will then be a danger that instead of attaining calm and objective supersensible perception, the pupil might develop into a fantastic dreamer.
As he progresses further, the pupil comes to the point where he can release these currents and memberings of his ether-body from dependence on the physical body, and make use of them directly, without reference to the physical body. The lotus-flowers serve him then as instruments by means of which he moves his ether-body. Before this can happen, certain special streams and rays must have been forming in the whole circumference of the ether-body, enclosing it as though with a fine network, rendering it a distinct, self-contained entity. Then there is nothing to hinder the movements and streamings that are going on in the ether-body from making contact with the external world of soul and spirit and from uniting with it, so that what is happening without and what is happening within—that is to say, within the human ether-body—are able to come when the human being can perceive consciously the world of Inspiration. This kind of cognition shows itself from the first to be of quite a different character from the cognition that relates to the physical world. Here, we receive impressions through our senses and then proceed to entertain ideas and concepts about these impressions. The acquisition of knowledge by means of Inspiration is not like that. The “knowing” is achieved in one single act; there is no thought-process following the perception. What in the act of cognition by means of the physical senses is acquired only subsequently in the concept, is in the Inspirational cognition given simultaneously with the percept. This being so, the pupil would flow right into the surrounding world of soul and spirit, would merge with it and be unable to distinguish himself from it, had he not formed before in his ether-body the network that has just been described.
[ 49 ] The exercises that are given for Intuition influence not only the ether-body; they also leave their mark on the supersensible forces that are at work in the physical body. This must not be taken to mean that changes are effected there, perceptible to ordinary sense-observations. Supersensible cognition alone can form any true idea of them; they are right outside the scope of a cognition that is concerned with externals. The changes come about as a result of the pupil's consciousness being so far matured that, notwithstanding his having banished from it all that he has experienced in the past, whether outwardly or inwardly, he is nevertheless able to have conscious experience in Intuition.
Yet the experiences that come with Intuition are intimate, are tender and delicate. Man's physical body, at its present stage, is quite coarse in comparison; consequently, it offers stubborn resistance to these results of the exercises for Intuition. If however the exercises are preserved in with energy and patience, and with the necessary inner quiet, they will at length overcome the formidable hindrances that the physical body presents. The pupil will begin to notice that he is gradually bringing under his control certain activities of his physical body that formerly took their course without his being in the least conscious of them. He will become aware also of a change of another kind. He may observe that for a short while he feels a need so to order his breathing—or some other bodily process—as to bring it into harmony with what his soul is doing in the exercises or whatever else he is undertaking in inner, meditative life. The ultimate ideal is that no exercises of any kind should be done with the physical body as such, not even breathing exercises; so that whatever happens in the physical will occur simply and solely as an outcome of the exercises for Intuition.
[ 50 ] When the pupil is making his way upwards on the path that leads to higher worlds, he will remark at a certain stage that the interconnection of the activities of his personality is beginning to assume a new form. In the world of the physical senses the I sees to it that the various faculties of the soul co-operate in an orderly manner. In the affairs of everyday life these faculties—we refer here especially to Thinking, Feeling and Willing—always stand in a certain recognized relation to one another. Let us say we are looking at some object. It pleases us, or perhaps we dislike it. That is to say, a feeling associates itself, almost inevitably, with our mental picture, our idea of the object. Very possibly we may also wish we could possess it or we may feel impelled to alter it in this or that particular. That is to say, desire and will unite themselves with the thought and the feeling. That this association comes about is due to the fact that the I unites ideation (thinking,) feeling and willing into a harmonious whole, thus bringing order into the forces of our personality. This healthy harmony would be broken if the I were to show itself powerless in the matter—if desire, for example, were to branch off in another direction than feeling or thinking. If someone thought that a particular course was right, and yet his will were set on following another course—one that did not comment itself to him—his soul would certainly not be in a healthy condition. The same could be said of a person who was bent on having, not what he liked, but rather what he disliked.
[ 51 ] The pupil will, however, find that on the way to the attainment of higher powers of cognition, thinking, feeling and willing do definitely separate one from another, each of them assuming a kind of independent existence. A thought, for instance, will not now of its own accord stir up a particular feeling and evoke a particular volition. The situation will be that while in our thinking we can perceive a thing objectively and truly, yet before we can have any feeling about it or come to any resolve in the matter, we shall need to develop within us a distinct and independent impulse. While engaged in supersensible observation, our thinking, feeling and willing do not continue to simply three powers of the soul raying out, as if were, from the I, as a single center of our personality; they become independent beings. It is as though they were three separate personalities. The implication is that our I or Ego needs to be made all the stronger, for it has no longer merely to ensure that order reigns among three faculties of soul; it has to guide and lead three beings. This partition into three distinct beings must, however, only be allowed to subsist during the time of supersensible observation. Here again we see how important it is to include among the exercises for more advanced training those that give stability and firmness to the faculty of thoughtful judgment, to the feeling life and to the life of will. For if we fail to bring with us into the higher world the necessary stability and firmness of soul, then we shall very soon find how weak the I will prove itself to be—not fit guide for the thinking, feeling and willing! Should such weakness manifest in the I, it will be as though the soul were being pulled in different ways by distinct personalities; its inner integrity will inevitably be destroyed. If, however, development has taken its right course, the change will signify a genuine advance. The Ego does not lose control but remains in command even of the independent beings that now constitute the soul.
As development proceeds, a further step is taken. The thinking that has become independent evokes a fourth being of soul and spirit, a being that may be described as a direct inpouring of spiritual streams that are of the nature of Thought. The whole Universe now confronts the human being as a mighty edifice of Thought even as the plant or animal world confronts him in the realm of the physical senses; he beholds it before him like a mighty edifice built of thought. The Feeling too and the Will, that have become independent, evoke powers in the soul which become active there as independent beings. And there appears in addition yet a seventh power, a seventh entity which bears resemblance to one's own I—to the I as such.
[ 52 ] With this whole experience another is united. Before reaching the supersensible world man wads familiar with thinking, feeling and willing purely as inner experiences of the soul. No sooner has he entered the supersensible world than he begins to perceive things that are the expression, not of anything physical, but of soul and spirit. Underlying what he is able to perceive in the new world are beings of soul and spirit. These beings present themselves to him as an external spiritual world, just as stones and plants and animals present themselves to the senses in the physical world. The pupil can however perceive a significant difference between the world of soul and spirit that is now unfolding before him and the world he has been accustomed to observe with the help of the physical senses. A plant in the latter remains as it is, whatever man may feel or think about it. It is not so with the pictures of the soul-and-spirit world. These change according as man has this or that thought or feeling towards them. Man himself stamps them in this way with a character that is derived from his own being. Suppose a certain picture appears before him in the Imaginative world. To begin with, he may perhaps be quite indifferent to it; in that case, it will manifest in a certain form. But the moment he begins to feel pleased with it or to take a dislike to it, it will change its form. This is what is so striking about the pictures of the supersensible world: they are not only the expression of something outside of man and independent of him, they also reflect what the man is himself. They are, in fact, thoroughly permeated with his being. His being overlays them as with a veil. And what man sees when he is faced with a real spiritual being, is not that being at all, but something he himself has produced. He may thus have before him something true in itself, yet what he sees may still be false. Nor is it only what he is ware of in himself that works in this way; there is nothing in him that does not leave its mark on the Imaginative world. Someone may, for instance, have deeply hidden inclinations, held in check by dint of education or force of character; they will nevertheless be making their impression on the world of soul and spirit. That world receives its coloring according to the entire being of the man, irrespective of how much or how little he himself may know of his own nature and character.
If the pupil is to be capable of going forward from this stage of development, he must learn to make a clear distinction between himself and the surrounding spiritual world. To this end he has to learn to put a stop to any kind of influence that he himself might exert upon the world of soul and spirit that is around him. The only way to ensure this is to be fully cognizant of what it is that he is taking with him into the new world. In other words, it is a matter of acquiring, first and foremost, genuine and searching self-knowledge. Once he has that, he will be able to see with clear, unclouded vision that world of soul and spirit by which he is surrounded. Now thanks to certain facts in the whole development of man, self-knowledge of this kind cannot but arise—as it were, quite naturally—when a man enter the higher world. In the everyday physical world man develops, as we know, his I or Ego, his consciousness of self; and this his I acts as a center of attraction for his whole personality. All his inclinations, his sympathies and antipathies, his passions and propensities, his views and opinions group themselves around his Ego. A man's Ego too is the center of attraction for what we call his Karma. If we were able to see this our Ego naked and undisguised, we would at the same time be perceiving that we have yet to undergo such and such strokes of destiny in our present and future incarnations, owing to the way we lived and the tendencies we acquired in past incarnations. Therefore this Ego, with all its encumbrances, must necessarily be the first picture that confronts the human soul on ascending into the world of soul and spirit. According to a certain law of the spiritual world, this—the man's “Double”—is bound to be the very first impression man receives on entering the spiritual world.
We can well understand the law when we reflect how in his life on the physical plane man perceives himself only in so far as he experiences himself in thinking, feeling and willing. In other words, he perceives himself only from within; his “self” does not confront him from without, as do the stones and plants and animals. Moreover, the knowledge he thus gains of himself is very partial and incomplete.
For there is that in human nature which hinders him from attaining deeper self-knowledge. It is the urge, wherever dawning self-knowledge compels him to admit some imperfection in his character, and he does not want to deceive himself about it—the urge to set to work to alter the unpleasant trait.
[ 53 ] If he is not obedient to the urge, but turns his attention away from himself and remains as he is, then it need hardly be said that he robs himself of the possibility of attaining self-knowledge in that direction. If on the other hand he examines himself intently and, refusing to give way to self-deception, boldly faces the trait he has observed in his own character, then either he will find he can improve it, or it may be that—such as he is at present—he is unable to do so. In the latter instance, a feeling will steal over him that one can only call a kind of shame. This is, in fact, how healthy human nature works: self-knowledge gives rise to a sense of shame—a feeling that may show itself in many ways. Now as we know, in everyday life the sense of shame has a particular effect upon us. A man of healthy feeling will take care that those aspects of his character which make him eel ashamed shall not take effect in the world at large—shall not find expression in his deeds. Shame is thus a power that impels man to shut something up inside him and not allow it to be seen.
Thinking this over carefully, we shall have little difficulty in understanding that spiritual science ascribes even more far-reaching effects to an experience of the soul that is very nearly akin to the familiar one of a sense of shame. Spiritual research discovers in the depths of the human soul a kind of hidden sense of shame of which in physical life man is unconscious. This hidden feeling is none the less active in the soul. It works there in much the same way as does the sense of shame of which a man is normally conscious. It prevents his having before him in a clearly perceptible picture his real and inmost being. If this feeling were not there, man would see displayed before him what he is in very truth. He would no longer experience his thoughts and ideas, his feelings and his will in a merely inward way, but would perceive them even as he perceives the stones and animals and plants. Thus does a hidden sense of shame conceal man from himself. Nor is that all; it hides from him at the same time the entire soul-and-spirit world. For since his own inner being is hidden from him, he cannot get sight of that domain within him where he should now be endeavoring to develop the organs that will enable him to attain knowledge of the world of soul and spirit. He misses the opportunity of so transforming his inner being that it may acquire organs of spiritual perception.
When however in the pursuit of a right spiritual training man labors to promote the development within him of these organs of perception, the very first impression that confronts him is his own self. He perceives what he truly is, he perceives his Double. This perception of oneself is inseparable from perception of the world of soul and spirit. In ordinary life in the physical world, the hidden sense of shame is continually shutting for man the door into the world of soul and spirit. Is he about to take one step into that world, at once an unconscious sense of shame comes in the way and hides from him that corner of the soul-and-spirit world which was on the point of coming into view. The exercises, however, that have been described open the way to yonder world. In effect, the sense of shame which he bears hidden within him is a great benefactor to man. For the measure of intelligent discrimination and of right feeling and strength of character we can acquire in ordinary lie without special training will not suffice us when we have to face our very inmost being in its true form. We would not be able to endure it; we would lose our self-confidence, we would even lose all consciousness of self. That this may not happen, we have yet again to have recourse to those precautionary measures that need to be taken alongside of the exercises for the attainment of higher powers of cognition—namely the special exercises for the cultivation of sound judgment, good feeling and strength of character. In the course of a right and healthy spiritual training, the pupil learns incidentally enough of the truths of spiritual science and also of the measure he requires to take in order to attain self-knowledge and self-observation, for him to be able to face his own Double with courage and with strength. What it will mean for him then is simply that he sees in another form, as a picture belonging to the world of Imagination, what he has already made acquaintance with here in the physical world. If in the physical world we have grasped the law of Karma with our understanding, we shall have no occasion to be horror-struck when we behold the seeds of our future destiny visibly before us in the picture of our Double. If we have made an intelligent study of the evolution of the world and of man, and have learned how at a particular moment in this evolution the forces of Lucifer penetrated into the human soul, we shall not be unduly disturbed when we become conscious of the presence, in the picture of our own being, of the Luciferic beings and their activities.
We can however see from this how necessary it is that man should not demand entry into the spiritual world until he has learned and understood certain essential truths of that world by the simple exercise of his everyday intelligence, developed in the physical world. If spiritual development follows the right and normal path, then before he aspires to enter the supersensible world the pupil will already have mastered with his ordinary intelligence the whole of the earlier contents of this book.
[ 54 ] In a training where care is not taken to develop in the pupil certainty and stability in his powers of judgment and discrimination as well as in his emotions and his moral character, it may happen that the higher world presents itself to him before he has the inner faculties with which to fact it. The encounter with his Double, will in that event cause him great distress and lead him astray. If on the other hand—as would also be possible—he were completely to elude the meeting with the Double, he would still be just as incapable of coming to any true knowledge of the higher world. For he would then be unable to distinguish between what the things around him really are and what he himself is seeing into them. To be able to do this, he must first have seen the distinct picture of his own being; then he can separate and distinguish from his environment whatever has flowed over into it from his own inner life.
As far as his life in the physical world is concerned, the moment man begins to draw near to the world of soul and spirit, the Double immediately makes himself invisible and therewith also conceals from him the whole soul-and-spirit world. The Double stands in front of it like a Guardian, forbidding entrance to those who are not yet competent to enter. He may therefore rightly be called “The Guardian of the Threshold of the World of Soul and Spirit.”
Besides meeting with him when approaching the supersensible world by the method that has been described, man also meets this Guardian of the Threshold when he passes through physical death. And in the course of the time between death and a new birth, while man's soul and spirit are undergoing development, the Guardian progressively reveals himself to him. There, however, the encounter cannot disquiet man unduly, since he now has knowledge of the higher worlds which between birth and death were not within his ken.
[ 55 ] Were man to enter the world of soul and spirit without encountering the Guardian of the Threshold, he would be liable to succumb to one delusion after another. For he would never be able to distinguish between what he himself brings into that world and what rightly belongs to it. A sound and proper training, however should lead the pupil only into the realm of truth, never into the realm of illusion. The training itself should ensure that the meeting with the Guardian will follow as a necessary consequence. For this meeting with his Double is one of the testing experiences that are indispensable to the pupil aspiring to conscious perception in supersensible worlds, and that protect him from the possibility of illusion or false fantasy.
It is of urgent importance that every pupil of the Spirit should take himself in hand and see to it that he does not become a visionary and a dreamer, for then he would all too easily fall a victim to delusion and self-deception (suggestion and auto-suggestion.) Where the instructions for training are faithfully carried out, the very sources of delusion are destroyed in the process. It is naturally not possible to enter here in detail into all the steps that have to be taken by the pupil in this connection. We can only indicate wherein their main import lies.
There are two chief sources for delusions of this kind. They may, in the first place, be due to the fact that reality receives a coloring from the nature an disposition of the pupil himself. In ordinary life in the physical world there is comparatively little danger of delusion arising from such a source; the external world impresses its true form upon the observer in all distinctness, however, much he would like to color it in conformity with his own wishes and interests. No sooner, however, does he enter the world of Imagination that its pictures change under the influence of these desires and interests of his, and he has then before him, giving every appearance of reality, what are in effect merely his own creations, or forms that he has at least helped to create. But in meeting the Guardian of the Threshold the pupil learns to know what he has within him; thus he knows well what he may be bringing with him into the world of soul and spirit, and so this first source of delusion is eliminated. Thanks to the preparation he undergoes before entering the world of soul and spirit, the pupil has already grown accustomed to eliminate self in his observation of the physical world and to let its objects and events speak to him purely by virtue of their own inherent nature. If the preparation has been sufficiently thorough, he can await unperturbed the meeting with the Guardian. This meeting will put him to the final test as to whether, when he confronts the world of soul and spirit, he will be able there too to eliminate himself.
[ 56 ] Besides this, there is another source of delusion. It shows itself when we interpret incorrectly some impression we receive. A simple example of this in everyday life is the illusion we fall into when we are sitting in a train and think that the trees are moving in the opposite direction to that of the train, whereas it is really we ourselves who are moving with the train. There are of course countless instances where an illusion of this nature is more difficult to dispel than in the simple example of the moving train; nevertheless it will easily be seen that in the physical world ways and means can always be found of correcting such illusion, if with sound judgment we avail ourselves of every circumstance that can serve to make the matter clear. No sooner, however, have we penetrated into supersensible realms than we find a different state of affairs. In the world of the senses the facts are not altered by our misconception of them; thus the way is left open for unprejudiced observation to correct the delusion by reference to the facts. In the supersensible world this cannot so easily be done. Suppose we are wanting to observe some supersensible fact, and as we approach it we come to a wrong conclusion about its nature. The correct conception we have formed, this we now carry into the fact itself, and it becomes so closely interwoven with the latter that the one cannot readily be distinguished from the other. What we then have is not the mistake within ourselves, and the true fact in the object observed; the mistake has been incorporated in the outer fact—has become part of it. It is therefore no longer possible simply to correct the illusion by looking at the fact again with open mind.
We have here been describing an all too frequent source of deception and false fantasy for one who approaches the supersensible world without due preparation.
Yet even as the pupil becomes able to rid himself of delusions that arise form the phenomena of the supersensible world being colored by his own character and inclinations, so must he now also find the way to render powerless this second source of delusion. He is able to obliterate what comes from himself if he has first made acquaintance with his own Double; he will be able to get rid of this second source of delusion when he has learned to recognize from its very nature and character whether a fact of the supersensible world is reality or mere delusion. If delusions looked exactly like realities, there would naturally be no possibility of distinguishing them. But it is not so. In the supersensible world delusions have properties peculiar to themselves by which they can be distinguished from realities. And it is important for the pupil to know what are the properties by which he may recognize realities. One who is unacquainted with spiritual training will very naturally doubt the possibility of ever being safe from delusion, when the sources of it are so numerous. How, he will say, is any pupil of the Spirit ever to be sure that all the higher knowledge he imagines himself to have gained does not rest on delusion and self-delusion? The one who argues in this way has failed to observe that in every genuine spiritual training the sources of delusion are dispelled—dried up as it were, through the whole way the training proceeds.
In the first place, the genuine pupil of the Spirit will in the course of his preparation have learned a great deal about all the things that can give rise to illusion and self-deception, and will thus be one his guard against them. In this respect he has far more opportunity than his fellow-men of learning to lead his life with calm detachment and sound judgment. All that he learns and experiences is calculated to save him from having anything to do with vague premonitions and uncontrolled fancies. His training makes him very careful. Moreover, every right and true training introduces the pupil from the start to grand and sublime conceptions, teaching him of events in the great Universe; he has to put forth his best powers of discernment to grasp the great cosmic facts, and will find these his powers growing ever finer and keener in the process. Only one who shrinks from venturing into realms so remote, preferring to cling to “revelations” that are nearer home, will be in danger of missing that sharpening of his mental faculties which can ensure for him the ability to distinguish clearly between deception and reality.
With all this, however, we have not yet touched on the most important factor of all—namely, what is latent in the exercises themselves. The exercises that belong to a right and proper spiritual training have necessarily to be so regulated and arranged that the pupil, while engaged in meditation, is fully conscious of all that is taking place in his soul. As he sets out on the road to Imagination, he forms, to begin with, a symbolic picture. In this picture are still contained mental images that owe their origin to what he has perceived in the outer world. He is not the sole creator of the picture; something besides himself has shared in the creation of its content. This means that he may still be under an illusion as to how the content of the picture has come about; he may ascribe it to a mistaken source. When the pupil progresses further and embarks on exercises for Inspiration, he banishes this content from consciousness and gives himself up entirely to the contemplation of his own activity of soul, which formed the picture. Here again, error may still creep in. For the particular character of his soul's activity he is indebted to his education—in the widest sense of the word. It is impossible for him to be fully informed of its origin. But now there comes the time when even the pupil's own activity of soul has to be expelled from consciousness. If there is still anything left, this remaining content is fully exposed to view. Nothing can intrude here that cannot be perceived and appraised in all its parts and aspects. The pupil has in his Intuition something that reveals to him the essential character of pure reality in the world of soul and spirit. From now onward, in everything that enters his field of observation he can look for what he has learned to recognize as the characteristic marks of soul-and spirit reality, and will thus be able to discern between what is real and what is only apparent. And he can be assured that in applying this test he will be just as safe from the risk of delusion in the supersensible world as in the physical world—where it would be quite impossible for him to mistake an imaginary bar of hot iron for one that could really burn him.
It will of course be understood that the pupil can have this relation only to facts of the supersensible worlds that he has seen for himself—that have thus become for him a matter of actual experience—and not to those communicated by others, which he comprehends with his ordinary powers of understanding, aided by a natural and healthy feeling for the truth. He will indeed be at pains to draw a sharp dividing line between the spiritual knowledge he has acquired in the one and in the other way. He will be ready and willing to receive communications about the higher worlds and will summon up his beset powers of judgment to comprehend them. On the other hand, when he describes something as the fruit of his own experience and spiritual observation, he will always first have tested whether it showed itself to him with the qualities he has learned to recognize in a genuine Intuition.
[ 57 ] The pupil of the Spirit having now undergone the meeting with the Guardian of the Threshold, further experiences await him as he ascends into supersensible worlds. In the first place, he will notice that there is an inner connection between this Guardian of the Threshold and what was described above as a seventh power in the soul, which took on the form of an independent being. In truth, this seventh being is, from a certain point of view, none other than the Double, than the Guardian himself, whose presence sets the pupil a specific task. He has to place what he is in his ordinary self—which he has now before him in picture—under the leadership and guidance of his new-born Self. A kind of struggle will ensue, the Double striving continually to gain the upper hand. If the pupil can succeed in establishing a right relation to the Double, not allowing him to do anything that is not inspired by the new-born I, he will find that his true human powers gain in strength and in stability.
In the matter of self-knowledge the situation is somewhat different in the higher world from what it is in the physical. In the physical world self-knowledge is a purely inward experience, whereas in the higher world from the very outset the new-born Self manifests as an external phenomenon of Soul. The pupil sees it there before him as a distinct being. He is not however able to have a complete perception of this new-born Self. For no matter how many stages he may have reached on the path into supersensible worlds, there are always higher stages ahead; and at every one of them the pupil will perceive more of his Higher Self. At any particular stage, it can be only partially revealed to him. When the pupil first begins to be aware of the Higher Self, he is strongly tempted, as it were, to regard it from the vantage-point he has gained in the physical world. Indeed it is good that he should feel thus tempted; it is even necessary if his development is to proceed in the right way. For he has to contemplate what appears to him as his Double, the “Guardian of the Threshold,” he has to see all this in face of the Higher Self, and so perceive the vast disparity between what he is now and what he is meant to become. Once the pupil enters upon this comparison, the Guardian of the Threshold begins to assume another form, presenting himself as a picture of all the hindrances that stand in the way of the development of the Higher Self. The pupil now sees what a burden he is dragging about with him all the time in the ordinary self. And should the preparation he has undergone have failed to give him the strength to say at this point: I am not going to stand still, but shall make ceaseless effort to carry my development ever on and on in the direction of the Higher Self—should he not be strong enough to say this, he will falter and shrink from what is yet in store for him. He will indeed have entered into the world of soul and spirit, but as one who has relinquished all idea of making further efforts for his development. He then becomes a prisoner of the form that stands before him in the Guardian of the Threshold. The significant thing, however, is that he does not eel himself a prisoner; he imagines he is passing through an entirely different experience. The form that is evoked by the Guardian of the Threshold may even give rise in his soul to the impression that in the pictures he beholds at this stage of his development he already has a complete survey of the possible Worlds; that he has arrived at the very summit of knowledge and has no need to exert himself any further. Far indeed from seeing himself as a prisoner, he feels he is now the possessor of inexhaustible riches, even of all the secrets of the Universe. That such an experience—the complete reversal of the true state of affairs—should be possible will not astonish us, when we remember that the man undergoing it is in the world of soul and spirit, a world where thing are apt to show themselves in their opposites. Attention was called to this characteristic of the soul-and-spirit world in an earlier chapter, when studying the life after death.
[ 58 ] In the figure that the pupil is perceiving at this stage of this development, there is more than in the form in which the Guardian of the Threshold first presented himself to him. At that time he could perceive in the Double all the qualities that the ordinary self possesses in consequence of the influence of the Luciferic powers. In the course of evolution, however, owing to the influence of Lucifer, another power has found its way into the human soul; we called it in earlier sections of this book the power of Ahriman. This s the power that hinders man, so long as he is living in physical existence, from having sight of the soul-and-spirit Being who underlie what the senses perceive at the surface of the outer world. What the soul has become under the influence of this power, the pupil now beholds—as in a picture—in the figure that confronts him in the experience we are now describing. If he is duly prepared for this experience, he will assign to it its true meaning; and then, quite soon, yet another figure will be revealed to him. It is the “Greater Guardian of the Threshold,” so called to distinguish Him from the “Lesser Guardian,” hitherto described. The Greater Guardian tells the pupil that he must not remain at this stage but must press forward with untiring energy. He calls upon him to realized that the world into which he has won his way can only become truth for him if he perseveres in his efforts. Otherwise it will change for him into illusion. Were a pupil to submit himself to a wrong kind of training and come to this experience unprepared, he would, on approaching the “Greater Guardian of the Threshold,” find himself completely overwhelmed—overwhelmed with a feeling that can only be compared with boundless fear and terror.
[ 59 ] The meeting with the Lesser Guardian of the Threshold afforded the pupil the opportunity of testing whether he is proof against the delusions that may arise through carrying his own being into the supersensible world; and the experiences that lead him at long last to the Greater Guardian of the Threshold will now enable him to discover whether he can stand up to the delusions that spring from the second source above mentioned. If he is proof against the captivating delusion which makes the picture-world he has attained seem to him like a rich possession—when all the time he is but a prisoner thereof—he will be protected from taking appearance for reality in the further course of his spiritual evolution.
[ 60 ] The “Guardian of the Threshold” will to some extent assume an individual and different form for every single person. For the meeting with him is the very experience by means of which the personal character of supersensible perceptions is eventually overcome and the way opened into a region of experience that is free from all personal coloring—a region universally valid, to which every human being has equal access.
[ 61 ] Having come thus far in his experience, the aspirant is now able to make distinction in the surrounding world of soul and spirit between what is himself and what is outside him. He will now be in a position to appreciate how necessary it was to study the evolution of the world as described in this book, in order to arrive at a true understanding of man and of his life. For we can only understand man's physical body if we know how it has been built up right through the Saturn, Sun, Moon and Earth evolutions. So too for the other members of man's being. To understand the ether-body, we need to follow its development through Sun, Moon and Earth evolutions. And if we are to understand all that has to do with the Earth's own evolution at the present time, we shall need to know how it has gradually unfolded, stage by stage. One who has undergone spiritual training will be in a position to recognize the relationship between what is contained in man and the corresponding facts and beings of the world around him. For it is so indeed: there is no member or part of man that does not stand in some relation to the rest of the world—the world in its entirety. In this book it has hardly been possible to do more than give indications in barest outline of this universal correspondence. But we must not forget that the physical body, for example, was, during Saturn evolution, only in its very first beginnings. Its organs—heart, lung, brain and so on—developed out of these first beginnings, during the Sun, Moon and Earth periods. They therefore are connected with Sun, Moon and Earth evolution. The like must be said of man's other members—the ether-body, the sentient body, the sentient soul and so on. The whole of the immediately surrounding world has gone to the forming of man; no single part or feature of him that has not its corresponding process or being in the world without. And when he has reached the above-described stage in his development, the pupil of the Spirit learns to recognize this relationship of his own being to the great world. Such is the characteristic experience at this stage: he becomes conscious of the correspondence that exists between the “little world,” the Microcosm—the world, that is, of man himself—and the “great world,” the Macrocosm.
When the pupil has worked his way through to this perception, a new experience awaits him. He begins to feel as though he has grown together with the whole vast structure of the Universe, retaining, however, at the same time the consciousness of himself as a fully independent being. A feeling nevertheless comes over him, as if he were being merged into the whole vast Universe, were becoming one with it—yet without losing his individuality. This stage of development may be described as the “becoming one with the Macrocosm.” It is essential not to think of it as though implying that separate consciousness should cease and the human individuality be poured out into the All. Such an idea could arise only from an inexact and untrained way of thinking.
We may now set down in order the stages on the way to higher powers of cognition, attained in the training for Initiation that has here been described:
- Study of spiritual science. To begin with, the pupil applies himself to this study with the powers of thought and sound judgment acquired in the physical world.
- Attainment of Imaginative Cognition.
- Reading of the Hidden Script. (This stage is equivalent to Inspiration.)
- Living one's way into the Spiritual World that is around one (equivalent to Intuition.)
- Knowledge of the relationships between Microcosm and Macrocosm.
- Becoming one with the Macrocosm.
- A fundamental mood of soul determined by the simultaneous and integral experience of the foregoing stages.
[ 62 ] The reader is not however to imagine that the seven stages necessarily follow one another in precise order. Much will depend on the individual character of the pupil. If can be that an earlier stage has only partially been reached when a pupil begins to undertake exercises belonging to the next. For example, it may be perfectly right, when he has had but a few genuine Imaginations, for him already to be doing exercises designed to bring Inspiration or Intuition, or even knowledge of the relationship of Microcosm to Macrocosm, within the reach of his own personal experience.
[ 63 ] When the pupil has got so far as to have an experience of Intuition, then in addition to having knowledge of the pictures that belong to the world of soul and spirit, and being able to read from the Hidden Script how these pictures are interrelated, he also comes to know the Beings through whose co-operation the world to which man belongs has been called into existence. Then too he learns to know himself in his own archetypal form as a soul-and-spirit being in the world of soul and spirit. He has wrestled his way through to a perception of his Higher Self, and now sees clearly what he has still to achieve in order to gain control over his Double, the “Guardian of the Threshold” who stands there before him, continually calling upon him to work on further at his development. This “Greater Guardian of the Threshold” now becomes for him the Ideal, the Example that he will do his utmost to follow. Having once come to this resolve, the pupil will be enabled to recognize who it is that is there before him as the “Greater Guardian of the Threshold.” For now this Greater Guardian changes for the eyes of the pupil into the figure of Christ, whose nature and whose part in the evolution of Earth have been explained in the earlier chapters of this book. Through this experience the pupil is initiated into the sublime Mystery that is connected with the name of Christ. Christ shows himself to him as the great human Prototype and Example, united with the Earth's true evolution.
Having thus come through Intuition to a knowledge of Christ in the spiritual world, the aspirant will find that he is able also to understand what took place historically on Earth in the fourth post-Atlantean period—the time of the Greek and Roman civilization. How the great Sun Being, even the Christ, intervened in Earth evolution, and how He is still working in it now and on into the future, the pupil of the Spirit knows henceforth from his own experience. This then is what he attains through Intuition: the very meaning and significance of Earth evolution are communicated to him.
[ 64 ] The path to knowledge of the supersensible worlds that has here been described is one that everyone can tread, no matter what his situation or circumstances in life. When speaking of such a path, we must not forget that the goal of knowledge and truth has been and is the same throughout all epochs of Earth evolution, but that the starting-point has been different in different epochs. Man cannot set out today from the same starting-point as did, for example, the candidate for Initiation in ancient Egypt. Neither can the exercises that were given to a pupil in ancient Egypt be simply taken over by a man of the present age. Since that epoch men's souls have been through sundry incarnations, and this moving on from incarnation to incarnation is not without meaning and purpose. The capabilities and qualities of the soul change from one incarnation to the next. Even a superficial study of history will convince us that since the twelfth and thirteenth centuries of our era the conditions of life have been very different from what they were before; men's opinions and feelings, even their capacities, have quite altered from what they were in earlier times. The path to higher knowledge that has here been described is one that is adopted for souls who are incarnated in the immediate present. It takes for its starting-point the situation of a human being of today, living under any of the typical conditions of the present age. As evolution progresses, the outer forms of man's life on Earth undergo change; so too in the paths of higher development every succeeding epoch calls for new ways and new methods. It is of vital importance that at every stage harmony should reign between man's life in the world at large and the Way of Initiation.
Die Erkenntnis der höheren Welten
(von der Einweihung oder Initiation)
[ 1 ] Zwischen Geburt und Tod durchlebt der Mensch auf seiner gegenwärtigen Entwicklungsstufe im gewöhnlichen Leben drei Seelenzustände: das Wachen, den Schlaf und zwischen beiden den Traumzustand. Auf den letzteren soll an späterer Stelle dieser Schrift noch kurz hingedeutet werden. Hier mag das Leben zunächst in seinen beiden wechselnden Hauptzuständen, dem Wachen und dem Schlafen, betrachtet werden. — Zu Erkenntnissen in höheren Welten gelangt der Mensch, wenn er sich, außer dem Schlafen und Wachen, noch einen dritten Seelenzustand erwirbt. Während des Wachens ist die Seele hingegeben den Sinneseindrücken und den Vorstellungen, welche von diesen Sinneseindrücken angeregt werden. Während des Schlafes schweigen die Sinneseindrücke; aber die Seele verliert auch das Bewusstsein. Die Tageserlebnisse sinken in das Meer der Bewusstlosigkeit hinunter. — Man denke sich nun: die Seele könnte während des Schlafes zu einer Bewusstheit kommen, trotzdem die Eindrücke der Sinne, wie sonst im tiefen Schlafe, ausgeschaltet blieben. Ja, es würde auch die Erinnerung an die Tageserlebnisse nicht vorhanden sein. Befände sich nun die Seele in einem Nichts? Könnte sie nun gar keine Erlebnisse haben? — Eine Antwort auf diese Frage ist nur möglich, wenn ein Zustand wirklich hergestellt werden kann, welcher diesem gleich oder ähnlich ist. Wenn die Seele etwas erleben kann, auch dann, wenn keine Sinneswirkungen und keine Erinnerungen an solche in ihr vorhanden sind. Dann befände sich die Seele in bezug auf die gewöhnliche Außenwelt wie im Schlafe; und doch schliefe sie nicht, sondern wäre wie im Wachen einer wirklichen Welt gegenüber. — Nun kann ein solcher Bewusstseinszustand hergestellt werden, wenn der Mensch diejenigen Seelenerlebnisse herbeiführt, welche ihm die Geisteswissenschaft möglich macht. Und alles, was diese über jene Welten mitteilt, welche über die sinnliche hinausliegen, ist durch einen solchen Bewusstseinszustand erforscht. — In den vorhergehenden Ausführungen sind einige Mitteilungen über höhere Welten gemacht worden. In dem Folgenden soll nun auch — soweit dies in diesem Buche geschehen kann — von den Mitteln gesprochen werden, durch welche der zu diesem Forschen notwendige Bewusstseinszustand geschaffen wird.
[ 2 ] Nur nach einer Richtung hin gleicht dieser Bewusstseinszustand dem Schlafe, nämlich dadurch, dass durch ihn alle äußeren Sinneswirkungen aufhören; auch alle Gedanken getilgt sind, welche durch diese Sinneswirkungen angeregt sind. Während aber im Schlafe die Seele keine Kraft hat, bewusst etwas zu erleben, soll sie diese Kraft durch diesen Bewusstseinszustand erhalten. Durch ihn wird in der Seele also die Fähigkeit eines Erlebens erweckt, welche im gewöhnlichen Dasein nur durch die Sinneswirkungen angeregt wird. Die Erweckung der Seele zu einem solchen höheren Bewusstseinszustand kann Einweihung (Initiation) genannt werden.
[ 3 ] Die Mittel der Einweihung führen den Menschen aus dem gewöhnlichen Zustande des Tagesbewusstseins in eine solche Seelentätigkeit hinein, durch welche er sich geistiger Beobachtungswerkzeuge bedient. Diese Werkzeuge sind wie Keime vorher in der Seele vorhanden. Diese Keime müssen entwickelt werden. — Nun kann der Fall eintreten, dass ein Mensch in einem bestimmten Zeitpunkte seiner Lebenslaufbahn ohne besondere Vorbereitung in seiner Seele die Entdeckung macht, es haben sich solche höhere Werkzeuge in ihm entwickelt. Es ist dann eine Art von unwillkürlicher Selbsterweckung eingetreten. Solch ein Mensch wird sich dadurch in seinem ganzen Wesen umgewandelt finden. Eine unbegrenzte Bereicherung seiner Seelenerlebnisse tritt ein. Und er wird finden, dass er durch keine Erkenntnisse der Sinnenwelt eine solche Beseligung, solche befriedigende Gemütsverfassung und innere Wärme empfinden kann, wie durch dasjenige, was sich einer Erkenntnis erschließt, die nicht dem physischen Auge zugänglich ist. Kraft und Lebenssicherheit wird in seinen Willen aus einer geistigen Welt einströmen. — Solche Fälle von Selbsteinweihung gibt es. Sie sollten aber nicht zu dem Glauben verführen, dass es das einzig Richtige sei, eine solche Selbsteinweihung abzuwarten und nichts zu tun, um die Einweihung durch regelrechte Schulung herbeizuführen. Von der Selbsteinweihung braucht hier nicht gesprochen zu werden, da sie eben ohne Beobachtung irgendwelcher Regeln eintreten kann. Dargestellt aber soll werden, wie man durch Schulung die in der Seele keimhaft ruhenden Wahrnehmungsorgane entwickeln kann. Menschen, welche keinen besonderen Antrieb in sich verspüren, für ihre Entwicklung selbst etwas zu tun, werden leicht sagen: das Menschenleben steht in der Leitung von geistigen Mächten, in deren Führung soll man nicht eingreifen; man soll ruhig des Augenblickes harren, in dem jene Mächte es für richtig halten, der Seele eine andere Welt zu erschließen. Es wird wohl auch von solchen Menschen wie eine Art von Vermessenheit empfunden, oder als eine unberechtigte Begierde, in die Weisheit der geistigen Führung einzugreifen. Persönlichkeiten, welche so denken, werden erst dann zu einer anderen Meinung geführt, wenn auf sie eine gewisse Vorstellung einen genügend starken Eindruck macht. Wenn sie sich sagen: Jene weise Führung hat mir gewisse Fähigkeiten gegeben; sie hat mir diese nicht verliehen, auf dass ich sie unbenützt lasse, sondern damit ich sie gebrauche. Die Weisheit der Führung besteht darin, dass sie in mich die Keime gelegt hat zu einem höheren Bewusstseinszustande. Ich verstehe diese Führung nur, wenn ich es als Pflicht empfinde, dass alles dem Menschen offenbar werde, was durch seine Geisteskräfte offenbar werden kann. Wenn ein solcher Gedanke einen genügend starken Eindruck auf die Seele gemacht hat, dann werden die obigen Bedenken gegen eine Schulung in bezug auf einen höheren Bewusstseinszustand schwinden.
[ 4 ] Es kann aber allerdings noch ein anderes Bedenken geben, das sich gegen eine solche Schulung erhebt. Man kann sich sagen: «Die Entwicklung innerer Seelenfähigkeiten greift in das verborgenste Heiligtum des Menschen ein. Sie schließt in sich eine gewisse Umwandlung des ganzen menschlichen Wesens. Die Mittel zu solcher Umwandlung kann man sich naturgemäß nicht selber ersinnen. Denn wie man in eine höhere Welt kommt, kann doch nur derjenige wissen, welcher den Weg in diese als sein eigenes Erlebnis kennt. Wenn man sich an eine solche Persönlichkeit wendet, so gestattet man derselben einen Einfluss auf das verborgenste Heiligtum der Seele.» — Wer so denkt, dem könnte es selbst keine besondere Beruhigung gewähren, wenn ihm die Mittel zur Herbeiführung eines höheren Bewusstseinszustandes in einem Buche dargeboten würden. Denn es kommt ja nicht darauf an, ob man etwas mündlich mitgeteilt erhält oder ob eine Persönlichkeit, welche die Kenntnis dieser Mittel hat, diese in einem Buche darstellt und ein anderer sie daraus erfährt. Es gibt nun solche Persönlichkeiten, welche die Kenntnis der Regeln für die Entwicklung der geistigen Wahrnehmungsorgane besitzen und welche die Ansicht vertreten, dass man diese Regeln einem Buche nicht anvertrauen dürfe. Solche Personen betrachten zumeist auch die Mitteilung gewisser Wahrheiten, welche sich auf die geistige Welt beziehen, als unstatthaft. Doch muss diese Anschauung gegenüber dem gegenwärtigen Zeitalter der Menschheitsentwicklung in gewisser Beziehung als veraltet bezeichnet werden. Richtig ist, dass man mit der Mitteilung der entsprechenden Regeln nur bis zu einem gewissen Punkte gehen kann. Doch führt das Mitgeteilte so weit, dass derjenige, welcher dieses auf seine Seele anwendet, in der Erkenntnisentwicklung dazu gelangt, dass er den weiteren Weg dann finden kann. Es führt dieser Weg dann in einer Art weiter, über welche man eine richtige Vorstellung auch nur durch das vorher Durchgemachte erhalten kann. Aus all diesen Tatsachen können sich Bedenken gegen den geistigen Erkenntnisweg ergeben. Diese Bedenken schwinden, wenn man das Wesen desjenigen Entwicklungsganges ins Auge fasst, welchen die unserem Zeitalter angemessene Schulung vorzeichnet. Von diesem Wege soll hier gesprochen und auf andere Schulungen nur kurz hingewiesen werden.
[ 5 ] Die hier zu besprechende Schulung gibt demjenigen, welcher den Willen zu seiner höheren Entwicklung hat, die Mittel an die Hand, die Umwandlung seiner Seele vorzunehmen. Ein bedenklicher Eingriff in das Wesen des Schülers wäre nur dann vorhanden, wenn der Lehrer diese Umwandlung durch Mittel vornähme, die sich dem Bewusstsein des Schülers entziehen. Solcher Mittel bedient sich aber keine richtige Anweisung der Geistesentwicklung in unserem Zeitalter. Diese macht den Schüler zu keinem blinden Werkzeuge. Sie gibt ihm die Verhaltungsmaßregeln; und der Schüler führt sie aus. Es wird dabei, wenn es darauf ankommt, nicht verschwiegen, warum diese oder jene Verhaltungsmaßregel gegeben wird. Die Entgegennahme der Regeln und ihre Anwendung durch eine Persönlichkeit, welche geistige Entwicklung sucht, braucht nicht auf blinden Glauben hin zu geschehen. Ein solcher sollte auf diesem Gebiete ganz ausgeschlossen sein. Wer die Natur der Menschenseele betrachtet, soweit sie ohne Geistesschulung schon durch die gewöhnliche Selbstbeobachtung sich ergibt, der kann sich nach Entgegennahme der von der Geistesschulung empfohlenen Regeln fragen: wie können diese Regeln im Seelenleben wirken? Und diese Frage kann, vor aller Schulung, bei unbefangener Anwendung des gesunden Menschenverstandes, genügend beantwortet werden. Man kann über die Wirkungsweise dieser Regeln sich richtige Vorstellungen machen, bevor man sich ihnen hingibt. Erleben kann man diese Wirkungsweise allerdings erst während der Schulung. Allein auch da wird das Erleben stets von dem Verstehen dieses Erlebens begleitet sein, wenn man jeden zu machenden Schritt mit dem gesunden Urteile begleitet. Und gegenwärtig wird eine wahre Geisteswissenschaft nur solche Regeln für die Schulung angeben, denen gegenüber solches gesunde Urteil sich geltend machen kann. Wer willens ist, sich nur einer solchen Schulung hinzugeben, und wer sich durch keine Voreingenommenheit zu einem blinden Glauben treiben lässt, dem werden alle Bedenken schwinden. Einwände gegen eine regelrechte Schulung zu einem höheren Bewusstseinszustande werden ihn nicht stören.
[ 6 ] Selbst für eine solche Persönlichkeit, welche die innere Reife hat, die sie in kürzerer oder längerer Zeit zum Selbsterwachen der geistigen Wahmehmungsorgane führen kann, ist eine Schulung nicht überflüssig, sondern im Gegenteil, für sie ist sie ganz besonders geeignet. Denn es gibt nur wenige Fälle, in denen eine solche Persönlichkeit vor der Selbsteinweihung nicht die mannigfaltigsten krummen und vergeblichen Seitenwege durchzumachen hat. Die Schulung erspart ihr diese Seitenwege. Sie führt in der geraden Richtung vorwärts. Wenn eine solche Selbsteinweihung für diese Seele eintritt, so rührt dies davon her, dass die Seele sich in vorhergehenden Lebensläufen die entsprechende Reife erworben hat. Es kommt nun sehr leicht vor, dass gerade eine solche Seele ein gewisses dunkles Gefühl von ihrer Reife hat und sich aus diesem Gefühl heraus gegen eine Schulung ablehnend verhält. Ein solches Gefühl kann nämlich einen gewissen Hochmut erzeugen, welcher das Vertrauen zu echter Geistesschulung hindert. Es kann nun eine gewisse Stufe der Seelenentwicklung bis zu einem gewissen Lebensalter verborgen bleiben und erst dann hervortreten. Aber es kann die Schulung gerade das rechte Mittel sein, um sie zum Hervortreten zu bringen. Verschließt sich ein Mensch dann gegen die Schulung, dann kann es sein, dass seine Fähigkeit in dem betreffenden Lebenslauf verborgen bleibt und erst wieder in einem der nächsten Lebensläufe hervortritt.
[ 7 ] In bezug auf die hier gemeinte Schulung für die übersinnliche Erkenntnis ist es wichtig, gewisse naheliegende Missverständnisse nicht aufkommen zu lassen. Das eine kann dadurch entstehen, dass man meint, die Schulung wolle den Menschen in bezug auf seine ganze Lebensführung zu einem andern Wesen machen. Allein es handelt sich nicht darum, dem Menschen allgemeine Lebensvorschriften zu geben, sondern ihm von Seelenverrichtungen zu sprechen, die, wenn er sie ausführt, ihm die Möglichkeit geben, das Übersinnliche zu beobachten. Auf denjenigen Teil seiner Lebensverrichtungen, der außerhalb der Beobachtung des Übersinnlichen liegt, haben diese Verrichtungen keinen unmittelbaren Einfluss. Der Mensch erwirbt sich hinzu zu diesen Lebensverrichtungen die Gabe der übersinnlichen Beobachtung. Die Tätigkeit dieser Beobachtung ist von den gewöhnlichen Verrichtungen des Lebens so getrennt wie der Zustand des Wachens von dem des Schlafens. Das eine kann das andere nicht im geringsten stören. Wer zum Beispiel den gewöhnlichen Ablauf des Lebens durch Eindrücke des übersinnlichen Schauens durchsetzen wollte, gleicht einem Ungesunden, dessen Schlaf von schädlichem Aufwachen fortwährend unterbrochen würde. Dem freien Willen des Geschulten muss es möglich sein, den Zustand des Beobachtens übersinnlicher Wirklichkeit herbeizuführen. Mittelbar hängt die Schulung mit Lebensvorschriften allerdings insofern zusammen, als ohne eine gewisse ethisch gestimmte Lebensführung ein Einblick in das Übersinnliche unmöglich oder schädlich ist. Und deshalb ist manches, das zur Anschauung des Übersinnlichen führt, zugleich Mittel zur Veredlung der Lebensführung. Auf der andern Seite erkennt man durch den Einblick in die übersinnliche Welt höhere moralische Impulse, die auch für die sinnlich-physische Welt gelten. Gewisse moralische Notwendigkeiten werden erst aus dieser Welt heraus erkannt. — Ein zweites Missverständnis wäre, wenn man glaubte, irgendeine zum übersinnlichen Erkennen führende Seelenverrichtung habe etwas mit Veränderung der physischen Organisation zu tun. Es haben solche Verrichtungen vielmehr nicht das geringste zu tun mit irgend etwas, in das Physiologie oder ein anderer Zweig der Naturerkenntnis hineinzureden hat. Sie sind so ganz von allem Physischen abliegende rein geistig-seelische Vorgänge wie das gesunde Denken und Wahrnehmen selbst. Der Art nach geht in der Seele durch eine solche Verrichtung nichts anderes vor, als was vorgeht, wenn sie gesund vorstellt oder urteilt. So viel und so wenig mit dem Leibe das gesunde Denken zu tun hat, so viel und so wenig haben mit diesem die Vorgänge der echten Schulung zur übersinnlichen Erkenntnis zu tun. Alles, was sich anders zum Menschen verhält, ist nicht wahre Geistesschulung, sondern ein Zerrbild derselben. Im Sinne des hier Gesagten sind die folgenden Ausführungen zu nehmen. Nur weil übersinnliche Erkenntnis etwas ist, was von der ganzen Seele des Menschen ausgeht, wird es so aussehen, als ob zur Schulung Dinge verlangt würden, die aus dem Menschen etwas anderes machen. In Wahrheit handelt es sich um Angaben über Verrichtungen, die die Seele in die Möglichkeit versetzen, innerhalb ihres Lebens solche Augenblicke herbeizuführen, in denen sie das Übersinnliche beobachten kann.
[ 8 ] Die Erhebung zu einem übersinnlichen Bewusstseinszustande kann nur von dem gewöhnlichen wachen Tagesbewusstsein ausgehen. In diesem Bewusstsein lebt die Seele vor ihrer Erhebung. Es werden ihr durch die Schulung Mittel gegeben, welche sie aus diesem Bewusstsein herausführen. Die hier zunächst in Betracht kommende Schulung gibt unter den ersten Mitteln solche, welche sich noch als Verrichtungen des gewöhnlichen Tagesbewusstseins kennzeichnen lassen. Gerade die bedeutsamsten Mittel sind solche, die in stillen Verrichtungen der Seele bestehen. Es handelt sich darum, dass sich die Seele ganz bestimmten Vorstellungen hingibt. Diese Vorstellungen sind solche, welche durch ihr Wesen eine weckende Kraft auf gewisse verborgene Fähigkeiten der menschlichen Seele ausüben. Sie unterscheiden sich von solchen Vorstellungen des wachen Tageslebens, welche die Aufgabe haben, ein äußeres Ding abzubilden. Je wahrer sie dies tun, desto wahrer sind sie. Und es gehört zu ihrem Wesen, in diesem Sinne wahr zu sein. Eine solche Aufgabe haben die Vorstellungen nicht, welchen sich die Seele zum Ziele der Geistesschulung hingeben soll. Sie sind so gestaltet, dass sie nicht ein Äußeres abbilden, sondern in sich selbst die Eigenheit haben, auf die Seele weckend zu wirken. Die besten Vorstellungen hierzu sind sinnbildliche oder symbolische. Doch können auch andere Vorstellungen verwendet werden. Denn es kommt eben gar nicht darauf an, was die Vorstellungen enthalten, sondern lediglich darauf, dass die Seele alle ihre Kräfte darauf richtet, nichts anderes im Bewusstsein zu haben als die betreffende Vorstellung. Während im gewöhnlichen Seelenleben dessen Kräfte auf vieles verteilt sind und die Vorstellungen rasch wechseln, kommt es bei der Geistesschulung auf die Konzentration des ganzen Seelenlebens auf eine Vorstellung an. Und diese Vorstellung muss durch freien Willen in den Mittelpunkt des Bewusstseins gerückt sein. Sinnbildliche Vorstellungen sind deshalb besser als solche, welche äußere Gegenstände oder Vorgänge abbilden, weil die letzteren den Anhaltspunkt in der Außenwelt haben und dadurch die Seele weniger sich auf sich allein zu stützen hat als bei sinnbildlichen, die aus der eigenen Seelenenergie heraus gebildet werden. Nicht was vorgestellt wird, ist wesentlich, sondern darauf kommt es an, dass das Vorgestellte durch die Art des Vorstellens das Seelische von jeder Anlehnung an ein Physisches loslöst.
[ 9 ] Man gelangt zu einem Erfassen dieser Versenkung in eine Vorstellung, wenn man sich erst einmal den Begriff der Erinnerung vor die Seele ruft. Hat man das Auge zum Beispiel auf einen Baum gerichtet und wendet man sich dann von dem Baume ab, so dass man ihn nicht mehr sehen kann, so vermag man die Vorstellung des Baumes aus der Erinnerung in der Seele wieder zu erwecken. Diese Vorstellung des Baumes, die man hat, wenn derselbe nicht dem Auge gegenübersteht, ist eine Erinnerung an den Baum. Nun denke man sich, man behalte diese Erinnerung in der Seele; man lasse die Seele gleichsam auf der Erinnerungsvorstellung ruhen; man bemühe sich, alle andern Vorstellungen dabei auszuschließen. Dann ist die Seele in die Erinnerungsvorstellung des Baumes versenkt. Man hat es dann mit einer Versenkung der Seele in eine Vorstellung zu tun; doch ist diese Vorstellung das Abbild eines durch die Sinne wahrgenommenen Dinges. Wenn man aber dasselbe vornimmt mit einer durch freien Willen in das Bewusstsein versetzten Vorstellung, so wird man nach und nach die Wirkung erzielen können, auf welche es ankommt.
[ 10 ] Es soll nun ein Beispiel der inneren Versenkung mit einer sinnbildlichen Vorstellung veranschaulicht werden. Zunächst muss eine solche Vorstellung erst in der Seele aufgebaut werden. Das kann in folgender Art geschehen: Man stelle sich eine Pflanze vor, wie sie im Boden wurzelt, wie sie Blatt nach Blatt treibt, wie sie sich zur Blüte entfaltet. Und nun denke man sich neben diese Pflanze einen Menschen hingestellt. Man mache den Gedanken in seiner Seele lebendig, wie der Mensch Eigenschaften und Fähigkeiten hat, welche denen der Pflanze gegenüber vollkommener genannt werden können. Man bedenke, wie er sich seinen Gefühlen und seinem Willen gemäß da und dorthin begeben kann, während die Pflanze an den Boden gefesselt ist. Nun aber sage man sich auch: ja, gewiss ist der Mensch vollkommener als die Pflanze; aber mir treten dafür auch an ihm Eigenschaften entgegen, welche ich an der Pflanze nicht wahrnehme, und durch deren Nichtvorhandensein sie mir in gewisser Hinsicht vollkommener als der Mensch erscheinen kann. Der Mensch ist erfüllt von Begierden und Leidenschaften; diesen folgt er bei seinem Verhalten. Ich kann bei ihm von Verirrungen durch seine Triebe und Leidenschaften sprechen. Bei der Pflanze sehe ich, wie sie den reinen Gesetzen des Wachstums folgt von Blatt zu Blatt, wie sie die Blüte leidenschaftslos dem keuschen Sonnenstrahl öffnet. Ich kann mir sagen: der Mensch hat eine gewisse Vollkommenheit vor der Pflanze voraus; aber er hat diese Vollkommenheit dadurch erkauft, dass er zu den mir rein erscheinenden Kräften der Pflanze in seinem Wesen hat hinzutreten lassen Triebe, Begierden und Leidenschaften. Ich stelle mir nun vor, dass der grüne Farbensaft durch die Pflanze fließt und dass dieser der Ausdruck ist für die reinen leidenschaftslosen Wachstumsgesetze. Und dann stelle ich mir vor, wie das rote Blut durch die Adern des Menschen fließt und wie dieses der Ausdruck ist für die Triebe, Begierden und Leidenschaften. Das alles lasse ich als einen lebhaften Gedanken in meiner Seele erstehen. Dann stelle ich mir weiter vor, wie der Mensch entwicklungsfähig ist; wie er seine Triebe und Leidenschaften durch seine höheren Seelenfähigkeiten läutern und reinigen kann. Ich denke mir, wie dadurch ein Niederes in diesen Trieben und Leidenschaften vernichtet wird, und diese auf einer höheren Stufe wiedergeboren werden. Dann wird das Blut vorgestellt werden dürfen als der Ausdruck der gereinigten und geläuterten Triebe und Leidenschaften. Ich blicke nun zum Beispiel im Geiste auf die Rose und sage mir: in dem roten Rosenblatt sehe ich die Farbe des grünen Pflanzensaftes umgewandelt in das Rot; und die rote Rose folgt wie das grüne Blatt den reinen, leidenschaftslosen Gesetzen des Wachstums. Das Rot der Rose möge mir nun werden das Sinnbild eines solchen Blutes, das der Ausdruck ist von geläuterten Trieben und Leidenschaften, welche das Niedere abgestreift haben und in ihrer Reinheit gleichen den Kräften, welche in der roten Rose wirken. Ich versuche nun, solche Gedanken nicht nur in meinem Verstande zu verarbeiten, sondern in meiner Empfindung lebendig werden zu lassen. Ich kann eine beseligende Empfindung haben, wenn ich die Reinheit und Leidenschaftslosigkeit der wachsenden Pflanze mir vorstelle; ich kann das Gefühl in mir erzeugen, wie gewisse höhere Vollkommenheiten erkauft werden müssen durch die Erwerbung der Triebe und Begierden. Das kann die Beseligung, die ich vorher empfunden habe, in ein ernstes Gefühl verwandeln; und dann kann ein Gefühl eines befreienden Glückes in mir sich regen, wenn ich mich hingebe dem Gedanken an das rote Blut, das Träger werden kann von innerlich reinen Erlebnissen, wie der rote Saft der Rose. Es kommt darauf an, dass man nicht gefühllos sich den Gedanken gegenüberstelle, welche zum Aufbau einer sinnbildlichen Vorstellung dienen. Nachdem man sich in solchen Gedanken und Gefühlen ergangen hat, verwandle man sich dieselben in folgende sinnbildliche Vorstellung. Man stelle sich ein schwarzes Kreuz vor. Dieses sei Sinnbild für das vernichtete Niedere der Triebe und Leidenschaften; und da, wo sich die Balken des Kreuzes schneiden, denke man sich sieben rote, strahlende Rosen im Kreise angeordnet. Diese Rosen seien das Sinnbild für ein Blut, das Ausdruck ist für geläuterte, gereinigte Leidenschaften und Triebe.1Es kommt nicht darauf an, inwiefern diese oder jene naturwissenschaftliche Vorstellung die obigen Gedanken berechtigt findet oder nicht. Denn es handelt sich um die Entwicklung solcher Gedanken an Pflanze und Mensch, welche, ohne alle Theorie, durch eine einfache, unmittelbare Anschauung gewonnen werden können. Solche Gedanken haben ja doch auch ihre Bedeutung neben den in anderer Beziehung nicht minder bedeutsamen theoretischen Vorstellungen über die Dinge der Außenwelt. Und hier sind die Gedanken nicht dazu da, um einen Tatbestand wissenschaftlich darzustellen, sondern um ein Sinnbild aufzubauen, das sich als seelisch wirksam erweist, gleichgültig, welche Einwände dieser oder jener Persönlichkeit einfallen bei dem Aufbau dieses Sinnbildes. Eine solche sinnbildliche Vorstellung soll es nun sein, die man sich in der Art vor die Seele ruft, wie es oben an einer Erinnerungsvorstellung veranschaulicht ist. Eine solche Vorstellung hat eine seelenweckende Kraft, wenn man sich in innerlicher Versenkung ihr hingibt. Jede andere Vorstellung muss man versuchen während der Versenkung auszuschließen. Lediglich das charakterisierte Sinnbild soll im Geiste vor der Seele schweben, so lebhaft als dies möglich ist. — Es ist nicht bedeutungslos, dass dieses Sinnbild nicht einfach als eine weckende Vorstellung hier angeführt worden ist, sondern dass es erst durch gewisse Vorstellungen über Pflanze und Mensch aufgebaut worden ist. Denn es hängt die Wirkung eines solchen Sinnbildes davon ab, dass man es sich in der geschilderten Art zusammengestellt hat, bevor man es zur inneren Versenkung verwendet. Stellt man es sich vor, ohne einen solchen Aufbau erst in der eigenen Seele durchgemacht zu haben, so bleibt es kalt und viel unwirksamer, als wenn es durch die Vorbereitung seine seelenbeleuchtende Kraft erhalten hat. Während der Versenkung soll man jedoch sich alle die vorbereitenden Gedanken nicht in die Seele rufen, sondern lediglich das Bild lebhaft vor sich im Geiste schweben haben und dabei jene Empfindung mitschwingen lassen, die sich als Ergebnis durch die vorbereitenden Gedanken eingestellt hat. So wird das Sinnbild zum Zeichen neben dem Empfindungserlebnis. Und in dem Verweilen der Seele in diesem Erlebnis liegt das Wirksame. Je länger man verweilen kann, ohne dass eine störende andere Vorstellung sich einmischt, desto wirksamer ist der ganze Vorgang. Jedoch ist es gut, wenn man sich außer der Zeit, welche man der eigentlichen Versenkung widmet, öfters durch Gedanken und Gefühle der oben geschilderten Art den Aufbau des Bildes wiederholt, damit die Empfindung nicht verblasse. Je mehr Geduld man zu einer solchen Erneuerung hat, desto bedeutsamer ist das Bild für die Seele. (In den Auseinandersetzungen meines Buches: «Wie erlangt man Erkenntnisse der höheren Welten?» sind noch andere Beispiele von Mitteln zur inneren Versenkung angegeben. Besonders wirksam sind die daselbst charakterisierten Meditationen über das Werden und Vergehen einer Pflanze, über die in einem Pflanzen-Samenkorn schlummernden Werdekräfte, über die Formen von Kristallen usw. Hier in diesem Buche sollte an einem Beispiele das Wesen der Meditation gezeigt werden.)
[ 11 ] Ein solches Sinnbild, wie es hier geschildert ist, bildet kein äußeres Ding oder Wesen, das durch die Natur hervorgebracht wird, ab. Aber eben gerade dadurch hat es seine weckende Kraft für gewisse rein seelische Fähigkeiten. Es könnte allerdings jemand einen Einwand erheben. Er könnte sagen: Gewiss, das «Ganze», als Sinnbild, ist nicht durch die Natur vorhanden; aber alle Einzelheiten sind doch aus dieser Natur entlehnt: die schwarze Farbe, die Rosen und so weiter. Das alles werde doch durch die Sinne wahrgenommen. Wer durch solchen Einwand gestört wird, der sollte bedenken, dass nicht die Abbildungen der Sinneswahrnehmungen dasjenige sind, was zur Weckung der höheren Seelenfähigkeiten führt, sondern dass diese Wirkung lediglich durch die Art der Zusammenfügung dieser Einzelheiten hervorgerufen wird. Und diese Zusammenfügung bildet nicht etwas ab, was in der Sinneswelt vorhanden ist.
[ 12 ] An einem Sinnbild — als Beispiel — sollte der Vorgang der wirksamen Versenkung der Seele veranschaulicht werden. In der Geistesschulung können die mannigfaltigsten Bilder dieser Art verwendet und diese in der verschiedensten Art aufgebaut werden. Es können auch gewisse Sätze, Formeln, einzelne Worte gegeben werden, in welche man sich zu versenken hat. In jedem Falle werden diese Mittel der inneren Versenkung das Ziel haben, die Seele loszureißen von der Sinneswahrnehmung und sie zu einer solchen Tätigkeit anzuregen, bei welcher der Eindruck auf die physischen Sinne bedeutungslos ist und die Entfaltung innerer schlummernder Seelenfähigkeiten das Wesentliche wird. Es kann sich auch um Versenkungen bloß in Gefühle, Empfindungen usw. handeln. Solches erweist sich besonders wirksam. Man nehme einmal das Gefühl der Freude. Im normalen Lebensverlaufe mag die Seele Freude erleben, wenn eine äußere Anregung zur Freude vorhanden ist. Wenn eine gesund empfindende Seele wahrnimmt, wie ein Mensch eine Handlung vollbringt, welche diesem seine Herzensgüte eingibt, so wird diese Seele Wohlgefallen, Freude an einer solchen Handlung haben. Aber diese Seele kann nun nachdenken über eine Handlung dieser Art. Sie kann sich sagen: Eine Handlung, welche aus Herzensgüte vollbracht wird, ist eine solche, bei welcher der Vollbringer nicht seinem eigenen Interesse folgt, sondern dem Interesse seines Mitmenschen. Und eine solche Handlung kann eine sittlich gute genannt werden. Nun aber kann die betrachtende Seele sich ganz frei machen von der Vorstellung des einzelnen Falles in der Außenwelt, welcher ihr die Freude oder das Wohlgefallen gemacht hat, und sie kann sich die umfassende Idee der Herzensgüte bilden. Sie kann sich etwa denken, wie Herzensgüte dadurch entstehe, dass die eine Seele das Interesse der andern gleichsam aufsauge und zu dem eigenen mache. Und die Seele kann nun die Freude empfinden über diese sittliche Idee der Herzensgüte. Das ist die Freude nicht an diesem oder jenem Vorgange der Sinneswelt, sondern die Freude an einer Idee als solcher. Versucht man solche Freude durch längere Zeit in der Seele lebendig sein zu lassen, so ist dies Versenkung in ein Gefühl, in eine Empfindung. Nicht die Idee ist dann das Wirksame zur Weckung der inneren Seelenfähigkeiten, sondern das durch längere Zeit andauernde Walten des nicht durch einen bloßen einzelnen äußeren Eindruck angeregten Gefühls innerhalb der Seele. — Da die übersinnliche Erkenntnis tiefer einzudringen vermag in das Wesen der Dinge als das gewöhnliche Vorstellen, so können aus deren Erfahrungen heraus Empfindungen angegeben werden, welche noch in viel höherem Grade auf die Entfaltung der Seelenfähigkeiten wirken, wenn sie zur inneren Versenkung verwendet werden. So notwendig dies letztere für höhere Grade der Schulung ist, so soll man doch dessen eingedenk sein, dass energische Versenkung in solche Gefühle und Empfindungen, wie zum Beispiel das an der Betrachtung der Herzensgüte charakterisierte, schon sehr weit führen kann. — Da die Wesenheiten der Menschen verschieden sind, so sind für die einzelnen Menschen auch verschiedene Mittel der Schulung die wirksamen. — Was die Zeitlänge der Versenkung betrifft, so ist zu bedenken, dass die Wirkung um so stärker ist, je gelassener und besonnener diese Versenkung werden kann. Aber eine jegliche Übertreibung in dieser Richtung soll vermieden werden. Es kann ein gewisser innerer Takt, der sich durch die Übungen selbst ergibt, den Schüler lehren, an was er in dieser Beziehung sich zu halten hat.
[ 13 ] Man wird solche Übungen innerer Versenkung in der Regel lange durchzuführen haben, bevor man deren Ergebnis selber wahrnehmen kann. Was zur Geistesschulung unbedingt gehört, ist: Geduld und Ausdauer. Wer diese beiden nicht in sich wachruft und nicht so in aller Ruhe fortdauernd seine Übungen macht, dass Geduld und Ausdauer dabei stets die Grundstimmung seiner Seele ausmachen, der kann nicht viel erreichen.
[ 14 ] Es ist aus der vorangehenden Darstellung wohl ersichtlich, dass die innere Versenkung (Meditation) ein Mittel ist zur Erlangung der Erkenntnis höherer Welten, aber auch dass nicht jeder beliebige Vorstellungsinhalt dazu führt, sondern nur ein solcher, welcher in der geschilderten Art ein gerichtet ist.
[ 15 ] Der Weg, auf den hier hingewiesen ist, führt zunächst zu dem, was man die imaginative Erkenntnis nennen kann. Sie ist die erste höhere Erkenntnisstufe. Das Erkennen, welches auf der sinnlichen Wahrnehmung und auf der Verarbeitung der sinnlichen Wahrnehmungen durch den an die Sinne gebundenen Verstand beruht, kann — im Sinne der Geisteswissenschaft — das «gegenständliche Erkennen» genannt werden. Über dieses hinaus liegen die höheren Erkenntnisstufen, deren erste eben das imaginative Erkennen ist. Der Ausdruck «imaginativ» könnte bei jemand Bedenken hervorrufen, der sich unter «Imagination» nur eine «eingebildete» Vorstellung denkt, welcher nichts Wirkliches entspricht. In der Geisteswissenschaft soll aber die «imaginative» Erkenntnis als eine solche aufgefasst werden, welche durch einen übersinnlichen Bewusstseinszustand der Seele zustande kommt. Was in diesem Bewusstseinszustande wahrgenommen wird, sind geistige Tatsachen und Wesenheiten, zu denen die Sinne keinen Zugang haben. Weil dieser Zustand in der Seele erweckt wird durch die Versenkung in Sinnbilder oder «Imaginationen», so kann auch die Welt dieses höheren Bewusstseinszustandes die «imaginative» und die auf sie bezügliche Erkenntnis die «imaginative» genannt werden. «Imaginativ» bedeutet also etwas, was in einem andern Sinne «wirklich» ist als die Tatsachen und Wesenheiten der physischen Sinneswahrnehmung. Auf den Inhalt der Vorstellungen, welche das imaginative Erleben erfüllen, kommt nichts an; dagegen alles auf die Seelenfähigkeit, die an diesem Erleben herangebildet wird.
[ 16 ] Ein sehr naheliegender Einwurf gegen die Verwendung der charakterisierten sinnbildlichen Vorstellungen ist, dass ihre Bildung einem träumerischen Denken und einer willkürlichen Einbildungskraft entspringen und dass sie daher nur von zweifelhaftem Erfolge sein könne. Denjenigen Sinnbildern gegenüber, welche der regelrechten Geistesschulung zugrunde liegen, ist ein damit gekennzeichnetes Bedenken unberechtigt. Denn die Sinnbilder werden so gewählt, dass von ihrer Beziehung auf eine äußere sinnliche Wirklichkeit ganz abgesehen werden kann und ihr Wert lediglich in der Kraft gesucht werden kann, mit welcher sie auf die Seele dann wirken, wenn diese alle Aufmerksamkeit von der äußeren Welt abzieht, wenn sie alle Eindrücke der Sinne unterdrückt und auch alle Gedanken ausschaltet, die sie, auf äußere Anregung hin, hegen kann. Am anschaulichsten wird der Vorgang der Meditation durch Vergleich derselben mit dem Schlafzustande. Sie ist diesem nach der einen Seite hin ähnlich, nach der anderen völlig entgegengesetzt. Sie ist ein Schlaf, der gegenüber dem Tagesbewusstsein ein höheres Erwachtsein darstellt. Es kommt darauf an, dass durch die Konzentration auf die entsprechende Vorstellung oder das Bild die Seele genötigt ist, viel stärkere Kräfte aus ihren eigenen Tiefen hervorzuholen, als sie im gewöhnlichen Leben oder dem gewöhnlichen Erkennen anwendet. Ihre innere Regsamkeit wird dadurch erhöht. Sie löst sich los von der Leiblichkeit, wie sie sich im Schlafe loslöst; aber sie geht nicht wie in diesem in die Bewusstlosigkeit über, sondern sie erlebt eine Weit, die sie vorher nicht erlebt hat. Ihr Zustand ist, obwohl er nach der Seite der Losgelöstheit vom Leibe mit dem Schlafe verglichen werden kann, doch so, dass er sich zu dem gewöhnlichen Tagesbewusstsein als ein solcher eines erhöhten Wachseins kennzeichnen lässt. Dadurch erlebt sich die Seele in ihrer wahren inneren, selbständigen Wesenheit, während sie sich im gewöhnlichen Tagwachen durch die in demselben vorhandene schwächere Entfaltung ihrer Kräfte nur mit Hilfe des Leibes zum Bewusstsein bringt, sich also nicht selbst erlebt, sondern nur in dem Bilde gewahr wird, das — wie eine Art Spiegelbild — der Leib (eigentlich dessen Vorgänge) vor ihr entwirft.
[ 17 ] Diejenigen Sinnbilder, welche in der oben geschilderten Art aufgebaut werden, beziehen sich naturgemäß noch nicht auf etwas Wirkliches in der geistigen Weit. Sie dienen dazu, um die menschliche Seele loszureißen von der Sinneswahrnehmung und von dem Gehirninstrument, an welches zunächst der Verstand gebunden ist. Diese Losreißung kann nicht früher geschehen, als bis der Mensch fühlt: jetzt stelle ich etwas vor durch Kräfte, bei denen mir meine Sinne und das Gehirn nicht als Werkzeuge dienen. Das erste, was der Mensch auf diesem Wege erlebt, ist ein solches Freiwerden von den physischen Organen. Er kann sich dann sagen: mein Bewusstsein erlöscht nicht, wenn ich die Sinneswahrnehmungen und das gewöhnliche Verstandesdenken unberücksichtigt lasse; ich kann mich aus diesem herausheben und empfinde mich dann als ein Wesen neben dem, was ich vorher war. Das ist das erste rein geistige Erlebnis: die Beobachtung einer seelisch-geistigen Ich-Wesenheit. Diese hat sich als ein neues Selbst aus demjenigen Selbst herausgehoben, das nur an die physischen Sinne und den physischen Verstand gebunden ist. Hätte man ohne die Versenkung sich losgemacht von der Sinnesund Verstandeswelt, so wäre man in das «Nichts» der Bewusstlosigkeit versunken. Man hat die seelischgeistige Wesenheit selbstverständlich auch vor der Versenkung schon gehabt. Sie hatte aber noch keine Werkzeuge zur Beobachtung der geistigen Welt. Sie war etwa so wie ein physischer Leib, der kein Auge zum Sehen oder kein Ohr zum Hören hat. Die Kraft, welche in der Versenkung aufgewendet worden ist, hat erst die seelisch-geistigen Organe aus der vorher unorganisierten seelisch-geistigen Wesenheit herausgeschaffen. Das, was man sich so anerschaffen hat, nimmt man auch zuerst wahr. Das erste Erlebnis ist daher in gewissem Sinne Selbstwahrnehmung. Es gehört zum Wesen der Geistesschulung, dass die Seele durch die an sich geübte Selbsterziehung an diesem Punkte ihrer Entwicklung ein volles Bewusstsein davon hat, dass sie zunächst sich selbst wahrnimmt in den Bilderwelten (Imaginationen), die infolge der geschilderten Übungen auftreten. Diese Bilder treten zwar als lebend in einer neuen Welt auf; die Seele muss aber erkennen, dass sie doch nichts anderes zunächst sind als die Widerspiegelung ihres eigenen durch die Übungen verstärkten Wesens. Und sie muss dieses nicht nur im richtigen Urteile erkennen, sondern auch zu einer solchen Ausbildung des Willens gekommen sein, dass sie jederzeit die Bilder wieder aus dem Bewusstsein entfernen, auslöschen kann. Die Seele muss innerhalb dieser Bilder völlig frei und vollbesonnen walten können. Das gehört zur richtigen Geistesschulung in diesem Punkte. Würde sie dieses nicht können, so wäre sie im Gebiete der geistigen Erlebnisse in demselben Falle, in dem eine Seele wäre in der physischen Welt, welche, wenn sie das Auge nach einem Gegenstande richtete, durch diesen gefesselt wäre, so dass sie von demselben nicht mehr wegschauen könnte. Eine Ausnahme von dieser Möglichkeit des Auslöschens macht nur eine Gruppe von inneren Bilderlebnissen, die auf der erlangten Stufe der Geistesschulung nicht auszulöschen ist. Diese entspricht dem eigenen Seelen-Wesenskerne; und der Geistesschüler erkennt in diesen Bildern dasjenige in ihm selber, welches sich als sein Grundwesen durch die wiederholten Erdenleben hindurchzieht. Auf diesem Punkte wird das Erfühlen von wiederholten Erdenleben zu einem wirklichen Erlebnis. In bezug auf alles übrige muss die erwähnte Freiheit der Erlebnisse herrschen. Und erst, nachdem man die Fähigkeit der Auslöschung erlangt hat, tritt man an die wirkliche geistige Außenwelt heran. An Stelle des Ausgelöschten kommt ein anderes, in dem man die geistige Wirklichkeit erkennt. Man fühlt, wie man seelisch aus einem Unbestimmten als ein Bestimmtes herauswächst. Von dieser Selbstwahrnehmung aus muss es dann weiter gehen zur Beobachtung einer seelisch-geistigen Außenwelt. Diese tritt ein, wenn man sein inneres Erleben in dem Sinne einrichtet, wie es hier weiter angedeutet werden wird.
[ 18 ] Zunächst ist die Seele des Geistesschülers schwach in bezug auf alles das, was in der seelisch-geistigen Welt wahrzunehmen ist. Er wird schon eine große innere Energie aufwenden müssen, um die Sinnbilder oder anderen Vorstellungen, welche er sich aus den Anregungen der Sinneswelt heraus aufgebaut hat, in innerer Versenkung festzuhalten. Will er aber außerdem noch zur wirklichen Beobachtung in einer höheren Welt gelangen, so muss er nicht nur an diesen Vorstellungen festhalten können. Er muss auch, nachdem er dies getan hat, in einem Zustande verweilen können, in dem keine Anregungen der sinnlichen Außenwelt auf die Seele wirken, aber in dem auch die charakterisierten imaginierten Vorstellungen selbst aus dem Bewusstsein heraus getilgt werden. Nun kann erst das im Bewusstsein hervortreten, was durch die Versenkung sich gebildet hat. Es handelt sich darum, dass nunmehr innere Seelenkraft genug vorhanden ist, damit das also Gebildete wirklich geistig geschaut wird, damit es nicht der Aufmerksamkeit entgehe. Dies ist aber bei noch schwach entwickelter innerer Energie durchaus der Fall. Was sich als seelisch-geistiger Organismus da zunächst herausbildet und was man in Selbstwahrnehmung erfassen soll, ist zart und flüchtig. Und die Störungen der sinnlichen Außenwelt und deren Erinnerungs-Nachwirkungen sind, auch wenn man sich noch so sehr bemüht sie abzuhalten, groß. Es kommen da ja nicht nur diejenigen Störungen in Betracht, welche man beachtet, sondern viel mehr sogar diejenigen, welche man im gewöhnlichen Leben gar nicht beachtet. — Es ist aber gerade durch das Wesen des Menschen ein Übergangszustand in dieser Beziehung möglich. Was die Seele zunächst wegen der Störungen der physischen Welt im Wachzustand nicht leisten kann, das vermag sie im Schlafzustand. Wer sich der inneren Versenkung ergibt, der wird bei gehöriger Aufmerksamkeit an seinem Schlaf etwas gewahr werden. Er wird fühlen, dass er während des Schlafes «nicht ganz schläft», sondern dass seine Seele Zeiten hat, in denen sie schlafend doch in einer gewissen Art tätig ist. In solchen Zuständen halten die natürlichen Vorgänge die Einflüsse der Außenwelt ab, welche die Seele wachend noch nicht aus eigener Kraft abhalten kann. Wenn aber nun die Übungen der Versenkung schon gewirkt haben, so löst sich die Seele während des Schlafes aus der Bewusstlosigkeit heraus und fühlt die geistig-seelische Welt. In einer zweifachen Art kann das eintreten. Es kann dem Menschen während des Schlafens klar sein: ich bin nun in einer andern Welt, oder aber er kann in sich nach dem Erwachen die Erinnerung haben: ich war in einer andern Welt. Zu dem ersteren gehört allerdings eine größere innere Energie als zu dem zweiten. Daher wird das letztere bei dem Anfänger in der Geistesschulung das häufigere sein. Nach und nach kann das so weit gehen, dass dem Schüler nach dem Erwachen vorkommt: ich war die ganze Schlafenszeit hindurch in einer andern Welt, aus der ich aufgetaucht bin mit dem Erwachen. Und seine Erinnerung an die Wesenheiten und Tatsachen dieser andern Welt wird eine immer bestimmtere werden. Es ist bei dem Geistesschüler dann in der einen oder der andern Form das eingetreten, was man die Kontinuität des Bewusstseins nennen kann. (Die Fortdauer des Bewusstseins während des Schlafens.) Damit ist aber durchaus nicht gemeint, dass etwa der Mensch immer während des Schlafes sein Bewusstsein hat. Es ist schon viel errungen in der Kontinuität des Bewusstseins, wenn der Mensch, der sonst schläft wie ein anderer, gewisse Zeiten hat während des Schlafens, in denen er auf eine geistigseelische Welt wie bewusst hinschauen kann, oder wenn er im Wachen auf solche kurz dauernde Bewusstseinszustände wieder wie hinschauen kann. Nicht außer acht möge aber gelassen werden, dass das hier Geschilderte doch nur als ein Übergangszustand aufzufassen ist. Es ist gut, durch diesen Übergangszustand behufs Schulung hindurchzugehen; aber man soll durchaus nicht glauben, dass eine abschließende Anschauung in bezug auf die geistig-seelische Welt aus diesem Übergangszustande geschöpft werden soll. Die Seele ist in diesem Zustande unsicher und kann sich darinnen noch nicht auf dasjenige verlassen, was sie wahrnimmt. Aber sie sammelt durch solche Erlebnisse immer mehr Kraft, um dann auch während des Wachens dazu zu gelangen, die störenden Einflüsse der physischen Außenund Innenwelt von sich abzuhalten und so zu geistig-seelischer Beobachtung zu gelangen, wenn keine Eindrücke durch die Sinne kommen, wenn der an das physische Gehirn gebundene Verstand schweigt und wenn auch die Vorstellungen der Versenkung aus dem Bewusstsein entfernt sind, durch welche man sich auf das geistige Schauen ja nur vorbereitet hat. — Was durch die Geisteswissenschaft in dieser oder jener Form veröffentlicht wird, sollte niemals aus einer andern geistig-seelischen Beobachtung stammen als aus einer solchen, welche bei vollem Wachzustande gemacht worden ist.
[ 19 ] Zwei Seelenerlebnisse sind wichtig im Fortgange der Geistesschulung. Das eine ist dasjenige, durch welches sich der Mensch sagen kann: wenn ich nunmehr auch alles außer acht lasse, was mir die physische Außenwelt an Eindrücken geben kann, so blicke ich in mein Inneres doch nicht wie auf ein Wesen, dem alle Tätigkeit erlöscht, sondern ich schaue auf ein Wesen, das sich seiner selbst bewusst ist in einer Welt, von der ich nichts weiß, so lange ich mich nur von jenen sinnlichen und gewöhnlichen Verstandeseindrücken anregen lasse. Die Seele hat in diesem Augenblicke die Empfindung, dass sie in sich selbst ein neues Wesen als ihren Seelen-Wesenskern in der oben beschriebenen Weise geboren habe. Und dieses Wesen ist ein solches von ganz anderen Eigenschaften, als diejenigen sind, welche vorher in der Seele waren. — Das andere Erlebnis besteht darin, dass man sein bisheriges Wesen nunmehr wie ein zweites neben sich haben kann. Dasjenige, worin man bisher sich eingeschlossen wusste, wird zu etwas, dem man sich in gewisser Beziehung gegenübergestellt findet. Man fühlt sich zeitweilig außerhalb dessen, was man sonst als die eigene Wesenheit, als sein «Ich» angesprochen hat. Es ist so, wie wenn man nun in voller Besonnenheit in zwei «Ichen» lebte. Das eine ist dasjenige, welches man bisher gekannt hat. Das andere steht wie eine neugeborene Wesenheit über diesem. Und man fühlt, wie das erstere eine gewisse Selbständigkeit erlangt gegenüber dem zweiten; etwa so wie der Leib des Menschen eine gewisse Selbständigkeit hat gegenüber dem ersten Ich. — Dieses Erlebnis ist von großer Bedeutung. Denn durch dasselbe weiß der Mensch, was es heißt, in jener Welt leben, welche er durch die Schulung zu erreichen strebt.
[ 20 ] Das zweite — das neugeborene — Ich kann nun zum Wahrnehmen in der geistigen Welt geführt werden. In ihm kann sich entwickeln, was für diese geistige Welt die Bedeutung hat, welche den Sinnesorganen für die sinnlich-physische Welt zukommt. Ist diese Entwicklung bis zu dem notwendigen Grade fortgeschritten, so wird der Mensch nicht nur sich selbst als ein neugeborenes Ich empfinden, sondern er wird nunmehr um sich herum geistige Tatsachen und geistige Wesenheiten wahrnehmen, wie er durch die physischen Sinne die physische Welt wahrnimmt. Und dies ist ein drittes bedeutsames Erlebnis. Um völlig auf dieser Stufe der Geistesschulung zurechtzukommen, muss der Mensch damit rechnen, dass mit der Verstärkung der Seelenkräfte die Selbstliebe, der Selbstsinn in einem solchen Grade auftreten, den das gewöhnliche Seelenleben gar nicht kennt. Es wäre ein Missverständnis, wenn jemand glauben könnte, dass man auf diesem Punkte nur von der gewöhnlichen Selbstliebe zu sprechen hat. Diese verstärkt sich auf dieser Stufe der Entwicklung so, dass sie das Aussehen einer Naturkraft innerhalb der eigenen Seele annimmt, und es gehört eine starke Willensschulung dazu, um diesen starken Selbstsinn zu besiegen. Dieser Selbstsinn wird durch die Geistesschulung nicht etwa erzeugt; er ist immer vorhanden; er gelangt durch das Geist-Erleben nur zum Bewusstsein. Die Willensschulung muss der andern Geistesschulung durchaus zur Seite gehen. Es ist ein starker Trieb da, sich in der Welt beseligt zu fühlen, welche man sich erst selbst herangeschaffen hat. Und man muss gewissermaßen das in der oben erwähnten Art auslöschen können, um das man sich erst mit aller Anstrengung bemüht hat. In der erreichten imaginativen Welt muss man sich auslöschen. Dagegen aber kämpfen die stärksten Triebe des Selbstsinnes an. — Es kann leicht der Glaube entstehen, dass die Übungen der Geistesschulung etwas Äußerliches seien, das von der moralischen Entwicklung der Seele absieht. Demgegenüber muss gesagt werden, dass die moralische Kraft, die zu der gekennzeichneten Besiegung des Selbstsinnes notwendig ist, nicht erlangt werden kann, ohne dass die moralische Verfassung der Seele auf eine entsprechende Stufe gebracht wird. Fortschritt in der Geistesschulung ist nicht denkbar, ohne dass zugleich ein moralischer Fortschritt sich notwendig ergibt. Ohne moralische Kraft ist die erwähnte Besiegung des Selbstsinnes nicht möglich. Alles Reden darüber, dass die wahre Geistesschulung nicht zugleich eine moralische Schulung sei, ist doch unsachgemäß. Nur demjenigen, welcher ein solches Erlebnis nicht kennt, kann sich der Einwand ergeben: wie kann man wissen, dass man es dann, wenn man glaubt, geistige Wahrnehmungen zu haben, mit Wirklichkeiten und nicht mit bloßen Einbildungen (Visionen, Halluzinationen usw.) zu tun habe? — Die Sache ist ebenso, dass derjenige, welcher in regelrechter Schulung die charakterisierte Stufe erreicht hat, seine eigene Vorstellung von einer geistigen Wirklichkeit ebenso unterscheiden kann, wie ein Mensch mit gesundem Verstande unterscheiden kann die Vorstellung eines heißen Eisenstückes von dem wirklichen Vorhandensein eines solchen, das er mit der Hand berührt. Den Unterschied gibt eben das gesunde Erleben und nichts anderes. Und auch in der geistigen Welt gibt den Prüfstein das Leben selbst. Wie man weiß, dass in der Sinnenwelt ein vorgestelltes Eisenstück, wenn es noch so heiß gedacht wird, nicht die Finger verbrennt, so weiß der geschulte Geistesschüler, ob er nur in seiner Einbildung eine geistige Tatsache erlebt oder ob auf seine erweckten geistigen Wahmehmungsorgane wirkliche Tatsachen oder Wesenheiten einen Eindruck machen. Die Maßregeln, welche man während der Geistesschulung zu beobachten hat, damit man in dieser Beziehung nicht Täuschungen zum Opfer fällt, werden in der folgenden Darstellung noch besprochen werden.
[ 21 ] Es ist nun von der größten Bedeutung, dass der Geistesschüler eine ganz bestimmte Seelenverfassung erlangt hat, wenn das Bewusstsein von einem neugeborenen Ich bei ihm eintritt. Denn es ist der Mensch durch sein Ich der Führer seiner Empfindungen, Gefühle, Vorstellungen, seiner Triebe, Begehrungen und Leidenschaften. Wahrnehmungen und Vorstellungen können in der Seele sich nicht selbst überlassen sein. Sie müssen durch die denkende Besonnenheit geregelt werden. Und es ist das Ich, welches diese Denkgesetze handhabt und welches durch sie Ordnung in das Vorstellungsund Gedankenleben bringt. Ähnlich ist es mit den Begehrungen, den Trieben, den Neigungen, den Leidenschaften. Die ethischen Grundsätze werden zu Führern dieser Seelenkräfte. Und durch das sittliche Urteil wird das Ich der Führer der Seele auf diesem Gebiete. Wenn nun der Mensch aus seinem gewöhnlichen Ich ein höheres herauszieht, so wird das erstere in einer gewissen Beziehung selbständig. Es wird diesem so viel an lebendiger Kraft weggenommen, als dem höheren Ich zugewendet wird. Man setze aber einmal den Fall, der Mensch habe in sich noch nicht eine gewisse Fähigkeit und Festigung in den Denkgesetzen und in der Urteilskraft ausgebildet und er wollte auf solcher Stufe sein höheres Ich gebären. Er wird nur so viel seinem gewöhnlichen Ich an Denkfähigkeit zurücklassen können, als er vorher ausgebildet hat. Ist das Maß des geordneten Denkens zu gering, dann wird in dem selbständig gewordenen gewöhnlichen Ich ein ungeordnetes, verworrenes, phantastisches Denken und Urteilen auftreten. Und weil bei einer solchen Persönlichkeit das neugeborene Ich auch nur schwach sein kann, wird für das übersinnliche Schauen das verworrene niedere Ich die Oberherrschaft erlangen und der Mensch das Gleichgewicht seiner Urteilskraft für die Beobachtung des Übersinnlichen nicht zeigen. Hätte er genügend Fähigkeit des logischen Denkens ausgebildet, so könnte er sein gewöhnliches Ich ruhig seiner Selbständigkeit überlassen. — Und auf dem ethischen Gebiete ist es ebenso. Wenn der Mensch nicht Festigkeit im moralischen Urteil erlangt hat, wenn er nicht genügend Herr geworden ist über Neigungen, Triebe und Leidenschaften, dann wird er sein gewöhnliches Ich verselbständigen in einem Zustand, in dem die genannten Seelenkräfte wirken. Es kann der Fall eintreten, dass der Mensch in dem Feststellen der erlebten übersinnlichen Erkenntnisse nicht einen gleich hohen Wahrheitssinn walten lässt wie in dem, was er sich durch die physische Außenwelt zum Bewusstsein bringt. Er könnte bei so gelockertem Wahrheitssinn alles mögliche für geistige Wirklichkeit halten, was nur seine Phantasterei ist. In diesen Wahrheitssinn hinein müssen Festigkeit des ethischen Urteiles, Sicherheit des Charakters, Gründlichkeit des Gewisses wirken, die in dem zurückgelassenen Ich ausgebildet sind, bevor das höhere Ich zum Zwecke der übersinnlichen Erkenntnis tätig wird. — Es darf dies durchaus nicht zu einem Abschreckungsmittel gegenüber der Schulung werden; es muss aber ganz ernst genommen werden.
[ 22 ] Wer den starken Willen hat, alles zu tun, was das erste Ich zur inneren Sicherheit in der Ausübung seiner Verrichtungen bringt, der braucht vor der zur übersinnlichen Erkenntnis bewirkten Loslösung eines zweiten Ich durch die geistige Schulung durchaus nicht zurückzuschrecken. Nur muss er sich vorbehalten, dass Selbsttäuschung dann eine große Macht über den Menschen hat, wenn es sich darum handelt, dass dieser sich für etwas «reif» befinden soll. In derjenigen Geistesschulung, welche hier beschrieben ist, erlangt der Mensch eine solche Ausbildung seines Gedankenlebens, dass er in Gefahren, zu irren, wie sie oft vermutet werden, nicht kommen kann. Diese Gedankenausbildung bewirkt, dass alle inneren Erlebnisse, welche notwendig sind, auftreten, dass sie aber so sich abspielen, wie sie von der Seele durchgemacht werden müssen, ohne von schädlichen Phantasieverirrungen begleitet zu sein. Ohne entsprechende Gedankenausbildung können die Erlebnisse eine starke Unsicherheit in der Seele hervorrufen. Die hier betonte Art bewirkt, dass die Erlebnisse so auftreten, dass man sie vollkommen kennenlernt, wie man die Wahrnehmungen der physischen Welt bei gesunder Seelenverfassung kennenlernt. Man wird durch die Ausbildung des Denklebens mehr ein Beobachter dessen, was man an sich erlebt, während man ohne das Denkleben unbesonnen in dem Erlebnis drinnen steht.
[ 23 ] Von einer sachgemäßen Schulung werden gewisse Eigenschaften genannt, welche sich durch Übung derjenige erwerben soll, welcher den Weg in die höheren Welten finden will. Es sind dies vor allem: Herrschaft der Seele über ihre Gedankenführung, über ihren Willen und ihre Gefühle. Die Art, wie diese Herrschaft durch Übung herbeigeführt werden soll, hat ein zweifaches Ziel. Einerseits soll der Seele dadurch Festigkeit, Sicherheit und Gleichgewicht so weit eingeprägt werden, dass sie sich diese Eigenschaften bewahrt, auch wenn ein zweites Ich aus ihr geboren wird. Andrerseits soll diesem zweiten Ich Stärke und innerer Halt mit auf den Weg gegeben werden.
[ 24 ] Was dem Denken des Menschen für die Geistesschulung vor allem notwendig ist, das ist Sachlichkeit. In der physischsinnlichen Welt ist das Leben der große Lehrmeister für das menschliche Ich zur Sachlichkeit. Wollte die Seele in beliebiger Weise die Gedanken hin und her schweifen lassen: sie müsste alsbald sich von dem Leben korrigieren lassen, wenn sie mit ihm nicht in Konflikt kommen wollte. Die Seele muss entsprechend dem Verlauf der Tatsachen des Lebens denken. Wenn nun der Mensch die Aufmerksamkeit von der physisch-sinnlichen Welt ablenkt, so fehlt ihm die Zwangskorrektur der letzteren. Ist dann sein Denken nicht imstande, sein eigener Korrektor zu sein, so muss es ins Irrlichtelierende kommen. Deshalb muss das Denken des Geistesschülers sich so üben, dass es sich selber Richtung und Ziel geben kann. Innere Festigkeit und die Fähigkeit, streng bei einem Gegenstande zu bleiben, das ist, was das Denken in sich selbst heranziehen muss. Deshalb sollen entsprechende «Denkübungen» nicht an fernliegenden und komplizierten Gegenständen vorgenommen werden, sondern an einfachen und naheliegenden. Wer sich überwindet, durch Monate hindurch täglich wenigstens fünf Minuten seine Gedanken an einen alltäglichen Gegenstand (zum Beispiel eine Stecknadel, einen Bleistift usw.) zu wenden und während dieser Zeit alle Gedanken auszuschließen, welche nicht mit diesem Gegenstande zusammenhängen, der hat nach dieser Richtung hin viel getan. (Man kann täglich einen neuen Gegenstand bedenken oder mehrere Tage einen festhalten.) Auch derjenige, welcher sich als «Denker» durch wissenschaftliche Schulung fühlt, sollte es nicht verschmähen, sich in solcher Art für die Geistesschulung «reif» zu machen. Denn wenn man eine Zeitlang die Gedanken heftet an etwas, was einem ganz bekannt ist, so kann man sicher sein, dass man sachgemäß denkt. Wer sich frägt: Welche Bestandteile setzen einen Bleistift zusammen? Wie werden die Materialien zu dem Bleistift vorgearbeitet? Wie werden sie nachher zusammengefügt? Wann wurden die Bleistifte erfunden? und so weiter, und so weiter: ein solcher passt seine Vorstellungen sicher mehr der Wirklichkeit an als derjenige, der darüber nachdenkt, wie die Abstammung des Menschen ist oder was das Leben ist. Man lernt durch einfache Denkübungen für ein sachgemäßes Vorstellen gegenüber der Welt der Saturn-, Sonnenund Mondenentwicklung mehr als durch komplizierte und gelehrte Ideen. Denn zunächst handelt es sich gar nicht darum, über dieses oder jenes zu denken, sondern sachgemäß durch innere Kraft zu denken. Hat man sich die Sachgemäßheit anerzogen an einem leicht überschaubaren sinnlich-physischen Vorgang, dann gewöhnt sich das Denken daran, auch sachgemäß sein zu wollen, wenn es sich nicht durch die physischsinnliche Welt und ihre Gesetze beherrscht fühlt. Und man gewöhnt es sich ab, unsachgemäß die Gedanken schwärmen zu lassen.
[ 25 ] Wie Herrscher in der Gedankenwelt, so soll ein solcher die Seele auch im Gebiete des Willens werden. In der physisch-sinnlichen Welt ist es auch hier das Leben, das als Beherrscher auftritt. Es macht diese oder jene Bedürfnisse für den Menschen geltend; und der Wille fühlt sich angeregt, diese Bedürfnisse zu befriedigen. Für die höhere Schulung muss sich der Mensch daran gewöhnen, seinen eigenen Befehlen streng zu gehorchen. Wer sich an solches gewöhnt, dem wird es immer weniger und weniger beifallen, Wesenloses zu begehren. Das Unbefriedigende, Haltlose im Willensleben rührt aber von dem Begehren solcher Dinge her, von deren Verwirklichung man sich keinen deutlichen Begriff macht. Solche Unbefriedigend kann das ganze Gemütsleben in Unordnung bringen, wenn ein höheres Ich aus der Seele hervorgehen will. Eine gute Übung ist es, durch Monate hindurch sich zu einer bestimmten Tageszeit den Befehl zu geben: Heute «um diese bestimmte Zeit» wirst du «dieses» ausführen. Man gelangt dann allmählich dazu, sich die Zeit der Ausführung und die Art des auszuführenden Dinges so zu befehlen, dass die Ausführung ganz genau möglich ist. So erhebt man sich über das verderbliche: «ich möchte dies; ich will jenes», wobei man gar nicht an die Ausführbarkeit denkt. Eine große Persönlichkeit lässt eine Seherin sagen: «Den lieb' ich, der Unmögliches begehrt». (Goethe, Faust II.) Und diese Persönlichkeit (Goethe) selbst sagt: «In der Idee leben heißt, das Unmögliche behandeln, als wenn es möglich wäre». (Goethe, Sprüche in Prosa.) Solche Aussprüche dürfen aber nicht als Einwände gegen das hier Dargestellte gebraucht werden. Denn die Forderung, die Goethe und seine Seherin (Manko) stellen, kann nur derjenige erfüllen, welcher sich an dem Begehren dessen, was möglich ist, erst herangebildet hat, um dann durch sein starkes Wollen eben das «Unmögliche» so behandeln zu können, dass es sich durch sein Wollen in ein Mögliches verwandelt.
[ 26 ] In bezug auf die Gefühlswelt soll es die Seele für die Geistesschulung zu einer gewissen Gelassenheit bringen. Dazu ist nötig, dass diese Seele Beherrscherin werde über den Ausdruck von Lust und Leid, Freude und Schmerz. Gerade gegenüber der Erwerbung dieser Eigenschaft kann sich manches Vorurteil ergeben. Man könnte meinen, man werde stumpf und teilnahmslos gegenüber seiner Mitwelt, wenn man über das «Erfreuliche sich nicht erfreuen, über das Schmerzhafte nicht Schmerz empfinden soll». Doch darum handelt es sich nicht. Ein Erfreuliches soll die Seele erfreuen, ein Trauriges soll sie schmerzen. Sie soll nur dazu gelangen, den Ausdruck von Freude und Schmerz, von Lust und Unlust zu beherrschen. Strebt man dieses an, so wird man alsbald bemerken, dass man nicht stumpfer, sondern im Gegenteil empfänglicher wird für alles Erfreuliche und Schmerzhafte der Umgebung, als man früher war. Es erfordert allerdings ein genaues Achtgeben auf sich selbst durch längere Zeit, wenn man sich die Eigenschaft aneignen will, um die es sich hier handelt. Man muss darauf sehen, dass man Lust und Leid voll miterleben kann, ohne sich dabei so zu verlieren, dass man dem, was man empfindet, einen unwillkürlichen Ausdruck gibt. Nicht den berechtigten Schmerz soll man unterdrücken, sondern das unwillkürliche Weinen; nicht den Abscheu vor einer schlechten Handlung, sondern das blinde Wüten des Zorns; nicht das Achten auf eine Gefahr, sondern das fruchtlose «sich fürchten» und so weiter. — Nur durch eine solche Übung gelangt der Geistesschüler dazu, jene Ruhe in seinem Gemüt zu haben, welche notwendig ist, damit nicht beim Geborenwerden und namentlich bei der Betätigung des höheren Ich die Seele wie eine Art Doppelgänger neben diesem höheren Ich ein zweites ungesundes Leben führt. Gerade diesen Dingen gegenüber sollte man sich keiner Selbsttäuschung hingeben. Es kann manchem scheinen, dass er einen gewissen Gleichmut im gewöhnlichen Leben schon habe und dass er deshalb diese Übung nicht nötig habe. Gerade ein solcher hat sie zweifach nötig. Man kann nämlich ganz gut gelassen sein, wenn man den Dingen des gewöhnlichen Lebens gegenübersteht; und dann beim Aufsteigen in eine höhere Welt kann sich um so mehr die Gleichgewichtslosigkeit, die nur zurückgedrängt war, geltend machen. Es muss durchaus erkannt werden, dass zur Geistesschulung es weniger darauf ankommt, was man vorher zu haben scheint, als vielmehr darauf, dass man ganz gesetzmäßig übt, was man braucht. So widerspruchsvoll dieser Satz auch aussieht: er ist richtig. Hat einem auch das Leben dies oder jenes anerzogen: zur Geistesschulung dienen die Eigenschaften, welche man sich selbst anerzogen hat. Hat einem das Leben Erregtheit beigebracht, so sollte man sich die Erregtheit aberziehen; hat einem aber das Leben Gleichmut beigebracht, so sollte man sich durch Selbsterziehung so aufrütteln, dass der Ausdruck der Seele dem empfangenen Eindruck entspricht. Wer über nichts lachen kann, beherrscht sein Leben ebensowenig wie derjenige, welcher, ohne sich zu beherrschen, fortwährend zum Lachen gereizt wird.
[ 27 ] Für das Denken und Fühlen ist ein weiteres Bildungsmittel die Erwerbung der Eigenschaft, welche man Positivität nennen kann. Es gibt eine schöne Legende, die besagt von dem Christus Jesus, dass er mit einigen andern Personen an einem toten Hund vorübergeht. Die andern wenden sich ab von dem hässlichen Anblick. Der Christus Jesus spricht bewundernd von den schönen Zähnen des Tieres. Man kann sich darin üben, gegenüber der Welt eine solche Seelenverfassung zu erhalten, wie sie im Sinne dieser Legende ist. Das Irrtümliche, Schlechte, Hässliche soll die Seele nicht abhalten, das Wahre, Gute und Schöne überall zu finden, wo es vorhanden ist. Nicht verwechseln soll man diese Positivität mit Kritiklosigkeit, mit dem willkürlichen Verschließen der Augen gegenüber dem Schlechten, Falschen und Minderwertigen. Wer die «schönen Zähne» eines toten Tieres bewundert, der sieht auch den verwesenden Leichnam. Aber dieser Leichnam hält ihn nicht davon ab, die schönen Zähne zu sehen. Man kann das Schlechte nicht gut, den Irrtum nicht wahr finden; aber man kann es dahin bringen, dass man durch das Schlechte nicht abgehalten werde, das Gute, durch den Irrtum nicht, das Wahre zu sehen.
[ 28 ] Das Denken in Verbindung mit dem Willen erfährt eine gewisse Reifung, wenn man versucht, sich niemals durch etwas, was man erlebt oder erfahren hat, die unbefangene Empfänglichkeit für neue Erlebnisse rauben zu lassen. Für den Geistesschüler soll der Gedanke seine Bedeutung ganz verlieren: «Das habe ich noch nie gehört, das glaube ich nicht.» Er soll während einer gewissen Zeit geradezu überall darauf ausgehen, sich bei jeder Gelegenheit von einem jeglichen Dinge und Wesen Neues sagen zu lassen. Von jedem Luftzug, von jedem Baumblatt, von jeglichem Lallen eines Kindes kann man lernen, wenn man bereit ist, einen Gesichtspunkt in Anwendung zu bringen, den man bisher nicht in Anwendung gebracht hat. Es wird allerdings leicht möglich sein, in bezug auf eine solche Fähigkeit zu weit zu gehen. Man soll ja nicht etwa in einem gewissen Lebensalter die Erfahrungen, die man über die Dinge gemacht hat, außer acht lassen. Man soll, was man in der Gegenwart erlebt, nach den Erfahrungen der Vergangenheit beurteilen. Das kommt auf die eine Waagschale; auf die andere aber muss für den Geistesschüler die Geneigtheit kommen, immer Neues zu erfahren. Und vor allem der Glaube an die Möglichkeit, dass neue Erlebnisse den alten widersprechen können.
[ 29 ] Damit sind fünf Eigenschaften der Seele genannt, welche sich in regelrechter Schulung der Geistesschüler anzueignen hat: die Herrschaft über die Gedankenführung, die Herrschaft über die Willensimpulse, die Gelassenheit gegenüber Lust und Leid, die Positivität im Beurteilen der Welt, die Unbefangenheit in der Auffassung des Lebens. Wer gewisse Zeiten aufeinanderfolgend dazu verwendet hat, um sich in der Erwerbung dieser Eigenschaften zu üben, der wird dann noch nötig haben, in der Seele diese Eigenschaften zum harmonischen Zusammenstimmen zu bringen. Er wird sie gewissermaßen je zwei und zwei, drei und eine und so weiter gleichzeitig üben müssen, um Harmonie zu bewirken.
[ 30 ] Die charakterisierten Übungen sind durch die Methoden der Geistesschulung angegeben, weil sie bei gründlicher Ausführung in dem Geistesschüler nicht nur das bewirken, was oben als unmittelbares Ergebnis genannt worden ist, sondern mittelbar noch vieles andere im Gefolge haben, was auf dem Wege zu den geistigen Welten gebraucht wird. Wer diese Übungen in genügendem Maße macht, wird während derselben auf manche Mängel und Fehler seines Seelenlebens stoßen; und er wird die gerade ihm notwendigen Mittel finden zur Kräftigung und Sicherung seines intellektuellen, gefühlsmäßigen und Charakterlebens. Er wird gewiss noch manche andere Übungen nötig haben, je nach seinen Fähigkeiten, seinem Temperament und Charakter; solche ergeben sich aber, wenn die genannten ausgiebig durchgemacht werden. Ja, man wird bemerken, dass die dargestellten Übungen mittelbar auch dasjenige nach und nach geben, was zunächst nicht in ihnen zu liegen scheint. Wenn zum Beispiel jemand zu wenig Selbstvertrauen hat, so wird er nach entsprechender Zeit bemerken können, dass sich durch die Übungen das notwendige Selbstvertrauen einstellt. Und so ist es in bezug auf andere Seeleneigenschaften. (Besondere, mehr ins einzelne gehende Übungen findet man in meinem Buche: «Wie erlangt man Erkenntnisse der höheren Welten?») — Bedeutungsvoll ist, dass der Geistesschüler. die angegebenen Fähigkeiten in immer höheren Graden zu steigern vermag. Die Beherrschung der Gedanken und Empfindungen muss er so weit bringen, dass die Seele die Macht erhält, Zeiten vollkommener innerer Ruhe herzustellen, in denen der Mensch seinem Geiste und seinem Herzen alles fernhält, was das alltägliche, äußere Leben an Glück und Leid, an Befriedigungen und Kümmernissen, ja an Aufgaben und Forderungen bringt. Eingelassen werden soll in solchen Zeiten nur dasjenige in die Seele, was diese selbst im Zustande der Versenkung einlassen will. Leicht kann sich demgegenüber ein Vorurteil geltend machen. Es könnte die Meinung entstehen, man werde dem Leben und seinen Aufgaben entfremdet, wenn man sich mit Herz und Geist für gewisse Zeiten des Tages aus demselben zurückzieht. Das ist aber in Wirklichkeit durchaus nicht der Fall. Wer sich in der geschilderten Art Perioden der inneren Stille und des Friedens hingibt, dem wachsen aus denselben für die Aufgaben auch des äußeren Lebens so viele und so starke Kräfte zu, dass er die Lebenspflichten dadurch nicht nur nicht schlechter, sondern ganz gewiss besser erfüllt. — Von großem Werte ist es, wenn der Mensch in solchen Perioden ganz loskommt von den Gedanken an seine persönlichen Angelegenheiten, wenn er sich zu erheben vermag zu dem, was nicht nur ihn, sondern was den Menschen im allgemeinen überhaupt angeht. Ist er imstande, seine Seele zu erfüllen mit den Mitteilungen aus der höheren geistigen Welt, vermögen diese sein Interesse in einem so hohen Grade zu fesseln, wie eine persönliche Sorge oder Angelegenheit, dann wird seine Seele davon besondere Früchte haben. — Wer in dieser Weise regelnd in sein Seelenleben einzugreifen sich bemüht, der wird auch zu der Möglichkeit einer Selbstbeobachtung kommen, welche die eigenen Angelegenheiten mit der Ruhe ansieht, als wenn sie fremde wären. Die eigenen Erlebnisse, die eigenen Freuden und Leiden wie die eines andern ansehen können, ist eine gute Vorbereitung für die Geistesschulung. Man bringt es allmählich zu dem in dieser Beziehung notwendigen Grad, wenn man sich täglich nach vollbrachtem Tagewerk die Bilder der täglichen Erlebnisse vor dem Geiste vorbeiziehen lässt. Man soll sich innerhalb seiner Erlebnisse selbst im Bilde erblicken; also sich in seinem Tagesleben wie von außen betrachten. Man gelangt zu einer gewissen Praxis in solcher Selbstbeobachtung, wenn man mit der Vorstellung einzelner kleiner Teile dieses Tageslebens den Anfang macht. Man wird dann immer geschickter und gewandter in solcher Rückschau, so dass man sie nach längerer Übung in einer kurzen Spanne Zeit vollständig wird gestalten können. Dieses Rückwärts-Anschauen der Erlebnisse hat für die Geistesschulung deshalb seinen besonderen Wert, weil es die Seele dazu bringt, sich im Vorstellen loszumachen von der sonst innegehaltenen Gewohnheit, nur dem Verlauf des sinnenfälligen Geschehens mit dem Denken zu folgen. Im Rückwärts-Denken stellt man richtig vor, aber nicht gehalten durch den sinnenfälligen Verlauf. Das braucht man zum Einleben in die übersinnliche Welt. Daran erkraftet sich das Vorstellen in gesunder Art. Daher ist es auch gut, außer seinem Tagesleben anderes rückwärts vorzustellen, zum Beispiel den Verlauf eines Dramas, einer Erzählung, einer Tonfolge usw. — Das Ideal für den Geistesschüler wird immer mehr werden, sich den an ihn herantretenden Lebensereignissen gegenüber so zu verhalten, dass er sie mit innerer Sicherheit und Seelenruhe an sich herankommen lässt und sie nicht nach seiner Seelenverfassung beurteilt, sondern nach ihrer inneren Bedeutung und ihrem inneren Wert. Er wird gerade durch den Hinblick auf dieses Ideal sich die seelische Grundlage schaffen, um sich den oben geschilderten Versenkungen in symbolische und andere Gedanken und Empfindungen hingeben zu können.
[ 31 ] Die hier geschilderten Bedingungen müssen erfüllt sein, weil sich das übersinnliche Erleben auf dem Boden auferbaut, auf dem man im gewöhnlichen Seelenleben steht, bevor man in die übersinnliche Welt eintritt. In zweifacher Art ist alles übersinnliche Erleben abhängig von dem Seelen-Ausgangspunkt, auf dem man vor dem Eintritte steht. Wer nicht darauf bedacht ist, von vornherein eine gesunde Urteilskraft zur Grundlage seiner Geistesschulung zu machen, der wird in sich solche übersinnliche Fähigkeiten entwickeln, welche ungenau und unrichtig die geistige Welt wahrnehmen. Es werden gewissermaßen seine geistigen Wahmehmungsorgane unrichtig sich entfalten. Und wie man mit einem fehlerhaften oder kranken Auge nicht richtig in der Sinnenwelt sehen kann, so kann man mit Geistorganen nicht richtig wahrnehmen, die nicht auf der Grundlage einer gesunden Urteilsfähigkeit herangebildet sind. — Wer von einer unmoralischen Seelenverfassung den Ausgangspunkt nimmt, der erhebt sich so in die geistigen Welten, dass sein geistiges Schauen wie betäubt, wie umnebelt ist. Er ist gegenüber den übersinnlichen Welten, wie jemand gegenüber der sinnlichen Welt ist, der in Betäubung beobachtet. Nur wird dieser zu keinen erheblichen Aussagen kommen, während der geistige Beobachter in seiner Betäubung doch immerhin wacher ist als ein Mensch im gewöhnlichen Bewusstsein. Seine Aussagen werden deshalb zu Irrtümern gegenüber der geistigen Welt.
[ 32 ] Die innere Gediegenheit der imaginativen Erkenntnisstufe wird dadurch erreicht, dass die dargestellten seelischen Versenkungen (Meditationen) unterstützt werden von dem, was man die Gewöhnung an «sinnlichkeitsfreies Denken» nennen kann. Wenn man sich einen Gedanken auf Grund der Beobachtung in der physisch-sinnlichen Welt macht, so ist dieser Gedanke nicht sinnlichkeitsfrei. Aber es ist nicht etwa so, dass der Mensch nur solche Gedanken bilden könne. Das menschliche Denken braucht nicht leer und inhaltlos zu werden, wenn es sich nicht von sinnlichen Beobachtungen erfüllen lässt. Der sicherste und nächstliegende Weg für den Geistesschüler, zu solchem sinnlichkeitsfreien Denken zu kommen, kann der sein, die ihm von der Geisteswissenschaft mitgeteilten Tatsachen der höheren Welt zum Eigentum seines Denkens zu machen. Diese Tatsachen können von den physischen Sinnen nicht beobachtet werden. Dennoch wird der Mensch bemerken, dass er sie begreifen kann, wenn er nur Geduld und Ausdauer genug hat. Man kann ohne Schulung nicht in der höheren Welt forschen, man kann darin nicht selbst Beobachtungen machen; aber man kann ohne die höhere Schulung alles verstehen, was die Forscher aus derselben mitteilen. Und wenn jemand sagt: Wie kann ich dasjenige auf Treu und Glauben hinnehmen, was die Geistesforscher sagen, da ich es doch nicht selbst sehen kann? so ist dies völlig unbegründet. Denn es ist durchaus möglich, aus dem bloßen Nachdenken heraus die sichere Überzeugung zu erhalten: das Mitgeteilte ist wahr. Und wenn diese Überzeugung sich jemand durch Nachdenken nicht bilden kann, so rührt das nicht davon her, weil man unmöglich an etwas «glauben» könne, was man nicht sieht, sondern lediglich davon, dass man sein Nachdenken noch nicht vorurteilslos, umfassend, gründlich genug angewendet hat. Um in diesem Punkte Klarheit zu haben, muss man bedenken, dass das menschliche Denken, wenn es sich energisch innerlich aufrafft, mehr begreifen kann, als es in der Regel wähnt. In dem Gedanken selbst liegt nämlich schon eine innere Wesenheit, welche im Zusammenhang steht mit der übersinnlichen Welt. Die Seele ist sich gewöhnlich dieses Zusammenhanges nicht bewusst, weil sie gewöhnt ist, die Gedankenfähigkeit nur an der Sinnenwelt heranzuziehen. Sie hält deshalb für unbegreiflich, was ihr aus der übersinnlichen Welt mitgeteilt wird. Dies ist aber nicht nur begreiflich für ein durch Geistesschulung erzogenes Denken, sondern für jedes Denken, das sich seiner vollen Kraft bewusst ist und sich derselben bedienen will. — Dadurch, dass man sich unablässig zum Eigentum macht, was die Geistesforschung sagt, gewöhnt man sich an ein Denken, das nicht aus den sinnlichen Beobachtungen schöpft. Man lernt erkennen, wie im Innern der Seele Gedanke sich an Gedanke webt, wie Gedanke den Gedanken sucht, auch wenn die Gedankenverbindungen nicht durch die Macht der Sinnenbeobachtung bewirkt werden. Das Wesentliche dabei ist, dass man so gewahr wird, wie die Gedankenwelt inneres Leben hat, wie man sich, indem man wirklich denkt, im Bereiche einer übersinnlichen lebendigen Welt schon befindet.
[ 33 ] Man sagt sich: Es ist etwas in mir, was einen GedankenOrganismus ausbildet; aber ich bin doch eines mit diesem «Etwas». Man erlebt so in der Hingabe an sinnlichkeitsfreies Denken, dass etwas Wesenhaftes besteht, was einfließt in unser Innenleben, wie die Eigenschaften der Sinnendinge durch unsere physischen Organe in uns einfließen, wenn wir sinnlich beobachten. Da draußen im Raume — so sagt sich der Beobachter der Sinnenwelt — ist eine Rose; sie ist mir nicht fremd, denn sie kündigt sich mir durch ihre Farbe und ihren Geruch an. Man braucht nun nur genug vorurteilslos zu sein, um sich dann, wenn das sinnlichkeitsfreie Denken in einem arbeitet, ganz entsprechend zu sagen: es kündigt sich mir ein Wesenhaftes an, welches in mir Gedanken an Gedanken bindet, welches einen Gedankenorganismus formt. Es besteht aber ein Unterschied in den Empfindungen gegenüber dem, was der Beobachter der äußeren Sinnenwelt im Auge hat, und dem, was sich wesenhaft in dem sinnlichkeitsfreien Denken ankündigt. Der erste Beobachter fühlt sich der Rose gegenüber außenstehend, derjenige, welcher dem sinnlichkeitsfreien Denken hingegeben ist, fühlt das in ihm sich ankündigende Wesenhafte wie in sich, er fühlt sich mit ihm eins. Wer mehr oder weniger bewusst nur das als wesenhaft gelten lassen will, was ihm wie ein äußerer Gegenstand gegenübertritt, der wird allerdings nicht das Gefühl erhalten können: was ein Wesenhaftes für sich ist, das kann sich mir auch dadurch ankündigen, dass ich mit ihm wie in eins vereinigt bin. Um in dieser Beziehung richtig zu sehen, muss man folgendes innere Erlebnis haben können. Man muss unterscheiden lernen zwischen den Gedankenverbindungen, die man durch eigene Willkür schafft, und denjenigen, welche man in sich erlebt, wenn man solche eigene Willkür in sich schweigen lässt. In dem letzteren Falle kann man dann sagen: Ich bleibe in mir ganz still; ich führe keine Gedankenverbindungen herbei; ich gebe mich dem hin, was «in mir denkt». Dann ist es vollberechtigt, zu sagen: in mir wirkt ein für sich Wesenhaftes, wie es berechtigt ist zu sagen: auf mich wirkt die Rose, wenn ich ein bestimmtes Rot sehe, einen bestimmten Geruch wahrnehme. — Es ist dabei kein Widerspruch, dass man doch den Inhalt seiner Gedanken aus den Mitteilungen der Geistesforscher schöpft. Die Gedanken sind dann zwar bereits da, wenn man sich ihnen hingibt; aber man kann sie nicht denken, wenn man sie nicht in jedem Falle in der Seele wieder neu nachschafft. Darauf eben kommt es an, dass der Geistesforscher solche Gedanken in seinem Zuhörer und Leser wachruft, welche diese aus sich erst holen müssen, während derjenige, welcher Sinnlich-Wirkliches beschreibt, auf etwas hindeutet, was von Zuhörer und Leser in der Sinnenwelt beobachtet werden kann.
[ 34 ] (Es ist der Weg, welcher durch die Mitteilungen der Geisteswissenschaft in das sinnlichkeitsfreie Denken führt, ein durchaus sicherer. Es gibt aber noch einen andern, welcher sicherer und vor allem genauer, dafür aber auch für viele Menschen schwieriger ist. Er ist in meinen Büchern «Erkenntnistheorie der Goetheschen Weltanschauung» und «Philosophie der Freiheit» dargestellt. Diese Schriften geben wieder, was der menschliche Gedanke sich erarbeiten kann, wenn das Denken sich nicht den Eindrücken der physisch-sinnlichen Außenwelt hingibt, sondern nur sich selbst. Es arbeitet dann das reine Denken, nicht das bloß in Erinnerungen an Sinnliches sich ergehende in dem Menschen, wie eine in sich lebendige Wesenheit. Dabei ist in den genannten Schriften nichts aufgenommen aus den Mitteilungen der Geisteswissenschaft selbst. Und doch ist gezeigt, dass das reine, nur in sich arbeitende Denken Aufschlüsse gewinnen kann über die Welt, das Leben und den Menschen. Es stehen diese Schriften auf einer sehr wichtigen Zwischenstufe zwischen dem Erkennen der Sinnenwelt und dem der geistigen Welt. Sie bieten dasjenige, was das Denken gewinnen kann, wenn es sich erhebt über die sinnliche Beobachtung, aber noch den Eingang vermeidet in die Geistesforschung. Wer diese Schriften auf seine ganze Seele wirken lässt, der steht schon in der geistigen Welt; nur dass sich diese ihm als Gedankenwelt gibt. Wer sich in der Lage fühlt, solch eine Zwischenstufe auf sich wirken zu lassen, der geht einen sicheren Weg; und er kann sich dadurch ein Gefühl gegenüber der höheren Welt erringen, das für alle Folgezeit ihm die schönsten Früchte tragen wird.)
[ 35 ] Das Ziel der Versenkung (Meditation) in die oben charakterisierten symbolischen Vorstellungen und Empfindungen ist, genau gesprochen, die Heranbildung der höheren Wahrnehmungsorgane innerhalb des astralischen Leibes des Menschen. Sie werden aus der Substanz dieses astralischen Leibes heraus zunächst geschaffen. Diese neuen Beobachtungsorgane vermitteln eine neue Welt, und in dieser neuen Welt lernt sich der Mensch als ein neues Ich kennen. Von den Beobachtungsorganen der sinnlich-physischen Welt unterscheiden sich jene neuen schon dadurch, dass sie tätige Organe sind. Während Auge und Ohr sich passiv verhalten und Licht und Ton auf sich wirken lassen, kann von den geistig-seelischen Wahrnehmungsorganen gesagt werden, dass sie in fortwährender Tätigkeit sind, während sie wahrnehmen, und dass sie ihre Gegenstände und Tatsachen gewissermaßen in vollem Bewusstsein ergreifen. Dadurch ergibt sich das Gefühl, dass geistig-seelisches Erkennen ein Vereinigen mit den entsprechenden Tatsachen ist, ein «in ihnen leben». — Man kann die einzelnen sich bildenden geistigseelischen Organe vergleichsweise «Lotusblumen» nennen, entsprechend der Form, die sich das übersinnliche Bewusstsein von ihnen (imaginativ) machen muss. (Selbstverständlich muss man sich klar sein darüber, dass solche Bezeichnung mit der Sache nicht mehr zu tun hat als der Ausdruck «Flügel», wenn man von «Lungenflügeln» spricht.) Durch ganz bestimmte Arten von innerer Versenkung wird auf den Astralleib so gewirkt, dass sich das eine oder andere geistig-seelische Organ, die eine oder die andere «Lotusblume» bildet. Es sollte, nach allem in diesem Buche Ausgeführten, überflüssig sein, zu betonen, dass man sich diese «Beobachtungsorgane» nicht wie etwas vorzustellen hat, das in der Vorstellung seines sinnlichen Bildes ein Abdruck seiner Wirklichkeit ist. Diese «Organe» sind eben übersinnlich und bestehen in einer bestimmt geformten Seelenbetätigung; und sie bestehen nur insofern und so lange, als diese Seelenbetätigung geübt wird. Etwas, was sich als Sinnenfälliges anschauen lässt, ist mit diesen Organen so wenig am Menschen, als irgendein «Dunst» um ihn ist, wenn er denkt. Wer sich das Übersinnliche durchaus sinnlich vorstellen will, gerät eben in Missverständnisse. Trotz des Überflüssigen dieser Bemerkung mag sie hier stehen, weil es immer wieder Bekenner des Übersinnlichen gibt, die in ihren Vorstellungen nur ein Sinnliches haben wollen; und weil es immer wieder Gegner der übersinnlichen Erkenntnis gibt, die glauben, der Geistesforscher spreche von «Lotusblumen» wie von feineren sinnfälligen Gebilden. Jede regelrechte Meditation, die im Hinblick auf die imaginative Erkenntnis gemacht wird, hat ihre Wirkung auf das eine oder das andere Organ. (In meinem Buche «Wie erlangt man Erkenntnisse der höheren Welten?» sind einzelne von den Methoden der Meditation und des Übens angegeben, welche auf das eine oder andere Organ wirken.) Eine regelrechte Schulung richtet die einzelnen Übungen des Geistesschülers so ein und lässt sie so aufeinander folgen, dass die Organe sich einzeln mitoder nacheinander entsprechend ausbilden können. Zu dieser Ausbildung gehört bei dem Geistesschüler viel Geduld und Ausdauer. Wer nur ein solches Maß von Geduld hat, wie es die gewöhnlichen Lebensverhältnisse dem Menschen in der Regel geben, der wird damit nicht ausreichen. Denn es dauert lange, oft sehr, sehr lange, bis die Organe so weit sind, dass der Geistesschüler sie zu Wahrnehmungen in der höheren Welt gebrauchen kann. In diesem Momente tritt für ihn das ein, was man Erleuchtung nennt, im Gegensatz zur Vorbereitung oder Reinigung, die in den Übungen für die Ausbildung der Organe besteht. (Von «Reinigung» wird gesprochen, weil durch die entsprechenden Übungen sich der Schüler von all dem für ein gewisses Gebiet inneren Lebens reinigt, was nur aus der sinnlichen Beobachtungswelt kommt.) Es kann durchaus so kommen, dass dem Menschen auch vor der eigentlichen Erleuchtung wiederholt «Lichtblitze» kommen aus einer höheren Welt. Solche soll er dankbar hinnehmen. Sie schon können ihn zu einem Zeugen von der geistigen Welt machen. Aber er sollte auch nicht wanken, wenn dies während seiner Vorbereitungszeit gar nicht der Fall ist, die ihm vielleicht allzu lang erscheint. Wer überhaupt in Ungeduld verfallen kann, «weil er noch nichts sieht», der hat noch nicht das rechte Verhältnis zu einer höheren Welt gewonnen. Das letztere hat nur derjenige erfasst, dem die Übungen, die er durch die Schulung macht, etwas wie Selbstzweck sein können. Dieses Üben ist ja in Wahrheit das Arbeiten an einem Geistig-Seelischen, nämlich an dem eigenen Astralleibe. Und man kann «fühlen», auch wenn «man nichts sieht»: «Ich arbeite geistig-seelisch». Nur wenn man sich von vornherein eine bestimmte Meinung macht, was man eigentlich «sehen» will, dann wird man dieses Gefühl nicht haben. Dann wird man für nichts halten, was in Wahrheit etwas unermesslich Bedeutungsvolles ist. Man sollte aber subtil achten auf alles, was man während des Übens erlebt und was so grundverschieden ist von allen Erlebnissen in der sinnlichen Welt. Man wird dann schon bemerken, dass man in seinen Astralleib hinein nicht wie in eine gleichgültige Substanz arbeitet, sondern dass in demselben lebt eine ganz andere Welt, von der man durch das Sinnenleben nichts weiß. Höhere Wesenheiten wirken auf den Astralleib, wie die physisch-sinnliche Außenwelt auf den physischen Leib wirkt. Und man «stößt» auf das höhere Leben in dem eigenen Astralleib, wenn man sich davor nur nicht verschließt. Wenn sich jemand immer wieder und wieder sagt: «ich nehme nichts wahr», dann ist es zumeist so, dass er sich eingebildet hat, diese Wahrnehmung müsse so oder so aussehen; und weil er das dann nicht sieht, wovon er sich einbildet, er müsse es sehen, so sagt er: «ich sehe nichts.»
[ 36 ] Wer sich aber die rechte Gesinnung aneignet gegenüber dem Üben der Schulung, der wird in diesem Üben immer mehr etwas haben, was er um seiner selbst willen liebt. Dann aber weiß er, dass er durch das Üben selbst in einer geistig-seelischen Welt steht, und er wartet in Geduld und Ergebung, was sich weiter ergibt. Es kann diese Gesinnung in dem Geistesschüler in folgenden Worten am besten zum Bewusstsein kommen: «Ich will alles tun, was mir als Übungen angemessen ist, und ich weiß, dass mir in der entsprechenden Zeit so viel zukommen wird, als mir wichtig ist. Ich verlange dies nicht ungeduldig; mache mich aber immer bereit, es zu empfangen.» Dagegen lässt sich auch nicht einwenden: «Der Geistesschüler soll also im Dunkeln tappen, durch eine vielleicht unermesslich lange Zeit; denn dass er mit seinem Üben auf dem richtigen Wege ist, kann sich ihm doch erst zeigen, wenn der Erfolg da ist.» Es ist jedoch nicht so, dass erst der Erfolg die Erkenntnis von der Richtigkeit des Übens bringen kann. Wenn der Schüler richtig sich zu den Übungen stellt, dann gibt ihm die Befriedigung, die er durch das Üben selbst hat, die Klarheit, dass er etwas Richtiges tut, nicht erst der Erfolg. Richtig üben auf dem Gebiete der Geistesschulung verbindet sich eben mit einer Befriedigung, die nicht bloße Befriedigung, sondern Erkenntnis ist. Nämlich die Erkenntnis: ich tue etwas, wovon ich sehe, dass es mich in der richtigen Linie vorwärts bringt. Jeder Geistesschüler kann diese Erkenntnis in jedem Augenblick haben, wenn er nur auf seine Erlebnisse subtil aufmerksam ist. Wenn er diese Aufmerksamkeit nicht anwendet, dann geht er eben an den Erlebnissen vorbei, wie ein in Gedanken versunkener Fußgänger, der die Bäume zu beiden Seiten des Weges nicht sieht, obgleich er sie sehen würde, wenn er den Blick aufmerksam auf sie richtete. — Es ist durchaus nicht wünschenswert, dass das Eintreten eines anderen Erfolges, als derjenige ist, der im Üben sich immer ergibt, beschleunigt werde. Denn es könnte das leicht nur der geringste Teil dessen sein, was eigentlich eintreten sollte. In bezug auf die geistige Entwicklung ist oft ein teilweiser Erfolg der Grund einer starken Verzögerung des vollen Erfolges. Die Bewegung unter solchen Formen des geistigen Lebens, wie sie dem teilweisen Erfolg entsprechen, stumpft ab gegen die Einflüsse der Kräfte, welche zu höheren Punkten der Entwicklung führen. Und der Gewinn, den man dadurch erzielt, dass man doch in die geistige Welt «hineingesehen hat», ist nur ein scheinbarer; denn dieses Hineinschauen kann nicht die Wahrheit, sondern nur Trugbilder liefern.
[ 37 ] Die geistig-seelischen Organe, die Lotusblumen, bilden sich so, dass sie dem übersinnlichen Bewusstsein an dem in Schulung befindlichen Menschen wie in der Nähe bestimmter physischer Körperorgane erscheinen. Aus der Reihe dieser Seelenorgane sollen hier genannt werden: dasjenige, das wie in der Nähe der Augenbrauenmitte erfühlt wird (die sogenannte zweiblättrige Lotusblume), dasjenige in der Gegend des Kehlkopfes (die sechzehnblättrige Lotusblume), das dritte in der Herzgegend (die zwölfblättrige Lotusblume), das vierte in der Gegend der Magengrube. Andere solche Organe erscheinen in der Nähe anderer physischer Körperteile. (Die Namen «zwei-» oder «sechzehnblättrig» können gebraucht werden, weil die betreffenden Organe sich mit Blumen mit entsprechender Blätterzahl vergleichen lassen.
[ 38 ] Die Lotusblumen werden an dem astralischen Leibe bewusst. In dem Zeitpunkte, in dem man die eine oder die andere entwickelt hat, weiß man auch, dass man sie hat. Man fühlt, dass man sich ihrer bedienen kann und dass man durch ihren Gebrauch in eine höhere Welt wirklich eintritt. Die Eindrücke, welche man von dieser Welt erhält, gleichen in mancher Beziehung noch denen der physisch-sinnlichen. Wer imaginativ erkennt, wird von der neuen höheren Welt so sprechen können, dass er die Eindrücke als Wärmeoder Kälteempfindungen, Tonoder Wortwahrnehmungen, Lichtoder Farbenwirkungen bezeichnet. Denn wie solche erlebt er sie. Er ist sich aber bewusst, dass diese Wahrnehmungen in der imaginativen Welt etwas anderes ausdrücken als in der sinnlich-wirklichen. Er erkennt, dass hinter ihnen nicht physisch-stoffliche Ursachen, sondern seelisch-geistige stehen. Wenn er etwas wie einen Wärmeeindruck hat, so schreibt er diesen nicht zum Beispiel einem heißen Stück Eisens zu, sondern er betrachtet ihn als Ausfluss eines seelischen Vorganges, wie er ihn bisher nur in seinem seelischen Innenleben gekannt hat. Er weiß, dass hinter den imaginativen Wahrnehmungen seelische und geistige Dinge und Vorgänge stehen, wie hinter den physischen Wahrnehmungen stofflich-physische Wesen und Tatsachen. — Zu dieser Ähnlichkeit der imaginativen mit der physischen Welt kommt aber ein bedeutsamer Unterschied hinzu. Es ist etwas in der physischen Welt vorhanden, was in der imaginativen ganz anders auftritt. In jener kann beobachtet werden ein fortwährendes Entstehen und Vergehen der Dinge, ein Wechsel von Geburt und Tod. In der imaginativen Welt tritt an Stelle dieser Erscheinung eine fortdauernde Verwandlung des einen in das andere. Man sieht zum Beispiel in der physischen Welt eine Pflanze vergehen. In der imaginativen zeigt sich in demselben Maße, in dem die Pflanze dahinwelkt, das Entstehen eines andern Gebildes, das physisch nicht wahrnehmbar ist und in welches sich die vergehende pflanze allmählich verwandelt. Wenn nun die Pflanze dahingeschwunden ist, so ist dieses Gebilde an ihrer Stelle voll entwickelt da. Geburt und Tod sind Vorstellungen, welche in der imaginativen Welt ihre Bedeutung verlieren. An ihre Stelle tritt der Begriff von Verwandlung des einen in das andere. — Weil dies so ist, deshalb werden für das imaginative Erkennen jene Wahrheiten über die Wesenheit des Menschen zugänglich, welche in diesem Buche in dem Kapitel «Wesen der Menschheit» mitgeteilt worden sind. Für das physisch-sinnliche Wahrnehmen sind nur die Vorgänge des physischen Leibes wahrnehmbar. Sie spielen sich im «Gebiete von Geburt und Tod» ab. Die andern Glieder der Menschennatur: Lebensleib, Empfindungsleib und Ich stehen unter dem Gesetze der Verwandlung, und ihre Wahrnehmung erschließt sich der imaginativen Erkenntnis. Wer bis zu dieser vorgeschritten ist, nimmt wahr, wie sich aus dem physischen Leibe gleichsam herauslöst dasjenige, was mit dem Hinsterben in anderer Daseinsart weiterlebt.
[ 39 ] Die Entwicklung bleibt nun aber innerhalb der imaginativen Welt nicht stehen. Der Mensch, der in ihr stehenbleiben wollte, würde zwar die in Verwandlung begriffenen Wesenheiten wahrnehmen; aber er würde die Verwandlungsvorgänge nicht deuten können, er würde sich nicht orientieren können in der neugewonnenen Welt. Die imaginative Welt ist ein unruhiges Gebiet. Es ist überall nur Beweglichkeit, Verwandlung in ihr; nirgends sind Ruhepunkte. — Zu solchen Ruhepunkten gelangt der Mensch erst, wenn er sich über die imaginative Erkenntnisstufe hinaus zu dem entwickelt, was die «Erkenntnis durch Inspiration» genannt werden kann. — Es ist nicht notwendig, dass derjenige, welcher die Erkenntnis der übersinnlichen Welt sucht, sich etwa so entwickele, dass er zuerst in vollem Maße das imaginative Erkennen sich aneigne und dann erst zur «Inspiration» vorschreite. Seine Übungen können so eingerichtet werden, dass nebeneinander das geht, was zur Imagination, und das, was zur Inspiration führt. Er wird dann, nach entsprechender Zeit, in eine höhere Welt eintreten, in welcher er nicht bloß wahrnimmt, sondern in der er sich auch orientieren kann, die er zu deuten versteht. Der Fortschritt wird in der Regel allerdings so gemacht werden, dass sich zuerst dem Geistesschüler einige Erscheinungen der imaginativen Welt darbieten und nach einiger Zeit er in sich die Empfindung erhält: Jetzt fange ich auch an, mich zu orientieren. — Dennoch ist die Welt der Inspiration etwas ganz Neues gegenüber derjenigen der bloßen Imagination. Durch diese nimmt man die Verwandlung eines Vorganges in den andern wahr, durch jene lernt man innere Eigenschaften von Wesen kennen, welche sich verwandeln. Durch Imagination erkennt man die seelische Äußerung der Wesen; durch Inspiration dringt man in deren geistiges Innere. Man erkennt vor allem eine Vielheit von geistigen Wesenheiten und von Beziehungen des einen auf das andere. Mit einer Vielheit verschiedener Wesen hat man es ja auch in der physischsinnlichen Welt zu tun; in der Welt der Inspiration ist diese Vielheit doch von einem anderen Charakter. Es ist da ein jedes Wesen in ganz bestimmten Beziehungen zu andern, nicht wie in der physischen durch äußere Einwirkung auf dasselbe, sondern durch seine innere Beschaffenheit. Wenn man ein Wesen in der inspirierten Welt wahrnimmt, so zeigt sich nicht eine äußere Einwirkung auf ein anderes, die sich mit der Wirkung eines physischen Wesens auf ein anderes vergleichen ließe, sondern es besteht ein Verhältnis des einen zum andern durch die innere Beschaffenheit der beiden Wesen. Vergleichen lässt sich dieses Verhältnis mit einem solchen in der physischen Welt, wenn man dazu das Verhältnis der einzelnen Laute oder Buchstaben eines Wortes zueinander wählt. Wenn man das Wort «Mensch» vor sich hat, so wird es bewirkt durch den Zusammenklang der Laute: Mensch. Es geht nicht ein Anstoß oder sonst eine äußere Einwirkung zum Beispiel von dem M zu dem E hinüber, sondern beide Laute wirken zusammen, und zwar innerhalb eines Ganzen durch ihre innere Beschaffenheit. Deshalb lässt sich das Beobachten in der Welt der Inspiration nur vergleichen mit einem Lesen; und die Wesen in dieser Welt wirken auf den Betrachter wie Schriftzeichen, die er kennenlernen muss und deren Verhältnisse sich für ihn enthüllen müssen wie eine übersinnliche Schrift. Die Geisteswissenschaft kann daher die Erkenntnis durch Inspiration vergleichsweise auch das «Lesen der verborgenen Schrift» nennen.
[ 40 ] Wie durch diese «verborgene Schrift» gelesen wird und wie man das Gelesene mitteilen kann, soll nun an den vorangegangenen Kapiteln dieses Buches selbst klargemacht werden. Es wurde zunächst die Wesenheit des Menschen b~ schrieben, wie sie sich aufbaut aus verschiedenen Gliedern. Dann wurde gezeigt, wie das Weltwesen, auf dem sich der Mensch entwickelt, durch die verschiedenen Zustände, den Saturn-, Sonnen-, Mondenund Erdenzustand hindurchgeht. Die Wahrnehmungen, durch welche man die Glieder des Menschen einerseits, die aufeinanderfolgenden Zustände der Erde und ihrer vorhergehenden Verwandlungen andererseits erkennen kann, erschließen sich der imaginativen Erkenntnis. Nun ist aber weiter notwendig, dass erkannt werde, welche Beziehungen zwischen dem Saturnzustande und dem physischen Menschenleib, dem Sonnenzustande und dem Ätherleib usw. bestehen. Es muss gezeigt werden, dass der Keim zum physischen Menschenleib schon während des Saturnzustandes entstanden ist, dass er sich dann weiterentwickelt hat bis zu seiner gegenwärtigen Gestalt während des Sonnen-, Mondenund Erdenzustandes. Es musste zum Beispiel auch darauf hingewiesen werden, welche Veränderungen sich mit dem Menschenwesen vollzogen haben dadurch, dass einmal die Sonne sich von der Erde trennte, dass ein Ähnliches bezüglich des Mondes geschah. Es musste ferner mitgeteilt werden, was zusammenwirkte, damit solche Veränderungen mit der Menschheit sich vollziehen konnten, wie sie in den Umwandlungen während der atlantischen Zeit, wie sie in den aufeinanderfolgenden Perioden, der indischen, der urpersischen, der ägyptischen usw., sich ausdrücken. Die Schilderung dieser Zusammenhänge ergibt sich nicht aus der imaginativen Wahrnehmung, sondern aus der Erkenntnis durch Inspiration, aus dem Lesen der verborgenen Schrift. Für dieses «Lesen» sind die imaginativen Wahrnehmungen wie Buchstaben oder Laute. Dieses «Lesen» ist aber nicht nur für Aufklärungen notwendig, wie die eben gekennzeichneten. Schon den Lebensgang des ganzen Menschen könnte man nicht verstehen, wenn man ihn nur durch die imaginative Erkenntnis betrachten würde. Man würde da zwar wahrnehmen, wie sich mit dem Hinsterben die seelisch-geistigen Glieder aus dem in der physischen Welt Verbleibenden loslösen; aber man würde die Beziehungen dessen, was nach dem Tode mit dem Menschen geschieht, zu den vorhergehenden und nachfolgenden Zuständen nicht verstehen, wenn man sich innerhalb des imaginativ Wahrgenommenen nicht orientieren könnte. Ohne die Erkenntnis durch Inspiration verbliebe die imaginative Welt wie eine Schrift, die man anstarrt, die man aber nicht zu lesen vermag.
[ 41 ] Wenn der Geistesschüler fortschreitet von der Imagination zur Inspiration, so zeigt sich ihm sehr bald, wie unrichtig es wäre, auf das Verständnis der großen Welterscheinungen zu verzichten und sich nur auf die Tatsachen beschränken zu wollen, welche gewissermaßen das nächste menschliche Interesse berühren. Wer in diese Dinge nicht eingeweiht ist, der könnte wohl das Folgende sagen: «Mir erscheint es doch nur wichtig, das Schicksal der menschlichen Seele nach dem Tode zu erfahren; wenn mir jemand darüber Mitteilungen macht, so ist mir das genug: wozu führt mir die Geisteswissenschaftlich entlegene Dinge vor, wie Saturn-, Sonnenzustand, Sonnen-, Mondentrennung und so weiter.» Wer aber in diese Dinge richtig eingeführt ist, der lernt erkennen, dass ein wirkliches Wissen über das, was er erfahren will, nie zu erlangen ist ohne eine Erkenntnis dessen, was ihm so unnötig scheint. Eine Schilderung der Menschenzustände nach dem Tode bleibt völlig unverständlich und wertlos, wenn der Mensch sie nicht mit Begriffen verbinden kann, welche von jenen entlegenen Dingen hergenommen sind. Schon die einfachste Beobachtung des übersinnlich Erkennenden macht seine Bekanntschaft mit solchen Dingen notwendig. Wenn zum Beispiel eine Pflanze von dem Blütenzustand in den Fruchtzustand übergeht, so sieht der übersinnlich beobachtende Mensch eine Verwandlung in einer astralischen Wesenheit vor sich gehen, welche während des Blühens die Pflanze wie eine Wolke von oben bedeckt und umhüllt hat. Wäre die Befruchtung nicht eingetreten, so wäre diese astralische Wesenheit in eine ganz andere Gestalt übergegangen, als die ist, welche sie infolge der Befruchtung angenommen hat. Nun versteht man den ganzen durch die übersinnliche Beobachtung wahrgenommenen Vorgang, wenn man sein Wesen verstehen gelernt hat an jenem großen Weltvorgange, welcher sich mit der Erde und allen ihren Bewohnern vollzogen hat zur Zeit der Sonnentrennung. Vor der Befruchtung ist die Pflanze in einer solchen Lage, wie die ganze Erde vor der Sonnentrennung. Nach der Befruchtung zeigt sich die Blüte der Pflanze so, wie die Erde war, als sich die Sonne abgetrennt hatte und die Mondenkräfte noch in ihr waren. Hat man sich die Vorstellungen zu eigen gemacht, welche an der Sonnentrennung gewonnen werden können, so wird man die Deutung des Pflanzen-Befruchtungsvorganges sachgemäß so wahrnehmen, dass man sagt: Die Pflanze ist vor der Befruchtung in einem Sonnenzustand, nach derselben in einem Mondenzustand. Es ist eben durchaus so, dass auch der kleinste Vorgang in der Welt nur dann begriffen werden kann, wenn in ihm ein Abbild großer Weltvorgänge erkannt wird. Sonst bleibt er seinem Wesen nach so unverständlich, wie die Raffaelsche Madonna für denjenigen bleibt, der nur ein kleines blaues Fleckchen sehen kann, während alles andere zugedeckt ist. — Alles, was nun am Menschen vorgeht, ist ein Abbild all der großen Weltvorgänge, die mit seinem Dasein zu tun haben. Will man die Beobachtungen des übersinnlichen Bewusstseins über die Erscheinungen zwischen Geburt und Tod und wieder vom Tode bis zu einer neuen Geburt verstehen, so kann man dies, wenn man sich die Fähigkeit erworben hat, die imaginativen Beobachtungen durch dasjenige zu entziffern, was man sich an Vorstellungen angeeignet hat durch die Betrachtung der großen Weltvorgänge. — Diese Betrachtung liefert eben den Schlüssel zum Verständnisse des menschlichen Lebens. Daher ist im Sinne der Geisteswissenschaft Saturn-, Sonnen-, Mondbeobachtung usw. zugleich Beobachtung des Menschen.
[ 42 ] Durch Inspiration gelangt man dazu, die Beziehungen zwischen den Wesenheiten der höheren Welt zu erkennen. Durch eine weitere Erkenntnisstufe wird es möglich, diese Wesenheiten in ihrem Innern selbst zu erkennen. Diese Erkenntnisstufe kann die intuitive Erkenntnis genannt werden. (Intuition ist ein Wort, das im gewöhnlichen Leben missbraucht wird für eine unklare, unbestimmte Einsicht in eine Sache, für eine Art Einfall, der zuweilen mit der Wahrheit stimmt, dessen Berechtigung aber zunächst nicht nachweisbar ist. Mit dieser Art «Intuition» hat das hier. Gemeinte natürlich nichts zu tun. Intuition bezeichnet hier eine Erkenntnis von höchster, lichtvollster Klarheit, deren Berechtigung man sich, wenn man sie hat, in vollstem Sinne bewusst ist.) — Ein Sinneswesen erkennen, heißt außerhalb desselben stehen und es nach dem äußeren Eindruck beurteilen. Ein Geisteswesen durch Intuition erkennen, heißt völlig eins mit ihm geworden sein, sich mit seinem Innern vereinigt haben. Stufenweise steigt der Geistesschüler zu solcher Erkenntnis hinauf. Die Imagination führt ihn dazu, die Wahrnehmungen nicht mehr als äußere Eigenschaften von Wesen zu empfinden, sondern in ihnen Ausflüsse von SeelischGeistigem zu erkennen; die Inspiration führt ihn weiter in das Innere der Wesen: Er lernt durch sie verstehen, was diese Wesenheiten für einander sind; in der Intuition dringt er in die Wesen selbst ein. — Wieder kann an den Ausführungen dieses Buches selbst gezeigt werden, was für eine Bedeutung die Intuition hat. Es wurde in den vorhergehenden Kapiteln nicht nur davon gesprochen, wie der Fortgang der Saturn-, Sonnen-, Mondenentwicklung usw. geschieht, sondern es wurde mitgeteilt, dass Wesen sich an diesem Fortgange in der verschiedensten Art beteiligen. Es wurden Throne oder Geister des Willens, Geister der Weisheit, der Bewegung usw. angeführt. Es wurde bei der Erdenentwicklung von den Geistern des Luzifer, des Ahriman gesprochen. Der Weltenbau wurde auf die Wesenheiten zurückgeführt, welche sich an ihm beteiligen. Was über diese Wesenheiten erfahren werden kann, wird durch die intuitive Erkenntnis gewonnen. Diese ist auch schon notwendig, wenn man den Lebenslauf des Menschen erkennen will. Was sich nach dem Tode aus der physischen Leiblichkeit des Menschen herauslöst, das macht nun in der Folgezeit verschiedene Zustände durch. Die nächsten Zustände nach dem Tode wären noch einigermaßen durch die imaginative Erkenntnis zu beschreiben. Was aber dann vorgeht, wenn der Mensch weiter kommt in der Zeit zwischen dem Tode und einer neuen Geburt, das müsste der Imagination ganz unverständlich bleiben, wenn nicht die Inspiration hinzukäme. Nur die Inspiration kann erforschen, was von dem Leben des Menschen nach der Läuterung im «Geisterland» gesagt werden kann. Dann aber kommt ein Etwas, für welches die Inspiration nicht mehr ausreicht, wo sie gewissermaßen den Faden des Verständnisses verliert. Es gibt eine Zeit der menschlichen Entwicklung zwischen dem Tode und einer neuen Geburt, wo das menschliche Wesen nur der Intuition zugänglich ist. — Dieser Teil der menschlichen Wesenheit ist aber immer in dem Menschen; und will man ihn, seiner wahren Innerlichkeit nach, verstehen, so muss man ihn auch in der Zeit zwischen der Geburt und dem Tode durch die Intuition aufsuchen. Wer den Menschen nur mit den Mitteln der Imagination und Inspiration erkennen wollte, dem entzögen sich gerade die Vorgänge des innersten Wesens desselben, die von Verkörperung zu Verkörperung sich abspielen. Nur die intuitive Erkenntnis macht daher eine sachgemäße Erforschung von den wiederholten Erdenleben und vom Karma möglich. Alles, was als Wahrheit über diese Vorgänge mitgeteilt werden soll, muss der Forschung durch intuitive Erkenntnis entstammen. — Und will der Mensch sich selbst seiner inneren Wesenheit nach erkennen, so kann er dies nur durch Intuition. Durch sie nimmt er wahr, was sich in ihm von Erdenleben zu Erdenleben fortbewegt.
[ 43 ] Erlangen kann der Mensch die Erkenntnis durch Inspiration und Intuition auch nur durch seelisch-geistige Übungen. Sie sind denen ähnlich, welche als «innere Versenkung» (Meditation) zur Erreichung der Imagination geschildert worden sind. Während aber bei jenen Übungen, welche zur Imagination führen, eine Anknüpfung stattfindet an die Eindrücke der sinnlichphysischen Welt, muss bei denen für die Inspiration diese Anknüpfung immer mehr wegfallen. Um sich zu verdeutlichen, was da zu geschehen hat, denke man nochmals an das Sinnbild des Rosenkreuzes. Wenn man sich in dasselbe versenkt, so hat man ein Bild vor sich, dessen Teile von Eindrücken der sinnlichen Welt genommen sind: die schwarze Farbe des Kreuzes, die Rosen usw. Die Zusammenstellung dieser Teile zum Rosenkreuz ist aber nicht aus der sinnlich-physischen Welt genommen. Wenn nun der Geistesschüler versucht, aus seinem Bewusstsein das schwarze Kreuz und auch die roten Rosen als Bilder von sinnlich-wirklichen Dingen ganz verschwinden zu lassen und nur in der Seele jene geistige Tätigkeit zu behalten, welche diese Teile zusammengesetzt hat, dann hat er ein Mittel zu einer solchen Meditation, welche ihn nach und nach zur Inspiration führt. Man frage sich in seiner Seele etwa in folgender Art: Was habe ich innerlich getan, um Kreuz und Rose zu dem Sinnbild zusammenzufügen? Was ich getan habe (meinen eigenen Seelenvorgang) will ich festhalten; das Bild selber aber aus dem Bewusstsein verschwinden lassen. Dann will ich alles in mir fühlen, was meine Seele getan hat, um das Bild zustande zu bringen, das Bild selbst aber will ich mir nicht vorstellen. Ich will nunmehr ganz innerlich leben in meiner eigenen Tätigkeit, welche das Bild geschaffen hat. Ich will mich also in kein Bild, sondern in meine eigene bilderzeugende Seelentätigkeit versenken. Solche Versenkung muss in bezug auf viele Sinnbilder vorgenommen werden. Das führt dann zur Erkenntnis durch Inspiration. Ein anderes Beispiel wäre dies: Man versenkt sich in die Vorstellung einer entstehenden und vergehenden Pflanze. Man lässt in der Seele das Bild einer nach und nach werdenden Pflanze entstehen, wie sie aus dem Keime aufspießt, wie sie Blatt nach Blatt entfaltet, bis zur Blüte und zur Frucht. Dann wieder, wie das Hinwelken beginnt, bis zur völligen Auflösung. Man gelangt allmählich durch die Versenkung in solch ein Bild zu einem Gefühl des Entstehens und Vergehens, für welches die Pflanze nur noch Bild ist. Aus diesem Gefühl kann dann, wenn die Übung ausdauernd fortgesetzt wird, sich die Imagination von jener Verwandlung herausbilden, welche dem physischen Entstehen und Vergehen zum Grunde liegt. Will man aber zur entsprechenden Inspiration kommen, dann muss man die Übung noch anders machen. Man muss sich auf die eigene Seelentätigkeit besinnen, welche aus dem Bilde der Pflanze die Vorstellung von Entstehen und Vergehen gewonnen hat. Man muss die Pflanze nun ganz aus dem Bewusstsein verschwinden lassen und sich nur in das hineinversenken, was man selbst innerlich getan hat. Durch solche Übungen nur ist ein Aufsteigen zur Inspiration möglich. Zunächst wird es dem Geistesschüler nicht ganz leicht sein, in vollem Umfange zu begreifen, wie er sich zu einer solchen Übung anzuschicken hat. Es rührt dies davon her, dass der Mensch, welcher gewohnt ist, sich sein Innenleben von den äußeren Eindrücken bestimmen zu lassen, sofort ins Unsichere und völlig Schwankende gerät, wenn er noch ein Seelenleben entfalten soll, das alle Anknüpfung an äußere Eindrücke abgeworfen hat. In einem noch höheren Maße als bezüglich der Erwerbung von Imaginationen muss der Geistesschüler sich gegenüber diesen Übungen zur Inspiration klar sein, dass er sie nur vornehmen sollte, wenn er nebenher gehen lässt alle Vorkehrungen, welche zur Sicherung und Festigung der Urteilsfähigkeit, des Gefühlslebens und des Charakters führen Können. Trifft er diese Vorkehrungen, so wird er ein Zweifaches davon als Erfolg haben. Erstens wird er durch die Übungen nicht das Gleichgewicht seiner Persönlichkeit beim übersinnlichen Schauen verlieren können; zweitens wird er sich zugleich die Fähigkeit aneignen, das wirklich ausführen zu können, was in diesen Übungen verlangt wird. Man wird diesen Übungen gegenüber nur so lange sagen, sie seien schwierig, als man sich eine ganz gewisse Seelenverfassung, ganz gewisse Gefühle und Empfindungen noch nicht angeeignet hat. Derjenige wird alsbald Verständnis und auch Fähigkeit für die Übungen gewinnen, der in Geduld und Ausdauer in seiner Seele solche innere Eigenschaften pflegt, welche dem Aufkeimen übersinnlicher Erkenntnisse günstig sind. Wer sich daran gewöhnt, öfters Einkehr in sein Inneres so zu halten, dass es ihm dabei weniger zu tun ist, über sich selbst nachzugrübeln, als vielmehr still in sich die im Leben gemachten Erfahrungen zu ordnen und zu verarbeiten, der wird viel gewinnen. Er wird sehen, dass man seine Vorstellungen und Gefühle bereichert, wenn man die eine Lebenserfahrung mit der anderen in ein Verhältnis bringt. Er wird gewahr werden, in wie hohem Grade man nicht nur dadurch Neues erfährt, dass man neue Eindrücke und neue Erlebnisse hat, sondern auch dadurch, dass man die alten in sich arbeiten lässt. Und wer dabei so zu Werke geht, dass er seine Erlebnisse, ja sogar seine gewonnenen Meinungen so gegeneinander spielen lässt, als ob er selbst mit seinen Sympathien und Antipathien, mit seinen persönlichen Interessen und Gefühlen gar nicht dabei wäre, der wird für die übersinnlichen Erkenntniskräfte einen besonders guten Boden zubereiten. Er wird in Wahrheit das ausbilden, was man ein reiches Innenleben nennen kann. Worauf es aber vor allem ankommt, das ist Gleichmaß und Gleichgewicht der Seeleneigenschaften. Der Mensch ist nur zu leicht geneigt, wenn er sich einer gewissen Seelentätigkeit hingibt, in Einseitigkeit zu verfallen. So kann er, wenn er den Vorteil des inneren Nachsinnens und des Verweilens in der eigenen Vorstellungswelt gewahr wird, dafür eine solche Neigung erhalten, dass er sich gegen die Eindrücke der Außenwelt immer mehr verschließt. Das aber führt zur Vertrocknung und Verödung des Innenlebens. Am weitesten kommt derjenige, welcher sich neben der Fähigkeit, sich in sein Inneres zurückzuziehen, auch die offene Empfänglichkeit bewahrt für alle Eindrücke der Außenwelt. Und man braucht dabei nicht etwa bloß an die sogenannten bedeutsamen Eindrücke des Lebens zu denken, sondern es kann jeder Mensch in jeder Lage auch in noch so ärmlichen vier Wänden — genug erleben, wenn er nur den Sinn dafür empfänglich hält. Man braucht die Erlebnisse nicht erst zu suchen; sie sind überall da. — Von besonderer Wichtigkeit ist auch, wie Erlebnisse in des Menschen Seele verarbeitet werden. Es kann zum Beispiel jemand die Erfahrung machen, dass eine von ihm oder andern verehrte Persönlichkeit diese oder jene Eigenschaft habe, die er als Charakterfehler bezeichnen muss. Durch eine solche Erfahrung kann der Mensch in einer zweifachen Richtung zum Nachdenken veranlasst werden. Er kann sich einfach sagen: Jetzt, nachdem ich dies erkannt habe, kann ich jene Persönlichkeit nicht mehr in derselben Art verehren wie früher. Oder aber er kann sich die Frage vorlegen: Wie ist es möglich, dass die verehrte Persönlichkeit mit jenem Fehler behaftet ist? Wie muss ich mir vorstellen, dass der Fehler nicht nur Fehler, sondern etwas durch das Leben der Persönlichkeit, vielleicht gerade durch ihre großen Eigenschaften Verursachtes ist? Ein Mensch, welcher sich diese Fragen vorlegt, wird vielleicht zu dem Ergebnis kommen, dass seine Verehrung nicht im geringsten durch das Bemerken des Fehlers zu verringern ist. Man wird durch ein solches Ergebnis jedesmal etwas gelernt haben, man wird seinem Lebensverständnis etwas beigefügt haben. Nun wäre es gewiss schlimm für denjenigen, der sich durch das Gute einer solchen Lebensbetrachtung verleiten ließe, bei Personen oder Dingen, welche seine Neigung haben, alles Mögliche zu entschuldigen oder etwa gar zu der Gewohnheit überzugehen, alles Tadelnswerte unberücksichtigt zu lassen, weil ihm das Vorteil bringt für seine innere Entwicklung. Dies letztere ist nämlich dann nicht der Fall, wenn man durch sich selbst den Antrieb erhält, Fehler nicht bloß zu tadeln, sondern zu verstehen; sondern nur, wenn ein solches Verhalten durch den betreffenden Fall selbst gefordert wird, gleichgültig, was der Beurteiler dabei gewinnt oder verliert. Es ist durchaus richtig: Lernen kann man nicht durch die Verurteilung eines Fehlers, sondern nur durch dessen Verstehen. Wer aber wegen des Verständnisses durchaus das Missfallen ausschließen wollte, der käme auch nicht weit. Auch hier kommt es nicht auf Einseitigkeit in der einen oder andern Richtung an, sondern auf Gleichmaß und Gleichgewicht der Seelenkräfte. — Und so ist es ganz besonders mit einer Seeleneigenschaft, die für des Menschen Entwicklung ganz hervorragend bedeutsam ist; mit dem, was man Gefühl der Verehrung (Devotion) nennt. Wer dieses Gefühl in sich heranbildet oder es durch eine glückliche Naturgabe von vornherein besitzt, der hat einen guten Boden für die übersinnlichen Erkenntniskräfte. Wer in seiner Kindheits und Jugendzeit mit hingebungsvoller Bewunderung zu Personen wie zu hohen Idealen hinaufschauen konnte, in dessen Seelengrund ist etwas, worinnen übersinnliche Erkenntnisse besonders gut gedeihen. Und wer bei reifem Urteile im späteren Leben zum Sternenhimmel blickt und in restloser Hingabe die Offenbarung hoher Mächte bewundernd empfindet, der macht sich eben dadurch reif zum Erkennen der übersinnlichen Welten. Ein gleiches ist bei demjenigen der Fall, welcher die im Menschenleben waltenden Kräfte zu bewundern vermag. Und von nicht geringer Bedeutung ist es, wenn man auch noch als gereifter Mensch Verehrung bis zu den höchsten Graden für andere Menschen haben kann, deren Wert man ahnt oder zu erkennen glaubt. Nur wo solche Verehrung vorhanden ist, kann sich die Aussicht in die höheren Welten eröffnen. Wer nicht verehren kann, wird keinesfalls in seiner Erkenntnis besonders weit kommen. Wer nichts in der Welt anerkennen will, dem verschließt sich das Wesen der Dinge. — Wer sich jedoch durch das Gefühl der Verehrung und Hingabe dazu verführen lässt, das gesunde Selbstbewusstsein und Selbstvertrauen in sich ganz zu ertöten, der versündigt sich gegen das Gesetz des Gleichmaßes und Gleichgewichtes. Der Geistesschüler wird fortdauernd an sich arbeiten, um sich immer reifer und reifer zu machen; aber dann darf er auch das Vertrauen zu der eigenen Persönlichkeit haben und glauben, dass deren Kräfte immer mehr wachsen. Wer in sich zu richtigen Empfindungen nach dieser Richtung kommt, der sagt sich: In mir liegen Kräfte verborgen, und ich kann sie aus meinem Innern hervorholen. Ich brauche daher dort, wo ich etwas sehe, das ich verehren muss, weil es über mir steht, nicht bloß zu verehren, sondern ich darf mir zutrauen, alles das in mir zu entwickeln, was mich diesem oder jenem Verehrten gleich macht.
[ 44 ] Je größer in einem Menschen die Fähigkeit ist, Aufmerksamkeit auf gewisse Vorgänge des Lebens zu richten, welche nicht von vornherein dem persönlichen Urteil vertraut sind, desto größer ist für ihn die Möglichkeit, sich Unterlagen zu schaffen für eine Entwicklung in geistige Welten hinauf. Ein Beispiel mag dies anschaulich machen. Ein Mensch komme in eine Lebenslage, wo er eine gewisse Handlung tun oder unterlassen kann. Sein Urteil sage ihm: Tue dies. Aber es sei doch ein gewisses unerklärliches Etwas in seinen Empfindungen, das ihn von der Tat abhält. Es kann nun so sein, dass der Mensch auf dieses unerklärliche Etwas keine Aufmerksamkeit verwendet, sondern einfach die Handlung so vollbringt, wie es seiner Urteilsfähigkeit angemessen ist. Es kann aber auch so sein, dass der Mensch dem Drange jenes unerklärlichen Etwas nachgibt und die Handlung unterlässt. Verfolgt er dann die Sache weiter, so kann sich herausstellen, dass Unheil gefolgt wäre, wenn er seinem Urteil gefolgt wäre; dass jedoch Segen entstanden ist durch das Unterlassen. Solch eine Erfahrung kann das Denken des Menschen in eine ganz bestimmte Richtung bringen. Er kann sich sagen: In mir lebt etwas, was mich richtiger leitet als der Grad von Urteilsfähigkeit, welchen ich in der Gegenwart habe. Ich muss mir den Sinn offen halten für dieses «Etwas in mir», zu dem ich mit meiner Urteilsfähigkeit noch gar nicht herangereift bin. Es wirkt nun in hohem Grade günstig auf die Seele, wenn sie ihre Aufmerksamkeit auf solche Fälle im Leben richtet. Es zeigt sich ihr dann wie in einer gesunden Ahnung, dass im Menschen mehr ist, als was er jeweilig mit seiner Urteilskraft übersehen kann. Solche Aufmerksamkeit arbeitet auf eine Erweiterung des Seelenlebens hin. Aber auch hier können sich wieder Einseitigkeiten ergeben, welche bedenklich sind. Wer sich gewöhnen wollte, stets deshalb sein Urteil auszuschalten, weil ihn «Ahnungen» zu dem oder jenem treiben, der könnte ein Spielball von allen möglichen unbestimmten Trieben werden. Und von einer solchen Gewohnheit zur Urteilslosigkeit und zum Aberglauben ist es nicht weit. — Verhängnisvoll für den Geistesschüler ist eine jegliche Art von Aberglauben. Man erwirbt sich nur dadurch die Möglichkeit, in einer wahrhaften Art in die Gebiete des Geisteslebens einzudringen, dass man sich sorgfältig hütet vor Aberglauben, Phantastik und Träumerei. Nicht derjenige kommt in einer richtigen Weise in die geistige Welt hinein, welcher froh ist, wenn er irgendwo einen Vorgang erleben kann, der «von dem menschlichen Vorstellen nicht begriffen werden kann». Die Vorliebe für das «Unerklärliche» macht gewiss niemanden zum Geistesschüler. Ganz abgewöhnen muss sich dieser das Vorurteil, dass ein «Mystiker der sei, welcher in der Welt ein Unerklärliches, Unerforschliches» überall da voraussetzt, wo es ihm angemessen erscheint. Das rechte Gefühl für den Geistesschüler ist, überall verborgene Kräfte und Wesenheiten anzuerkennen; aber auch vorauszusetzen, dass das Unerforschte erforscht werden kann, wenn die Kräfte dazu vorhanden sind.
[ 45 ] Es gibt eine gewisse Seelenverfassung, welche dem Geistesschüler auf jeder Stufe seiner Entwicklung wichtig ist. Sie besteht darin, seinen Erkenntnistrieb nicht einseitig so zu stellen, dass dieser immer darauf ausgeht: Wie kann man auf diese oder jene Frage antworten? Sondern darauf: Wie entwickele ich diese oder jene Fähigkeit in mir? Ist dann durch innere geduldige Arbeit an sich diese oder jene Fähigkeit entwickelt, so fällt dem Menschen die Antwort auf gewisse Fragen zu. Geistesschüler werden immer diese Seelenverfassung in sich pflegen. Dadurch werden sie dazu geführt, an sich zu arbeiten, sich immer reifer und reifer zu machen und sich zu versagen, Antworten auf gewisse Fragen herbeizwingen zu wollen. Sie werden warten, bis ihnen solche Antworten zufallen. — Wer aber auch darin wieder an Einseitigkeit sich gewöhnt, auch der kommt nicht richtig vorwärts. Der Geistesschüler kann auch das Gefühl haben, in einem bestimmten Zeitpunkte sich mit dem Maße seiner Kräfte selbst die höchsten Fragen zu beantworten. Also auch hier spielen Gleichmaß und Gleichgewicht in der Seelenverfassung eine gewichtige Rolle.
[ 46 ] Noch viele Seeleneigenschaften könnten besprochen werden, deren Pflege und Entwicklung förderlich ist, wenn der Geistesschüler die Inspiration durch Übungen anstreben will. Bei allem würde zu betonen sein, dass Gleichmaß und Gleichgewicht diejenigen Seeleneigenschaften sind, auf die es ankommt. Sie bereiten das Verständnis und die Fähigkeit für die charakterisierten Übungen vor, die behufs der Erlangung der Inspiration zu machen sind.
[ 47 ] Die Übungen zur Intuition erfordern, dass der Geistesschüler aus seinem Bewusstsein nicht nur die Bilder verschwinden lässt, welchen er sich zur Erlangung der Imagination hingegeben hat, sondern auch das Leben in der eigenen Seelentätigkeit, in welche er sich für die Erwerbung der Inspiration versenkt hat. Er soll also dann buchstäblich nichts von vorher gekanntem äußeren oder inneren Erleben in seiner Seele haben. Würde nun aber nach diesem Abwerfen der äußeren und der inneren Erlebnisse nichts in seinem Bewusstsein sein, das heißt, würde ihm das Bewusstsein überhaupt dahinschwinden und er in Bewusstlosigkeit versinken, so könnte er daran erkennen, dass er sich noch nicht reif gemacht hat, Übungen für die Intuition vorzunehmen; und er müsste dann die Übungen für die Imagination und Inspiration fortsetzen. Es kommt schon einmal die Zeit, in welcher das Bewusstsein nicht leer ist, wenn die Seele die inneren und äußeren Erlebnisse abgeworfen hat, sondern wo nach diesem Abwerfen als Wirkung etwas im Bewusstsein zurückbleibt, dem man sich dann in Versenkung ebenso hingeben kann, wie man sich vorher dem hingegeben hat, was äußerlichen oder inneren Eindrücken sein Dasein verdankt. Es ist dieses «Etwas» aber von ganz besonderer Art. Es ist gegenüber allen vorhergehenden Erfahrungen etwas wirklich Neues. Man weiß, wenn man es erlebt: Dies habe ich vorher nicht gekannt. Dies ist eine Wahrnehmung, wie der wirkliche Ton eine Wahrnehmung ist, welchen das Ohr hört; aber es kann dieses Etwas nur in mein Bewusstsein treten durch die Intuition, wie der Ton nur ins Bewusstsein treten kann durch das Ohr. Durch die Intuition ist der letzte Rest des Sinnlich-Physischen von des Menschen Eindrücken abgestreift; die geistige Welt beginnt für die Erkenntnis offen zu liegen in einer Form, die nichts mehr gemein hat mit den Eigenschaften der physisch-sinnlichen Welt.
[ 48 ] Die imaginative Erkenntnis wird erreicht durch die Ausgestaltung der Lotusblumen aus dem astralischen Leibe heraus. Durch diejenigen Übungen, welche zur Erlangung von Inspiration und Intuition unternommen werden, treten im menschlichen Ätheroder Lebensleib besondere Bewegungen, Gestaltungen und Strömungen auf, welche vorher nicht da waren. Sie sind eben die Organe, durch welche der Mensch das «Lesen der verborgenen Schrift» und das, was darüber hinausliegt, in den Bereich seiner Fähigkeiten aufnimmt. Für das übersinnliche Erkennen stellen sich die Veränderungen im Ätherleibe eines Menschen, der zur Inspiration und Intuition gelangt ist, in der folgenden Art dar. Es wird, ungefähr wie in der Gegend nahe dem physischen Herzen, ein neuer Mittelpunkt im Ätherleibe bewusst, der sich zu einem ätherischen Organe ausgestaltet. Von diesem laufen Bewegungen und Strömungen nach den verschiedenen Gliedern des menschlichen Leibes in der mannigfaltigsten Weise. Die wichtigsten dieser Strömungen gehen zu den Lotusblumen, durchziehen dieselben und ihre einzelnen Blätter und gehen dann nach außen, wo sie wie Strahlen sich in den äußeren Raum ergießen. Je entwickelter der Mensch ist, desto größer ist der Umkreis um ihn herum, in dem diese Strömungen wahrnehmbar sind. Der Mittelpunkt in der Gegend des Herzens bildet sich aber bei regelrechter Schulung nicht gleich im Anfang aus. Er wird erst vorbereitet. Zuerst entsteht als ein vorläufiger Mittelpunkt ein solcher im Kopfe; der rückt dann hinunter in die Kehlkopfgegend und verlegt sich zuletzt in die Nähe des physischen Herzens. Würde die Entwicklung unregelmäßig sein, so könnte sogleich in der Herzgegend das in Rede stehende Organ gebildet werden. Dann läge die Gefahr vor, dass der Mensch, statt zur ruhigen, sachgemäßen übersinnlichen Schalung zu kommen, zum Schwärmer und Phantasten' würde. In seiner weiteren Entwicklung gelangt der Geistesschüler dazu, die ausgebildeten Strömungen und Gliederungen seines Ätherleibes unabhängig zu machen von dem physischen Leibe und sie selbständig zu gebrauchen. Es dienen ihm die Lotusblumen dabei als Werkzeuge, durch welche er den Ätherleib bewegt. Bevor dieses geschieht, müssen sich aber in dem ganzen Umkreis des Ätherleibes besondere Strömungen und Strahlungen gebildet haben, welche ihn wie durch ein feines Netzwerk in sich abschließen und zu einer in sich geschlossenen Wesenheit machen. Wenn das geschehen ist, können ungehindert die im Ätherleibe sich vollziehenden Bewegungen und Strömungen sich mit der äußeren seelisch-geistigen Welt berühren und mit ihnen sich verbinden, so dass äußeres geistig-seelisches Geschehen und inneres (dasjenige im menschlichen Ätherleibe) ineinander fließen. Wenn das geschieht, ist eben der Zeitpunkt eingetreten, in dem der Mensch die Welt der Inspiration bewusst wahrnimmt. Dieses Erkennen tritt in einer anderen Art auf als das Erkennen in bezug auf die sinnlich-physische Welt. In dieser bekommt man durch die Sinne Wahrnehmungen und macht sich dann über diese Wahrnehmungen Vorstellungen und Begriffe. Beim Wissen durch die Inspiration ist es nicht so. Was man erkennt, ist unmittelbar, in einem Akte da; es gibt nicht ein Nachdenken nach der Wahrnehmung. Was für das sinnlichphysische Erkennen erst hinterher im Begriffe gewonnen wird, ist bei der Inspiration zugleich mit der Wahrnehmung gegeben. Man würde deshalb mit der seelisch-geistigen Umwelt in eins zusammenfließen, sich von ihr gar nicht unterscheiden können, wenn man das oben charakterisierte Netzwerk im Ätherleibe nicht ausgebildet hätte.
[ 49 ] Wenn die Übungen für die Intuition gemacht werden, so wirken sie nicht allein auf den Ätherleib, sondern bis in die übersinnlichen Kräfte des physischen Leibes hinein. Man sollte sich allerdings nicht vorstellen, dass auf diese Art Wirkungen im physischen Leibe vor sich gehen, welche der gewöhnlichen Sinnenbeobachtung zugänglich sind. Es sind Wirkungen, welche nur das übersinnliche Erkennen beurteilen kann. Sie haben mit aller äußeren Erkenntnis nichts zu tun. Sie stellen sich ein als Erfolg der Reife des Bewusstseins, wenn dieses in der Intuition Erlebnisse haben kann, trotzdem es alle vorher gekannten äußeren und inneren Erlebnisse aus sich herausgesondert hat. — Nun sind aber die Erfahrungen der Intuition zart, intim und fein; und der physische Menschenleib ist auf der gegenwärtigen Stufe seiner Entwicklung im Verhältnisse zu ihnen grob. Er bietet deshalb ein stark wirkendes Hindernis für den Erfolg der Intuitionsübungen. Werden diese mit Energie und Ausdauer und in der notwendigen inneren Ruhe fortgesetzt, so überwinden sie zuletzt die gewaltigen Hindernisse des physischen Leibes. Der Geistesschüler bemerkt das daran, dass er allmählich gewisse Äußerungen des physischen Leibes, die vorher ganz ohne sein Bewusstsein erfolgten, in seine Gewalt bekommt. Er bemerkt es auch daran, dass er für kurze Zeit das Bedürfnis empfindet, zum Beispiel das Atmen (oder dergleichen) so einzurichten, dass es in eine Art Einklang oder Harmonie mit dem kommt, was in den Übungen oder sonst in der inneren Versenkung die Seele verrichtet. Das Ideal der Entwicklung ist, dass durch den physischen Leib selbst gar keine Übungen, auch nicht solche Atemübungen gemacht würden, sondern dass alles, was mit ihm zu geschehen hat, sich nur als eine Folge der reinen Intuitionsübungen einstellte.
[ 50 ] Wenn der Geistesschüler auf dem Wege in die höheren Erkenntniswelten aufsteigt, so bemerkt er auf einer gewissen Stufe, dass das Zusammenhalten der Kräfte seiner Persönlichkeit eine andere Form annimmt, als es in der physisch-sinnlichen Welt hat. In dieser bewirkt das Ich ein einheitliches Zusammenwirken der Seelenkräfte, zunächst des Denkens, Fühlens und Wollens. Diese drei Seelenkräfte stehen ja in den gewöhnlichen menschlichen Lebenslagen jeweilig immer in gewissen Beziehungen. Man sieht zum Beispiel ein gewisses Ding in der Außenwelt. Es gefällt oder missfällt der Seele. Das heißt, es schließt sich mit einer gewissen Notwendigkeit an die Vorstellung des Dinges ein Gefühl der Lust oder Unlust. Man begehrt auch wohl das Ding oder erhält den Impuls, es in dieser oder jener Richtung zu ändern. Das heißt: Begehrungsvermögen und Wille gesellen sich zu einer Vorstellung und einem Gefühle hinzu.
[ 51 ] Dass dieses Zusammengesellen stattfindet, wird bewirkt dadurch, dass das Ich Vorstellen (Denken), Fühlen und Wollen einheitlich zusammenschließt und auf diese Art Ordnung in die Kräfte der Persönlichkeit bringt. Diese gesunde Ordnung würde unterbrochen, wenn sich das Ich nach dieser Richtung machtlos erwiese, wenn zum Beispiel die Begierde einen andern Weg gehen wollte als das Gefühl oder die Vorstellung. Ein Mensch wäre nicht in einer gesunden Seelenverfassung, welcher zwar dächte, dass dies oder jenes richtig sei, aber nun etwas wollte, wovon er nicht die Ansicht hat, dass es richtig ist. Ebenso wäre es, wenn jemand nicht das wollte, was ihm gefällt, sondern das, was ihm missfällt. Nun bemerkt der Mensch, dass auf dem Wege zur höheren Erkenntnis Denken, Fühlen und Wollen in der Tat sich sondern und jedes eine gewisse Selbständigkeit annimmt, dass zum Beispiel ein bestimmtes Denken nicht mehr wie durch sich selbst zu einem bestimmten Fühlen und Wollen drängt. Es stellt sich die Sache so, dass man im Denken etwas richtig wahrnehmen kann, dass man aber, um überhaupt zu einem Gefühle oder zu einem Willensentschluss zu kommen, wieder aus sich heraus einen selbständigen Antrieb braucht. Denken, Fühlen und Wollen bleiben eben während der übersinnlichen Betrachtung nicht drei Kräfte, welche aus dem gemeinsamen IchMittelpunkte der Persönlichkeit ausstrahlen, sondern sie werden wie zu selbständigen Wesenheiten, gleichsam zu drei Persönlichkeiten; und man muss jetzt das eigene Ich um so stärker machen, denn es soll nicht bloß in drei Kräfte Ordnung bringen, sondern drei Wesenheiten lenken und führen. Aber diese Teilung darf eben nur während der übersinnlichen Betrachtung bestehen. Und wieder tritt es hier deutlich zutage, wie wichtig es ist, neben den Übungen zu höherer Schulung diejenigen einhergehen zu lassen, welche der Urteilsfähigkeit, dem Gefühlsund Willensleben Sicherheit und Festigkeit geben. Denn bringt man diese nicht mit in die höhere Welt, so wird man alsbald sehen, wie sich das Ich schwach erweist und kein ordentlicher Lenker sein kann des Denkens, Fühlens und Wollens. Die Seele würde, wenn diese Schwäche vorhanden wäre, wie von drei Persönlichkeiten in die verschiedenen Richtungen gezerrt, und ihre innere Geschlossenheit müsste aufhören. Wenn die Entwicklung des Geistesschülers aber in der rechten Art verläuft, so bedeutet die gekennzeichnete Kräftewandlung einen wahren Fortschritt; das Ich bleibt über die selbständigen Wesenheiten, welche nun seine Seele bilden, der Herrscher. — Im weiteren Verlaufe der Entwicklung schreitet die angedeutete Entwicklung dann fort. Das Denken, das selbständig geworden ist, regt das Auftreten einer besonderen vierten seelisch-geistigen Wesenheit an, welche man bezeichnen kann wie ein unmittelbares Einfließen von Strömungen in den Menschen, die den Gedanken ähnlich sind. Die ganze Welt erscheint da als Gedankengebäude, das vor einem steht, wie die Pflanzenoder Tierwelt im physisch-sinnlichen Gebiete. Ebenso regen das selbständig gewordene Fühlen und Wollen zwei Kräfte in der Seele an, welche in derselben wie selbständige Wesen wirken. Und noch eine siebente Kraft und Wesenheit kommt dazu, welche ähnlich dem eigenen Ich selber ist.
[ 52 ] Dieses ganze Erlebnis verbindet sich noch mit einem andern. Vor dem Betreten der übersinnlichen Welt kannte der Mensch Denken, Fühlen und Wollen nur als innere Seelenerlebnisse. Sobald er die übersinnliche Welt betritt, nimmt er Dinge wahr, welche nicht Sinnlich-Physisches ausdrücken, sondern SeelischGeistiges. Hinter den von ihm wahrgenommenen Eigenschaften der neuen Welt stehen jetzt seelisch-geistige Wesenheiten. Und diese bieten sich ihm jetzt so dar als eine Außenwelt, wie sich ihm im physisch-sinnlichen Gebiet Steine, Pflanzen und Tiere vor die Sinne gestellt haben. Es kann nun der Geistesschüler einen bedeutsamen Unterschied wahrnehmen zwischen der sich ihm erschließenden seelisch-geistigen Welt und derjenigen, welche er gewohnt war, durch seine physischen Sinne wahrzunehmen. Eine Pflanze der sinnlichen Welt bleibt, wie sie ist, was auch des Menschen Seele über sie fühlt oder denkt. Das ist bei den Bildern der seelisch-geistigen Welt zunächst nicht der Fall. Sie ändern sich, je nachdem der Mensch dieses oder jenes empfindet oder denkt. Dadurch gibt ihnen der Mensch ein Gepräge, das von seinem eigenen Wesen abhängt. Man stelle sich vor, ein gewisses Bild trete in der imaginativen Welt vor dem Menschen auf. Verhält er sich zunächst in seinem Gemüte gleichgültig dagegen, so zeigt es sich in einer gewissen Gestalt. In dem Augenblicke aber, wo er Lust oder Unlust gegenüber dem Bilde empfindet, ändert es seine Gestalt. Die Bilder drücken somit zunächst nicht nur etwas aus, was selbständig außerhalb des Menschen ist, sondern sie spiegeln auch dasjenige, was der Mensch selbst ist. Sie sind ganz und gar durchsetzt von des Menschen eigener Wesenheit. Diese legt sich wie ein Schleier über die Wesenheiten hin. Der Mensch sieht dann, wenn auch eine wirkliche Wesenheit ihm gegenübersteht, nicht diese, sondern sein eigenes Erzeugnis. So kann er zwar durchaus Wahres vor sich haben und doch Falsches sehen. Ja, das ist nicht nur der Fall mit Bezug auf das, was der Mensch als seine Wesenheit selbst an sich bemerkt; sondern alles, was an ihm ist, wirkt auf diese Welt ein. Es kann zum Beispiel der Mensch verborgene Neigungen haben, die im Leben durch Erziehung und Charakter nicht zum Vorschein kommen; auf die geistigseelische Welt wirken sie; und diese bekommt die eigenartige Färbung durch das ganze Wesen des Menschen, gleichgültig, wieviel er von diesem Wesen selbst weiß oder nicht weiß. — Um weiter fortschreiten zu können von dieser Stufe der Entwicklung aus, ist es notwendig, dass der Mensch unterscheiden lerne zwischen sich und der geistigen Außenwelt. Es wird nötig, dass er alle Wirkungen des eigenen Selbstes auf die um ihn befindliche seelisch-geistige Welt ausschalten lerne. Man kann das nicht anders, als wenn man sich eine Erkenntnis erwirbt von dem, was man selbst in die neue Welt hineinträgt. Es handelt sich also darum, dass man zuerst wahre, durchgreifende Selbsterkenntnis habe, um dann die umliegende geistig-seelische Welt rein wahrnehmen zu können. Nun bringen es gewisse Tatsachen der menschlichen Entwicklung mit sich, dass solche Selbsterkenntnis beim Eintritte in die höhere Welt wie naturgemäß stattfinden muss. Der Mensch entwickelt ja in der gewöhnlichen physisch-sinnlichen Welt sein Ich, sein Selbstbewusstsein. Dieses Ich wirkt nun wie ein AnziehungsMittelpunkt auf alles, was zum Menschen gehört. Alle seine Neigungen, Sympathien, Antipathien, Leidenschaften, Meinungen usw. gruppieren sich gleichsam um dieses Ich herum. Und es ist dieses Ich auch der Anziehungspunkt für das, was man das Karma des Menschen nennt. Würde man dieses Ich unverhüllt sehen, so würde man an ihm auch bemerken, dass bestimmt geartete Schicksale es noch in dieser und den folgenden Verkörperungen treffen müssen, je nachdem es in den vorigen Verkörperungen so oder so gelebt, sich dieses oder jenes angeeignet hat. Mit alle dem, was so am Ich haftet, muss es nun als erstes Bild vor die Menschenseele treten, wenn diese in die seelischgeistige Welt aufsteigt. Dieser Doppelgänger des Menschen muss, nach einem Gesetz der geistigen Welt, vor allem andern als dessen erster Eindruck in jener Welt auftreten. Man kann das Gesetz, welches da zugrunde liegt, sich leicht verständlich machen, wenn man das Folgende bedenkt. Im physischsinnlichen Leben nimmt sich der Mensch nur insofern selbst wahr, als er sich in seinem Denken, Fühlen und Wollen innerlich erlebt. Diese Wahrnehmung ist aber eine innerliche; sie stellt sich nicht vor den Menschen hin, wie sich Steine, Pflanzen und Tiere vor ihn hinstellen. Auch lernt sich durch innerliche Wahrnehmung der Mensch nur zum Teil kennen. Er hat nämlich etwas in sich, was ihn an einer tiefergehenden Selbsterkenntnis hindert. Es ist dies ein Trieb, sogleich, wenn er durch Selbsterkenntnis sich eine Eigenschaft gestehen muss und sich keiner Täuschung über sich hingeben will, diese Eigenschaft umzuarbeiten.
[ 53 ] Gibt er diesem Triebe nicht nach, lenkt er einfach die Aufmerksamkeit von dem eigenen Selbst ab und bleibt er, wie er ist, so benimmt er sich selbstverständlich auch die Möglichkeit, sich in dem betreffenden Punkte selbst zu erkennen. Dringt der Mensch aber in sich selbst und hält er sich ohne Täuschung diese oder jene seiner Eigenschaften vor, so wird er entweder in der Lage sein, sie an sich zu verbessern oder aber er wird dies in der gegenwärtigen Lage seines Lebens nicht können. In dem letzteren Falle wird seine Seele ein Gefühl beschleichen, das man als Gefühl des Schämens bezeichnen muss. So wirkt in der Tat des Menschen gesunde Natur: Sie empfindet durch die Selbsterkenntnis mancherlei Arten des Schämens. Nun hat dieses Gefühl schon im gewöhnlichen Leben eine ganz bestimmte Wirkung. Der gesund denkende Mensch wird dafür sorgen, dass dasjenige, was ihn an sich selbst mit diesem Gefühl erfüllt, nicht in Wirkungen nach außen sich geltend mache, dass es nicht in äußeren Taten sich auslebe. Das Schämen ist also eine Kraft, welche den Menschen antreibt, etwas in sein Inneres zu verschließen und dies nicht äußerlich wahrnehmbar werden zu lassen. Wenn man dies gehörig bedenkt, so wird man begreiflich finden, dass die Geistesforschung einem inneren Seelenerlebnis, das mit dem Gefühl des Schämens ganz nahe verwandt ist, noch viel weitergehende Wirkungen zuschreibt. Sie findet, dass es in den verborgenen Tiefen der Seele eine Art verborgenes Schämen gibt, dessen sich der Mensch im physischsinnlichen Leben nicht bewusst wird. Dieses verborgene Gefühl wirkt aber in einer ähnlichen Art wie das gekennzeichnete offenbare des gewöhnlichen Lebens: es verhindert, dass des Menschen innerste Wesenheit in einem wahrnehmbaren Bilde vor den Menschen hintritt. Wäre dieses Gefühl nicht da, so würde der Mensch vor sich selbst wahrnehmen, was er in Wahrheit ist; er würde seine Vorstellungen, Gefühle und seinen Willen nicht nur innerlich erleben, sondern sie wahrnehmen, wie er Steine, Tiere und Pflanzen wahrnimmt. So ist dieses Gefühl der Verhüller des Menschen vor sich selbst. Und damit ist es zugleich der Verhüller der ganzen geistigseelischen Welt. Denn indem sich des Menschen eigene innere Wesenheit vor ihm verhüllt, kann er auch das nicht wahrnehmen, an dem er die Werkzeuge entwickeln sollte, um die seelisch-geistige Welt zu erkennen; er kann seine Wesenheit nicht umgestalten, so dass sie geistige Wahmehmungsorgane erhielte.—Wenn nun aber der Mensch durch regelrechte Schulung dahin arbeitet, diese Wahmehmungsorgane zu erhalten, so tritt dasjenige als erster Eindruck vor ihn hin, was er selbst ist. Er nimmt seinen Doppelgänger wahr. Diese Selbstwahrnehmung ist gar nicht zu trennen von der Wahrnehmung der übrigen geistig-seelischen Welt. Im gewöhnlichen Leben der physischsinnlichen Welt wirkt das charakterisierte Gefühl so, dass es fortwährend das Tor zur geistig-seelischen Welt vor dem Menschen zuschließt. Wollte der Mensch nur einen Schritt machen, um in diese Welt einzudringen, so verbirgt das sogleich auftretende, aber nicht zum Bewusstsein kommende Gefühl des Schämens das Stück der geistig-seelischen Welt, das zum Vorschein kommen will. Die charakterisierten Übungen aber schließen diese Welt auf. Nun ist die Sache so, dass jenes verborgene Gefühl wie ein großer Wohltäter des Menschen wirkt. Denn durch alles das, was man sich ohne geisteswissenschaftliche Schulung an Urteilskraft, Gefühlsleben und Charakter erwirbt, ist man nicht imstande, die Wahrnehmung der eigenen Wesenheit in ihrer wahren Gestalt ohne weiteres zu ertragen. Man würde durch diese Wahrnehmung alles Selbstgefühl, Selbstvertrauen und Selbstbewusstsein verlieren. Dass dies nicht geschehe, dafür müssen wieder die Vorkehrungen sorgen, welche man neben den Übungen für die höhere Erkenntnis zur Pflege seiner gesunden Urteilskraft, seines Gefühlsund Charakterwesens unternimmt. Durch seine regelrechte Schulung lernt der Mensch wie absichtslos so viel aus der Geisteswissenschaft kennen und es werden ihm außerdem so viele Mittel zur Selbsterkenntnis und Selbstbeobachtung klar, als notwendig sind, um kraftvoll seinem Doppelgänger zu begegnen. Es ist dann für den Geistesschüler so, dass er nur als Bild der imaginativen Welt in anderer Form das sieht, womit er sich in der physischen Welt schon bekanntgemacht hat. Wer in richtiger Art zuerst in der physischen Welt durch seinen Verstand das Karmagesetz begriffen hat, der wird nicht besonders erbeben können, wenn er nun die Keime seines Schicksals eingezeichnet sieht in dem Bilde seines Doppelgängers. Wer durch seine Urteilskraft sich bekanntgemacht hat mit der Weltenund Menschheitsentwicklung und weiß, wie in einem bestimmten Zeitpunkte dieser Entwicklung die Kräfte des Luzifer in die menschliche Seele eingedrungen sind, der wird es unschwer ertragen, wenn er gewahr wird, dass in dem Bilde seiner eigenen Wesenheit diese luziferischen Wesenheiten mit allen ihren Wirkungen enthalten sind. — Man sieht aber hieraus, wie notwendig es ist, dass der Mensch nicht den eigenen Eintritt in die geistige Welt verlange, bevor er durch seine gewöhnliche in der physisch-sinnlichen Welt entwickelte Urteilskraft gewisse Wahrheiten über die geistige Welt verstanden hat. Was in diesem Buche vor der Auseinandersetzung über die «Erkenntnis der höheren Welten» mitgeteilt ist, das sollte der Geistesschüler im regelrechten Entwicklungsgange durch seine gewöhnliche Urteilskraft sich angeeignet haben, bevor er das Verlangen hat, sich selbst in die übersinnlichen Welten zu begeben.
[ 54 ] Bei einer Schulung, in welcher nicht auf Sicherheit und Festigkeit der Urteilskraft, des Gefühlsund Charakterlebens gesehen wird, kann es geschehen, dass dem Schüler die höhere Welt entgegentritt, bevor er dazu die nötigen inneren Fähigkeiten hat. Dann würde ihn die Begegnung mit seinem Doppelgänger bedrücken und zu Irrtümern führen. Würde aber — was allerdings auch möglich wäre — die Begegnung ganz vermieden und der Mensch doch in die übersinnliche Welt eingeführt, dann wäre er ebensowenig imstande, diese Welt in ihrer wahren Gestalt zu erkennen. Denn es wäre ihm ganz unmöglich, zu unterscheiden zwischen dem, was er in die Dinge hineinsieht, und dem, was sie wirklich sind. Diese Unterscheidung ist nur möglich, wenn man die eigene Wesenheit als ein Bild für sich wahrnimmt und dadurch sich alles das von der Umgebung loslöst, was aus dem eigenen Innern fließt. — Der Doppelgänger wirkt für das Leben des Menschen in der physisch-sinnlichen Welt so, dass er sich durch das gekennzeichnete Gefühl des Schämens sofort unsichtbar macht, wenn sich der Mensch der seelisch-geistigen Welt naht. Damit verbirgt er aber auch diese ganze Welt selbst. Wie ein «Hüter» steht er da vor dieser Welt, um den Eintritt jenen zu verwehren, welche zu diesem Eintritte noch nicht geeignet sind. Er kann daher der «Hüter der Schwelle, welche vor der geistig-seelischen Welt ist», genannt werden.—Außer durch das geschilderte Betreten der übersinnlichen Welt begegnet der Mensch noch beim Durchgang durch den physischen Tod diesem «Hüter der Schwelle». Und er enthüllt sich nach und nach im Verlaufe des Lebens in der seelischgeistigen Entwicklung zwischen dem Tode und einer neuen Geburt. Da kann aber die Begegnung den Menschen nicht bedrücken, weil er davon andern Welten weiß als in dem Leben zwischen Geburt und Tod.
[ 55 ] Wenn der Mensch, ohne die Begegnung mit dem «Hüter der Schwelle» zu haben, die geistig-seelische Welt betreten würde, so könnte er Täuschung nach Täuschung verfallen. Denn er könnte nie unterscheiden, was er selbst in diese Welt hineinträgt und was ihr wirklich angehört. Eine regelrechte Schulung darf aber den Geistesschüler nur in das Gebiet der Wahrheit, nicht in dasjenige der Illusion führen. Eine solche Schulung wird durch sich selbst so sein, dass die Begegnung notwendig einmal erfolgen muss. Denn sie ist die eine der für die Beobachtung übersinnlicher Welten unentbehrlichen Vorsichtsmaßregeln gegen die Möglichkeit Von Täuschung und Phantastik. — Es gehört zu den unerlässlichsten Vorkehrungen, welche jeder Geistesschüler treffen muss, sorgfältig an sich zu arbeiten, um nicht zum Phantasten zu werden, zu einem Menschen, der einer möglichen Täuschung, Selbsttäuschung (Suggestion und Selbstsuggestion) verfallen kann. Wo die Anweisungen zur Geistesschulung recht befolgt werden, da werden zugleich die Quellen vernichtet, welche die Täuschung bringen können. Hier kann natürlich nicht ausführlich von all den zahlreichen Einzelheiten gesprochen werden, die bei solchen Vorkehrungen in Betracht kommen. Es kann nur angedeutet werden, worauf es ankommt. Täuschungen, welche hier in Betracht kommen, entspringen aus zwei Quellen. Sie rühren zum Teil davon her, dass man durch die eigene seelische Wesenheit die Wirklichkeit färbt. Im gewöhnlichen Leben der physisch-sinnlichen Welt ist diese Quelle der Täuschung von verhältnismäßig geringer Gefahr; denn hier wird sich die Außenwelt immer scharf in ihrer eigenen Gestalt der Beobachtung aufdrängen, wie sie auch der Beobachter nach seinen Wünschen und Interessen wird färben wollen. Sobald man jedoch die imaginative Weit betritt, verändern sich deren Bilder durch solche Wünsche und Interessen, und man hat wie eine Wirklichkeit vor sich, was man erst selbst gebildet oder wenigstens mitgebildet hat. Dadurch nun, dass durch die Begegnung mit dem «Hüter der Schwelle» der Geistesschüler alles kennenlernt, was in ihm ist, was er also in die seelisch-geistige Welt hineintragen kann, ist diese Quelle der Täuschung beseitigt. Und die Vorbereitung, welche der Geistesschüler vor dem Betreten der seelisch-geistigen Welt sich angedeihen lässt, wirkt ja dahin, dass er sich gewöhnt, schon bei der Beobachtung der sinnlich-physischen Welt sich selbst auszuschalten und die Dinge und Vorgänge rein durch ihre eigene Wesenheit auf sich einsprechen zu lassen. Wer diese Vorbereitung genügend durchgemacht hat, kann ruhig die Begegnung mit dem «Hüter der Schwelle» erwarten. Durch sie wird er sich endgültig prüfen, ob er sich nun wirklich in der Lage fühlt, seine eigene Wesenheit auch dann auszuschalten, wenn er der seelisch-geistigen Welt gegenübersteht.
[ 56 ] Außer dieser Quelle von Täuschungen gibt es nun noch eine andere. Sie tritt dann zutage, wenn man einen Eindruck, den man empfängt, unrichtig deutet. Im physisch-sinnlichen Leben ist ein einfaches Beispiel für solche Täuschung diejenige, welche entsteht, wenn man in einem Eisenbahnzuge sitzt und glaubt, die Bäume bewegen sich in der entgegengesetzten Richtung des Zuges, während man sich doch selbst mit dem Zuge bewegt. Obwohl es zahlreiche Fälle gibt, wo solche Täuschungen in der sinnlich-physischen Welt schwieriger richtigzustellen sind als in dem angeführten einfachen, so ist doch leicht einzusehen, dass innerhalb dieser Welt der Mensch auch die Mittel findet, solche Täuschungen hinwegzuschaffen, wenn er mit gesundem Urteil alles das in Betracht zieht, was der entsprechenden Aufklärung dienen kann. Anders steht die Sache allerdings, sobald man in die übersinnlichen Gebiete eindringt. In der sinnlichen Welt werden die Tatsachen durch die menschliche Täuschung nicht geändert; deshalb ist es möglich, durch eine unbefangene Beobachtung die Täuschung an den Tatsachen zu berichtigen. In der übersinnlichen Welt aber ist das nicht ohne weiteres möglich. Wenn man einen übersinnlichen Vorgang beobachten will und mit einem unrichtigen Urteile an ihn herantritt, so trägt man dieses unrichtige Urteil in ihn hinein; und es wird dieses mit der Tatsache so verwoben, dass es von ihr nicht sogleich zu unterscheiden ist. Der Irrtum ist dann nicht in dem Menschen und die richtige Tatsache außer demselben, sondern der Irrtum ist selbst zum Bestandteil der äußeren Tatsache gemacht. Er kann deshalb auch nicht einfach durch eine unbefangene Beobachtung der Tatsache berichtigt werden. Es ist damit auf dasjenige hingewiesen, was eine überreich fließende Quelle von Täuschung und Phantastik für denjenigen sein kann, welcher ohne die richtige Vorbereitung an die übersinnliche Welt herantritt. — Wie nun der Geistesschüler sich die Fähigkeit erwirbt, diejenigen Täuschungen auszuschließen, welche durch die Färbung der übersinnlichen Welterscheinungen mit der eigenen Wesenheit entstehen, so muss er auch die andere Gabe erlangen: die zweite charakterisierte Quelle der Täuschung unwirksam zu machen. Er kann ausschalten, was von ihm selbst kommt, wenn er erst das Bild des eigenen Doppelgängers erkannt hat; und er wird ausschalten können, was in der angegebenen Richtung eine zweite Täuschungsquelle ist, wenn er sich die Fähigkeit erwirbt, an der Beschaffenheit einer Tatsache der übersinnlichen Welt zu erkennen, ob sie Wirklichkeit oder Täuschung ist. Wenn die Täuschungen genau so aussehen würden wie die Wirklichkeiten, dann wäre eine Unterscheidung nicht möglich. So ist es aber nicht. Täuschungen der übersinnlichen Welten haben an sich selbst Eigenschaften, durch welche sie sich von den Wirklichkeiten unterscheiden. Und es kommt darauf an, dass der Geistesschüler weiß, an welchen Eigenschaften er die Wirklichkeiten erkennen kann. Nichts erscheint selbstverständlicher, als dass der Nichtkenner geistiger Schulung sagt: Wo gibt es denn überhaupt eine Möglichkeit, sich gegen Täuschung zu schützen, da die Quellen für dieselbe so zahlreich sind? Und wenn er weiter sagt: Ist denn überhaupt irgendein Geistesschüler davor sicher, dass nicht alle seine vermeintlichen höheren Erkenntnisse nur auf Täuschung und Selbsttäuschung (Suggestion und Autosuggestion) beruhen? Wer so spricht, berücksichtigt nicht, dass in jeder wahren Geistesschulung durch die ganze Art, wie diese verläuft, die Quellen der Täuschung verstopft werden. Erstens wird sich der wahre Geistesschüler durch seine Vorbereitung genügend viele Kenntnisse erwerben über alles das, was Täuschung und Selbsttäuschung herbeiführen kann, und sich dadurch in die Lage versetzen, sich vor ihnen zu hüten. Er hat in dieser Beziehung wirklich wie kein anderer Mensch Gelegenheit, sich nüchtern und urteilsfähig zu machen für den Gang des Lebens. Er wird durch alles, was er erfährt, veranlasst, nichts von unbestimmten Ahnungen, Eingebungen usw. zu halten. Die Schulung macht ihn so vorsichtig wie möglich. Dazu kommt, dass jede wahre Schulung zunächst zu Begriffen über die großen Weltereignisse, also zu Dingen führt, welche ein Anspannen der Urteilskraft notwendig machen, wodurch diese aber zugleich verfeinert und geschärft wird. Nur wer es ablehnen wollte, in solche entlegene Gebiete sich zu begeben, und sich nur an näherliegende «Offenbarungen» halten. wollte, dem könnte verlorengehen die Schärfung jener gesunden Urteilskraft, welche ihm Sicherheit gibt in der Unterscheidung zwischen Täuschung und Wirklichkeit. Doch alles dieses ist noch nicht das Wichtigste. Das Wichtigste liegt in den Übungen selbst, welche bei einer regelrechten Geistesschulung verwendet werden. Diese müssen nämlich so eingerichtet sein, dass das Bewusstsein des Geistesschülers während der inneren Versenkung genau alles überschaut, was in der Seele vorgeht. Zuerst wird für die Herbeiführung der Imagination ein Sinnbild geformt. In diesem sind noch Vorstellungen von äußeren Wahrnehmungen. Der Mensch ist nicht allein an ihrem Inhalte beteiligt; er macht ihn nicht selbst. Also kann er sich einer Täuschung darüber hingeben, wie er zustande kommt; er kann seinen Ursprung falsch deuten. Aber der Geistesschüler entfernt diesen Inhalt aus seinem Bewusstsein, wenn er zu den Übungen für die Inspiration aufsteigt. Da versenkt er sich nur noch in seine eigene Seelentätigkeit, welche das Sinnbild gestaltet hat. Auch da ist noch Irrtum möglich. Der Mensch hat sich durch Erziehung, Lernen usw. die Art seiner Seelentätigkeit angeeignet. Er kann nicht alles über ihren Ursprung wissen. Nun aber entfernt der Geistesschüler auch noch diese eigene Seelentätigkeit aus dem Bewusstsein. Wenn nun etwas bleibt, so haftet an diesem nichts, was nicht zu überschauen ist. In dieses kann sich nichts einmischen, was nicht in bezug auf seinen ganzen Inhalt zu beurteilen ist. In seiner Intuition hat also der Geistesschüler etwas, was ihm zeigt, wie eine ganz klare Wirklichkeit der geistig-seelischen Welt beschaffen ist. Wenn er nun die also erkannten Kennzeichen der geistig-seelischen Wirklichkeit auf alles anwendet, was an seine Beobachtung herantritt, dann kann er Schein von Wirklichkeit unterscheiden. Und er kann sicher sein, dass er bei Anwendung dieses Gesetzes vor der Täuschung in der übersinnlichen Welt ebenso bewahrt bleiben wird, wie es ihm in der physisch-sinnlichen Welt nicht geschehen kann, ein vorgestelltes heißes Eisenstück für ein solches zu halten, das wirklich brennt. Es ist selbstverständlich, dass man sich so nur zu denjenigen Erkenntnissen verhalten wird, welche man als seine eigenen Erlebnisse in den übersinnlichen Welten ansieht, und nicht zu denen, die man als Mitteilungen von anderen empfängt und welche man mit seinem physischen Verstande und seinem gesunden Wahrheitsgefühle begreift. Der Geistesschüler wird sich bemühen, eine genaue Grenzscheide zu ziehen zwischen dem, was er sich auf die eine, was auf die andere Art erworben hat. Er wird willig auf der einen Seite die Mitteilungen über die höheren Welten aufnehmen und sie durch seine Urteilsfähigkeit zu begreifen suchen. Wenn er aber etwas als Selbsterfahrung, als eine von ihm selbst gemachte Beobachtung bezeichnet, so wird er geprüft haben, ob ihm diese genau mit den Eigenschaften entgegengetreten ist, welche er an der untrügerischen Intuition wahrnehmen gelernt hat.
[ 57 ] Wenn der Geistesschüler die Begegnung mit dem gekennzeichneten «Hüter der Schwelle» hinter sich hat, dann stehen ihm beim Aufstieg in übersinnliche Welten weitere Erlebnisse bevor. Zunächst wird er bemerken, dass eine innere Verwandtschaft besteht zwischen diesem «Hüter der Schwelle» und jener Seelenkraft, die sich in der oben gegebenen Schilderung als die siebente ergeben und wie zu einer selbständigen Wesenheit gestaltet hat. Ja, diese siebente Wesenheit ist in gewisser Beziehung nichts anderes als der Doppelgänger, der «Hüter der Schwelle» selbst. Und sie stellt dem Geistesschüler eine besondere Aufgabe. Er hat das, was er in seinem gewöhnlichen Selbst ist und was ihm im Bilde erscheint, durch das neugeborene Selbst zu leiten und zu führen. Es wird sich eine Art von Kampf ergeben gegen den Doppelgänger. Derselbe wird fortwährend die Überhand anstreben. Sich in das rechte Verhältnis zu ihm setzen, ihn nichts tun lassen, was nicht unter dem Einflusse des neugeborenen «Ich» geschieht, das stärkt und festigt aber auch des Menschen Kräfte. — Nun ist es in der höheren Welt mit der Selbsterkenntnis nach einer gewissen Richtung hin anders als in der physisch-sinnlichen Welt. Während in der letzteren die Selbsterkenntnis nur als inneres Erlebnis auftritt, stellt sich das neugeborene Selbst sogleich als seelisch-äußere Erscheinung dar. Man sieht sein neugeborenes Selbst wie ein anderes Wesen vor sich. Aber man kann es nicht ganz wahrnehmen. Denn welche Stufe man auch erstiegen haben mag auf dem Wege in die übersinnlichen Welten hinauf: es gibt immer noch höhere Stufen. Auf solchen wird man immer noch mehr wahrnehmen von seinem «höheren Selbst». Es kann also dieses dem Geistesschüler auf irgendeiner Stufe nur teilweise sich enthüllen. Nun ist aber die Versuchung ungeheuer groß, welche den Menschen befällt, wenn er zuerst irgend etwas von seinem «höheren Selbst» gewahr wird, dieses «höhere Selbst» gleichsam von dem Standpunkte aus zu betrachten, welchen man in der physischsinnlichen Welt gewonnen hat. Diese Versuchung ist sogar gut, und sie muss eintreten, wenn die Entwicklung richtig vor sich gehen soll. Man muss das betrachten, was als der Doppelgänger, der «Hüter der Schwelle», auftritt, und es vor das «höhere Selbst» stellen, damit man den Abstand bemerken kann zwischen dem, was man ist, und dem, was man werden soll. Bei dieser Betrachtung beginnt der «Hüter der Schwelle» aber eine ganz andere Gestalt anzunehmen. Er stellt sich dar als ein Bild aller der Hindernisse, welche sich der Entwicklung des «höheren Selbst» entgegenstellen. Man wird wahrnehmen, welche Last man an dem gewöhnlichen Selbst schleppt. Und ist man dann durch seine Vorbereitungen nicht stark genug, sich zu sagen: Ich werde hier nicht stehenbleiben, sondern unablässig mich zu dem «höheren Selbst» hinaufentwickeln, so wird man erlahmen und zurückschrecken vor dem, was bevorsteht. Man ist dann in die seelisch-geistige Welt hineingetaucht, gibt es aber auf, sich weiterzuarbeiten. Man wird ein Gefangener der Gestalt, die jetzt durch den «Hüter der Schwelle» vor der Seele steht. Das Bedeutsame ist, dass man bei diesem Erlebnis nicht die Empfindung hat, ein Gefangener zu sein. Man wird vielmehr etwas ganz anderes zu erleben glauben. Die Gestalt, welche der «Hüter der Schwelle» hervorruft, kann so sein, dass sie in der Seele des Beobachters den Eindruck hervorbringt, dieser habe nun in den Bildern, welche auf dieser Entwicklungsstufe auftreten, schon den ganzen Umfang aller nur möglichen Welten vor sich; man sei auf dem Gipfel der Erkenntnis angekommen und brauche nicht weiter zu streben. Statt als Gefangener wird man sich so als der unermesslich reiche Besitzer aller Weltengeheimnisse fühlen können. Darüber, dass man ein solches Erlebnis haben kann, welches das Gegenteil des wahren Tatbestandes darstellt, wird sich derjenige nicht verwundern, welcher bedenkt, dass man ja dann, wenn man dies erlebt, bereits in der seelisch-geistigen Welt steht, und dass es Eigentümlichkeit dieser Welt ist, dass in ihr sich die Ereignisse umgekehrt darstellen können. In diesem Buche ist auf diese Tatsache bei der Betrachtung des Lebens nach dem Tode hingewiesen worden.
[ 58 ] Die Gestalt, welche man auf dieser Stufe der Entwicklung wahrnimmt, zeigt dem Geistesschüler noch etwas anderes als diejenige, in der sich ihm zuerst der «Hüter der Schwelle» dargestellt hat. In diesem Doppelgänger waren wahrzunehmen alle diejenigen Eigenschaften, welche das gewöhnliche Selbst des Menschen hat infolge des Einflusses der Kräfte des Luzifer. Nun ist aber im Laufe der menschlichen Entwicklung durch den Einfluss Luzifers eine andere Macht in die Menschenseele eingezogen. Es ist diejenige, welche als die Kraft Ahrimans in früheren Abschnitten dieses Buches bezeichnet ist. Es ist dies die Kraft, welche den Menschen im physisch-sinnlichen Dasein verhindert, die hinter der Oberfläche des Sinnlichen liegenden geistigseelischen Wesenheiten der Außenwelt wahrzunehmen. Was unter dem Einflusse dieser Kraft aus der Menschenseele geworden ist, das zeigt im Bilde die Gestalt, welche bei dem charakterisierten Erlebnisse auftritt. — Wer entsprechend vorbereitet an dieses Erlebnis herantritt, der wird ihm seine wahre Deutung geben; und dann wird sich bald eine andere Gestalt zeigen, diejenige, welche man den «großen Hüter der Schwelle» im Gegensatz zu dem gekennzeichneten «kleinen Hüter» nennen kann.. Dieser teilt dem Geistesschüler mit, dass er nicht stehenzubleiben hat auf dieser Stufe, sondern energisch weiterzuarbeiten. Er ruft in dem Beobachter das Bewusstsein hervor, dass die Welt, die erobert ist, nur eine Wahrheit wird und sich in keine Illusion verwandelt, wenn die Arbeit in entsprechender Art fortgesetzt wird. — Wer aber durch eine unrichtige Geistesschulung unvorbereitet an dieses Erlebnis herantreten würde, dem würde sich dann, wenn er an den «großen Hüter der Schwelle» kommt, etwas in die Seele gießen, was nur mit dem «Gefühle eines unermesslichen Schreckens», einer «grenzenlosen Furcht» verglichen werden kann.
[ 59 ] Wie die Begegnung mit dem «kleinen Hüter der Schwelle» dem Geistesschüler die Möglichkeit gibt, sich zu prüfen, ob er gegen Täuschungen geschützt ist, welche durch Hineintragen seiner Wesenheit in die übersinnliche Welt entstehen können, so kann er sich an den Erlebnissen, die zuletzt zu dem «großen Hüter der Schwelle» führen, prüfen, ob er jenen Täuschungen gewachsen ist, welche oben auf die zweite gekennzeichnete Quelle zurückgeführt wurden. Vermag er jener gewaltigen Illusion Widerstand zu bieten, welche ihm die errungene Bilderwelt als einen reichen Besitz vorgaukelt, während er doch nur ein Gefangener ist, so ist er im weiteren Verlauf seiner Entwicklung auch davor bewahrt, Schein für Wirklichkeit zu nehmen.
[ 60 ] Der «Hüter der Schwelle» wird für jeden einzelnen Menschen eine individuelle Gestalt bis zu einem gewissen Grade annehmen. Die Begegnung mit ihm entspricht ja gerade demjenigen Erlebnis, durch welches der persönliche Charakter der übersinnlichen Beobachtungen überwunden und die Möglichkeit gegeben wird, in eine Region des Erlebens einzutreten, die von persönlicher Färbung frei und für jede Menschenwesenheit gültig ist.
[ 61 ] Wenn der Geistesschüler die beschriebenen Erlebnisse gehabt hat, dann ist er fähig, in der seelisch-geistigen Umwelt dasjenige, was er selbst ist, von dem, was außer ihm ist, zu unterscheiden. Er wird dann erkennen, wie das Verständnis des in diesem Buche geschilderten Weltprozesses notwendig ist, um den Menschen und dessen Leben selbst zu verstehen. Man versteht ja den physischen Leib nur, wenn man erkennt, wie er sich aufgebaut hat durch die Saturn-, Sonnen-, Mondenund Erdenentwicklung. Man versteht den Ätherleib; wenn man seine Bildung durch Sonnen-, Mondenund Erdenentwicklung verfolgt usw. Man versteht aber auch dasjenige, was gegenwärtig mit der Erdenentwicklung zusammenhängt, wenn man erkennt, wie sich alles nach und nach entfaltet hat. Man wird durch die Geistesschulung in den Stand gesetzt, das Verhältnis von allem, was am Menschen ist, zu entsprechenden Tatsachen und Wesenheiten der außer dem Menschen befindlichen Welt zu erkennen. Denn so ist es: jedes Glied am Menschen steht in einem Verhältnis zu der ganzen übrigen Welt. In diesem Buche konnten darüber ja nur die Andeutungen im skizzenhaften Umriss gemacht werden. Man muss aber bedenken, dass zum Beispiel der physische Menschenleib während der Saturnentwicklung nur in der ersten Anlage vorhanden war. Seine Organe: das Herz, die Lunge, das Gehirn haben sich später, während der Sonnen-, Mondenund Erdenzeit, aus den ersten Anlagen herausgebildet. So also stehen Herz, Lunge, usw. in Beziehungen zu Sonnen-, Mondenentwicklung, Erdenentwicklung. Ganz entsprechend ist es mit den Gliedern des Ätherleibes, des Empfindungsleibes, der Empfindungsseele usw. Es ist der Mensch aus der ganzen, ihm zunächst liegenden Welt herausgestaltet; und jede Einzelheit, die an ihm ist, entspricht einem Vorgange, einem Wesen der Außenwelt. Der Geistesschüler kommt auf der entsprechenden Stufe seiner Entwicklung dazu, dieses Verhältnis seines eigenen Wesens zur großen Welt zu erkennen. Und man kann diese Erkenntnisstufe das Gewahrwerden nennen des Entsprechens der «kleinen Welt», des Mikrokosmos, das ist des Menschen selbst, und der «großen Welt», des Makrokosmos. Wenn der Geistesschüler bis zu solcher Erkenntnis sich durchgerungen hat, dann kann für ihn ein neues Erlebnis eintreten. Er fängt an, sich wie mit dem ganzen Weltenbau verwachsen zu fühlen, trotzdem er sich in seiner vollen Selbständigkeit empfindet. Es ist diese Empfindung ein Aufgehen in die ganze Welt, ein Einswerden mit derselben, aber ohne die eigene Wesenheit zu verlieren. Man kann diese Entwicklungsstufe als «Einswerden mit dem Makrokosmos» bezeichnen. Es ist bedeutsam, dass man dieses Einswerden nicht so zu denken hat, als wenn durch dasselbe das Sonderbewusstsein aufhören und die menschliche Wesenheit in das All ausfließen würde. Es wäre ein solcher Gedanke nur der Ausdruck einer aus ungeschulter Urteilskraft fließenden Meinung. Die einzelnen Stufen der höheren Erkenntnis im Sinne jenes Einweihungsvorganges, der hier beschrieben worden ist, können nun in der folgenden Art bezeichnet werden:
- Das Studium der Geisteswissenschaft, wobei man sich zunächst der Urteilskraft bedient, welche man in der physischsinnlichen Welt gewonnen hat.
- Die Erwerbung der imaginativen Erkenntnis.
- Das Lesen der verborgenen Schrift (entsprechend der Inspiration).
- Das Sicheinleben in die geistige Umgebung (entsprechend der Intuition).
- Die Erkenntnis der Verhältnisse von Mikrokosmos und Makrokosmos.
- Das Einswerden mit dem Makrokosmos.
- Das Gesamterleben der vorherigen Erfahrungen als eine Grund-Seelenstimmung.
[ 62 ] Diese Stufen brauchen aber nicht etwa so gedacht zu werden, dass sie nacheinander durchgemacht werden. Die Schulung kann vielmehr so verlaufen, dass je nach der Individualität des Geistesschülers eine vorhergehende Stufe nur bis zu einem gewissen Grade durchschritten ist, wenn er beginnt, Übungen zu machen, welche der folgenden Stufe entsprechen. Es kann zum Beispiel ganz gut sein, dass man erst einige Imaginationen in sicherer Art gewonnen hat und doch schon Übungen macht, welche die Inspiration, die Intuition oder die Erkenntnis vom Zusammenhange des Mikrokosmos und Makrokosmos in den Bereich des eigenen Erlebens ziehen.
[ 63 ] Wenn der Geistesschüler sich ein Erlebnis von der Intuition verschafft hat, so kennt er nicht nur die Bilder der seelischgeistigen Welt, er kann nicht nur ihre Beziehungen in der «verborgenen Schrift» lesen: er kommt zu der Erkenntnis der Wesen selbst, durch deren Zusammenwirken die Welt zustande kommt, welcher der Mensch angehört. Und er lernt dadurch sich selbst in derjenigen Gestalt kennen, die er als geistiges Wesen in der seelisch-geistigen Welt hat. Er hat sich zu einer Wahrnehmung seines höheren Ich durchgerungen, und er hat bemerkt, wie er weiter zu arbeiten hat, um seinen Doppelgänger, den «Hüter der Schwelle», zu beherrschen. Er hat aber auch die Begegnung gehabt mit dem «großen Hüter der Schwelle», der vor ihm steht wie ein stetiger Aufforderer, weiterzuarbeiten. Dieser «große Hüter der Schwelle» wird nun sein Vorbild, dem er nachstreben will. Wenn diese Empfindung in dem Geistesschüler auftritt, dann hat er die Möglichkeit erlangt zu erkennen, wer da eigentlich als der «große Hüter der Schwelle» vor ihm steht. Es verwandelt sich nämlich nunmehr dieser Hüter in der Wahrnehmung des Geistesschülers in die Christusgestalt, deren Wesenheit und Eingreifen in die Erdenentwicklung aus den vorhergehenden Kapiteln dieses Buches ersichtlich ist. Der Geistesschüler wird dadurch in das erhabene Geheimnis selbst eingeweiht, das mit dem Christus-Namen verknüpft ist. Der Christus zeigt sich ihm als das «große menschliche Erdenvorbild». — Ist auf solche Art durch Intuition der Christus in der geistigen Welt erkannt, dann wird auch verständlich, was sich auf der Erde geschichtlich abgespielt hat in der vierten nachatlantischen Entwicklungsperiode der Erde (in der griechisch-lateinischen Zeit). Wie zu dieser Zeit das hohe Sonnenwesen, das Christus-Wesen, in die Erdenentwicklung eingegriffen hat, und wie es nun weiter wirkt innerhalb dieser Erdenentwicklung, das wird für den Geistesschüler eine selbsterlebte Erkenntnis. Es ist also ein Aufschluss über den Sinn und die Bedeutung der Erdenentwicklung, welchen der Geistesschüler erhält durch die Intuition.
[ 64 ] Der hiermit geschilderte Weg zur Erkenntnis der übersinnlichen Welten ist ein solcher, welchen ein jeder Mensch gehen kann, in welcher Lage er sich auch innerhalb der gegenwärtigen Lebensbedingungen befindet. Wenn von einem solchen Wege die Rede ist, so muss man bedenken, dass das Ziel der Erkenntnis und Wahrheit zu allen Zeiten der Erdenentwicklung dasselbe ist, dass aber die Ausgangspunkte des Menschen zu verschiedenen Zeiten verschiedene waren. Der Mensch kann gegenwärtig nicht von demselben Ausgangspunkte ausgehen, wenn er den Weg in die übersinnlichen Gebiete betreten will, wie zum Beispiel der alte ägyptische Einzuweihende. Daher lassen sich die Übungen, welche dem Geistesschüler im alten Ägypten auferlegt wurden, nicht ohne weiteres von dem gegenwärtigen Menschen ausführen. Seit jener Zeit sind die menschlichen Seelen durch verschiedene Verkörperungen hindurchgegangen; und dieses Weiterschreiten von Verkörperung zu Verkörperung ist nicht ohne Sinn und Bedeutung. Die Fähigkeiten und Eigenschaften der Seelen ändern sich von Verkörperung zu Verkörperung. Wer das menschliche, geschichtliche Leben auch nur oberflächlich betrachtet, kann bemerken, dass seit dem zwölften und dreizehnten Jahrhundert nach Christus sich gegen früher alle Lebensbedingungen geändert haben, dass Meinungen, Gefühle, aber auch Fähigkeiten der Menschen anders geworden sind, als sie vorher waren. Der hier beschriebene Weg zur höheren Erkenntnis ist nun ein solcher, welcher für Seelen tauglich ist, welche in der unmittelbaren Gegenwart sich verkörpern. Er ist so, dass er den Ausgangspunkt der geistigen Entwicklung da ansetzt, wo der Mensch in der Gegenwart steht, wenn er in irgendwelchen durch diese Gegenwart ihm gegebenen Lebensverhältnissen sich befindet. — Die fortschreitende Entwicklung führt die Menschheit in bezug auf die Wege zu höherer Erkenntnis ebenso von Zeitabschnitt zu Zeitabschnitt zu immer anderen Formen, wie auch das äußere Leben seine Gestaltungen ändert. Und es muss ja auch jederzeit ein vollkommener Einklang herrschen zwischen dem äußeren Leben und der Einweihung.
The Realization of the Higher Worlds
(On Initiation)
[ 1 ] Between birth and death, man experiences three states of soul in his present stage of development in ordinary life: waking, sleep and, between the two, the dream state. The latter will be briefly alluded to later in this book. Here, life may first be considered in its two alternating main states, waking and sleeping. - Man attains knowledge in higher worlds when he acquires a third state of soul in addition to sleeping and waking. During waking, the soul is devoted to the sensory impressions and the ideas which are stimulated by these sensory impressions. During sleep, the sensory impressions are silent; but the soul also loses consciousness. The experiences of the day sink down into the sea of unconsciousness. - Now think of it: the soul could become conscious during sleep, even though the impressions of the senses remain switched off, as otherwise in deep sleep. Yes, even the memory of the day's experiences would not be present. Would the soul now be in a void? Could it have no experiences at all? - An answer to this question is only possible if a state can really be created that is the same or similar to this one. If the soul can experience something, even if no sensory effects and no memories of such effects are present in it. Then the soul would be as if asleep in relation to the ordinary external world; and yet it would not be asleep, but would face a real world as if it were awake. - Now such a state of consciousness can be produced if man brings about those experiences of the soul which spiritual science makes possible for him. And everything that spiritual science communicates about those worlds that lie beyond the sensory is explored through such a state of consciousness. - In the preceding remarks some information has been given about higher worlds. In the following, the means by which the state of consciousness necessary for this research is created will also be discussed, insofar as this can be done in this book.
[ 2 ] Only in one direction does this state of consciousness resemble sleep, namely in that through it all external sensory effects cease; also all thoughts that are stimulated by these sensory effects are extinguished. But while in sleep the soul has no power to consciously experience anything, it should receive this power through this state of consciousness. Through it, therefore, the ability to experience is awakened in the soul, which in ordinary existence is only stimulated by the effects of the senses. The awakening of the soul to such a higher state of consciousness can be called initiation.
[ 3 ] The means of initiation lead the human being from the ordinary state of day-consciousness into such a soul activity through which he makes use of spiritual tools of observation. These tools are present in the soul beforehand like germs. These germs must be developed. - Now it can happen that a person at a certain point in his life makes the discovery in his soul without any special preparation that such higher tools have developed in him. A kind of involuntary self-awakening has then occurred. Such a person will find his whole being transformed as a result. An unlimited enrichment of his soul experiences will occur. And he will find that through no knowledge of the sense world can he feel such bliss, such a satisfying state of mind and inner warmth as through that which opens up to a knowledge that is not accessible to the physical eye. Strength and certainty of life will flow into his will from a spiritual world. - There are such cases of self-initiation. However, they should not lead one to believe that the only right thing to do is to wait for such a self-initiation and do nothing to bring about the initiation through proper training. There is no need to talk about self-initiation here, as it can occur without observing any rules. However, it will be shown how one can develop the organs of perception germinating in the soul through training. People who feel no particular impulse within themselves to do something for their own development will easily say that human life is under the guidance of spiritual powers and that we should not interfere with their guidance; we should wait quietly for the moment when those powers deem it right to open up another world for the soul. It is probably also felt by such people as a kind of presumption, or as an unjustified desire to interfere with the wisdom of spiritual guidance. Personalities who think in this way are only led to a different opinion when a certain idea makes a sufficiently strong impression on them. When they say to themselves: That wise guidance has given me certain abilities; it has not given them to me so that I may leave them unused, but so that I may use them. The wisdom of the guidance consists in the fact that it has planted the seeds in me for a higher state of consciousness. I only understand this guidance if I feel it is my duty to reveal everything to man that can be revealed through his spiritual powers. When such a thought has made a sufficiently strong impression on the soul, then the above objections to training for a higher state of consciousness will disappear.
[ 4 ] However, there may be another objection to such training. One can say to oneself: "The development of inner soul abilities intervenes in the most hidden sanctuary of the human being. It involves a certain transformation of the whole human being. Naturally, one cannot devise the means for such a transformation oneself. For only those who know the path to a higher world as their own experience can know how to reach it. If one turns to such a personality, one allows him to influence the most hidden sanctuary of the soul." - Those who think in this way could not be particularly reassured if the means to bring about a higher state of consciousness were presented to them in a book. For it does not matter whether one is told something orally or whether a personality who has the knowledge of these means presents them in a book and another person learns them from it. There are now such personalities who possess the knowledge of the rules for the development of the spiritual organs of perception and who hold the view that these rules should not be entrusted to a book. Such people usually also regard the communication of certain truths relating to the spiritual world as inadmissible. However, this view must in some respects be considered outdated in the present age of human development. It is true that one can only go so far in communicating the relevant rules. However, what has been communicated leads so far that the person who applies it to his soul reaches a point in the development of knowledge where he can then find the way forward. This path then leads on in a way that can only be correctly understood through what has been experienced beforehand. All these facts can give rise to reservations about the spiritual path of knowledge. These misgivings disappear when one considers the nature of the course of development which the training appropriate to our age outlines. We will speak of this path here and only briefly refer to other trainings.
[ 5 ] The training to be discussed here provides those who have the will for their higher development with the means to undertake the transformation of their soul. There would only be a questionable interference in the being of the pupil if the teacher were to carry out this transformation by means that are beyond the consciousness of the pupil. However, no proper instruction of spiritual development in our age makes use of such means. It does not turn the pupil into a blind tool. It gives him the rules of conduct, and the pupil carries them out. When it comes down to it, there is no concealment of why this or that rule of conduct is given. The acceptance of the rules and their application by a personality seeking spiritual development need not be based on blind faith. Such a belief should be completely excluded in this area. Anyone who observes the nature of the human soul, insofar as it is already apparent through ordinary self-observation without spiritual training, can ask himself after receiving the rules recommended by spiritual training: how can these rules work in the life of the soul? And this question can be answered sufficiently, before all training, with the unbiased application of common sense. One can form correct ideas about the effect of these rules before giving oneself over to them. However, one can only experience this mode of action during the training. But even then, the experience will always be accompanied by the understanding of this experience, if one accompanies every step to be taken with sound judgment. And at the present time a true spiritual science will only give such rules for the training against which such sound judgment can assert itself. Whoever is willing to devote himself only to such training, and whoever does not allow himself to be driven by any bias to a blind faith, all doubts will disappear. Objections against a proper training to a higher state of consciousness will not bother him.
[ 6 ] Even for such a personality, which has the inner maturity that can lead it in a shorter or longer time to the self-awakening of the spiritual organs of perception, a training is not superfluous, but on the contrary, it is particularly suitable for it. For there are only a few cases in which such a personality does not have to go through the most manifold crooked and futile side paths before self-initiation. The training spares him these side paths. It leads forward in a straight direction. If such a self-initiation occurs for this soul, it is because the soul has acquired the corresponding maturity in previous lives. It is very easy for such a soul to have a certain dark feeling about its maturity and to reject training because of this feeling. Such a feeling can create a certain arrogance, which hinders trust in genuine spiritual training. A certain stage of soul development can remain hidden until a certain age and only then emerge. But training can be just the right means to bring it to the fore. If a person then closes himself off to the training, it is possible that his ability remains hidden in the course of life in question and only emerges again in one of the next courses of life.
[ 7 ] With regard to the training for extrasensory cognition meant here, it is important not to allow certain obvious misunderstandings to arise. One can arise from the fact that one thinks that the training is intended to make man into a different being with regard to his whole way of life. But it is not a question of giving man general rules of life, but of speaking to him of soul activities which, when he carries them out, give him the possibility of observing the supersensible. These activities have no direct influence on that part of his life which lies outside the observation of the supersensible. In addition to these life activities, man acquires the gift of supersensible observation. The activity of this observation is as separate from the ordinary activities of life as the state of waking is from that of sleep. The one cannot disturb the other in the least. For example, anyone who wanted to enforce the ordinary course of life through impressions of supersensible vision would be like an unhealthy person whose sleep would be continually interrupted by harmful awakenings. It must be possible for the free will of the trained person to bring about the state of observing supersensible reality. Indirectly, however, the training is connected with the rules of life in so far as without a certain ethically attuned way of life an insight into the supersensible is impossible or harmful. And that is why many things that lead to an insight into the supersensible are at the same time a means of refining the conduct of life. On the other hand, through insight into the supersensible world one recognizes higher moral impulses that also apply to the sensual-physical world. Certain moral necessities are only recognized from this world. - A second misunderstanding would be to believe that any soul activity leading to supersensible cognition has anything to do with a change in the physical organization. On the contrary, such processes have not the slightest connection with anything into which physiology or any other branch of natural knowledge has any say. They are purely spiritual-soul processes that are as completely divorced from the physical as healthy thinking and perception itself. Nothing else happens in the soul through such an activity than what happens when it imagines or judges healthily. As much and as little as healthy thinking has to do with the body, as much and as little do the processes of genuine training for supersensible knowledge have to do with it. Everything that behaves differently towards man is not true spiritual training, but a distorted image of it. The following remarks are to be taken in the sense of what has been said here. Only because supersensible knowledge is something that emanates from the whole soul of man will it appear as if things are required for training that make something else out of man. In truth, it is a matter of information about activities that enable the soul to bring about such moments in its life in which it can observe the supersensible.
[ 8 ] The elevation to a supersensible state of consciousness can only start from the ordinary waking day consciousness. The soul lives in this consciousness before its elevation. It is given means through training that lead it out of this consciousness. Among the first means, the training under consideration here gives those which can still be characterized as activities of the ordinary day consciousness. The most important means are those that consist of quiet activities of the soul. It is a matter of the soul devoting itself to certain ideas. These ideas are those which, by their very nature, exert an awakening power on certain hidden faculties of the human soul. They differ from the imaginations of waking daily life, which have the task of depicting an external thing. The truer they do this, the truer they are. And it is part of their nature to be true in this sense. The imaginations to which the soul should devote itself for the purpose of spiritual training do not have such a task. They are designed in such a way that they do not depict an exterior, but have the intrinsic quality of having an awakening effect on the soul. The best ideas for this are allegorical or symbolic ones. However, other images can also be used. For it is not at all important what the ideas contain, but only that the soul directs all its forces towards having nothing else in consciousness than the idea in question. Whereas in the ordinary life of the soul its powers are distributed over many things and the ideas change rapidly, in the training of the spirit it is a matter of concentrating the whole life of the soul on one idea. And this idea must be brought to the center of consciousness through free will. Symbolic ideas are therefore better than those that depict external objects or processes, because the latter have their point of reference in the outside world and therefore the soul has less to rely on itself alone than in the case of symbolic ideas that are formed out of the soul's own energy. It is not what is imagined that is essential, but the fact that the imagined detaches the soul from any connection to the physical through the way it is imagined.
[ 9 ] One arrives at a grasp of this immersion in an imagination when one first calls the concept of memory before the soul. For example, if one has directed the eye towards a tree and then turns away from the tree so that one can no longer see it, one is able to reawaken the idea of the tree from memory in the soul. This image of the tree, which you have when it is not in front of your eyes, is a memory of the tree. Now think of keeping this memory in the soul; let the soul rest, as it were, on the memory-image; endeavor to exclude all other ideas. Then the soul is immersed in the memory of the tree. One then has to do with an immersion of the soul in an imagination; but this imagination is the image of a thing perceived by the senses. But if you do the same with an idea that has been brought into consciousness through free will, you will gradually be able to achieve the effect that matters.
[ 10 ] An example of inner immersion with a symbolic imagination will now be illustrated. First of all, such an image must be built up in the soul. This can be done in the following way: Imagine a plant as it takes root in the ground, as it sprouts leaf after leaf, as it unfolds into a flower. And now imagine a person standing next to this plant. Bring to life the thought in his soul of how man has qualities and abilities that can be called more perfect than those of the plant. Consider how he can move here and there according to his feelings and his will, while the plant is bound to the ground. But now also say to yourself: yes, man is certainly more perfect than the plant; but in return I also notice qualities in him which I do not perceive in the plant, and because of their absence it can appear to me in certain respects more perfect than man. Man is filled with desires and passions; he follows these in his behavior. In his case I can speak of aberrations caused by his instincts and passions. With the plant I see how it follows the pure laws of growth from leaf to leaf, how it opens its blossom dispassionately to the chaste rays of the sun. I can say to myself: man has a certain perfection before the plant; but he has bought this perfection by adding instincts, desires and passions to the forces of the plant that seem pure to me. I now imagine that the green colored sap flows through the plant and that this is the expression of the pure, passionless laws of growth. And then I imagine how the red blood flows through the veins of the human being and how this is the expression of the drives, desires and passions. I let all this arise as a vivid thought in my soul. Then I further imagine how man is capable of development; how he can purify and cleanse his drives and passions through his higher soul faculties. I imagine how this destroys a base in these drives and passions and how they are reborn on a higher level. Then the blood can be presented as the expression of the purified and cleansed instincts and passions. For example, I now look at the rose in my mind and say to myself: in the red rose leaf I see the color of the green sap transformed into red; and the red rose, like the green leaf, follows the pure, passionless laws of growth. May the red of the rose now become for me the symbol of such a blood, which is the expression of purified drives and passions that have cast off the baseness and in their purity resemble the forces at work in the red rose. I now try not only to process such thoughts in my mind, but to bring them to life in my feelings. I can have a blissful sensation when I imagine the purity and passionlessness of the growing plant; I can create the feeling in me of how certain higher perfections must be purchased through the acquisition of instincts and desires. This can transform the bliss I felt before into a serious feeling; and then a feeling of liberating happiness can stir within me when I surrender to the thought of the red blood, which can become the bearer of pure inner experiences, like the red juice of the rose. It is important that one does not numbly confront the thoughts that serve to build up a symbolic image. After having indulged in such thoughts and feelings, transform them into the following symbolic image. Imagine a black cross. Let this be the symbol of the destroyed baseness of the impulses and passions; and where the beams of the cross intersect, imagine seven red, radiant roses arranged in a circle. These roses are the symbol for a blood that is the expression of purified, cleansed passions and instincts.1It does not matter to what extent this or that scientific conception finds the above thoughts justified or not. For it is a question of the development of such thoughts about plants and man, which, without any theory, can be gained by simple, direct observation. After all, such thoughts also have their significance alongside the theoretical ideas about the things of the outside world, which are no less important in other respects. And here the thoughts are not there to scientifically represent a fact, but to build up a symbolic image that proves to be effective in the soul, regardless of what objections this or that personality may come up with when building up this symbolic image. Such a symbolic image should now be called before the soul in the way that is illustrated above with a memory image. Such an image has a soul-awakening power if one surrenders to it in inner contemplation. One must try to exclude any other imagination during contemplation. Only the characterized symbol should hover in the mind before the soul, as vividly as this is possible. - It is not insignificant that this symbol has not simply been mentioned here as an awakening idea, but that it has only been built up through certain ideas about plants and man. For the effect of such a symbol depends on the fact that one has put it together in the way described before using it for inner contemplation. If one imagines it without having gone through such a construction in one's own soul, it remains cold and much less effective than if it has received its soul-illuminating power through preparation. During contemplation, however, you should not call all the preparatory thoughts into your soul, but merely have the image floating vividly before you in your mind, allowing the sensation that has arisen as a result of the preparatory thoughts to resonate. In this way, the symbol becomes a sign alongside the sensory experience. And it is in the lingering of the soul in this experience that it is effective. The longer one can dwell without any other disturbing idea interfering, the more effective the whole process is. However, it is good if, in addition to the time you devote to the actual immersion, you often repeat the structure of the image through thoughts and feelings of the kind described above, so that the sensation does not fade. The more patience one has for such a renewal, the more significant the image is for the soul. (In the discussions of my book: "How does one attain knowledge of the higher worlds?" other examples of means for inner contemplation are given. Particularly effective are the meditations characterized there on the growth and decay of a plant, on the forces of development slumbering in a plant seed, on the forms of crystals, etc. Here in this book, the essence of meditation should be shown by means of an example.)
[ 11 ] A symbol such as the one described here does not depict an external thing or being produced by nature. But this is precisely why it has its power to awaken certain purely spiritual abilities. However, someone could raise an objection. He could say: Certainly, the "whole", as a symbol, is not present through nature; but all the details are borrowed from this nature: the black color, the roses and so on. All this is perceived through the senses. Whoever is disturbed by such an objection should consider that it is not the images of the sensory perceptions that lead to the awakening of the higher faculties of the soul, but that this effect is merely caused by the kind of combination of these details. And this combination does not represent something that is present in the sensory world.
[ 12 ] The process of effective immersion of the soul should be illustrated using a symbol as an example. In spiritual training, the most diverse images of this kind can be used and these can be constructed in the most diverse ways. Certain sentences, formulas and individual words can also be given to immerse oneself in. In any case, these means of inner contemplation will have the aim of tearing the soul away from sensory perception and stimulating it to such an activity in which the impression on the physical senses is meaningless and the unfolding of inner dormant soul abilities becomes the essential thing. It can also be a matter of immersion in feelings, sensations, etc. This proves to be particularly effective. Take for example the feeling of joy. In the normal course of life the soul may experience joy if an external stimulus to joy is present. If a healthy soul perceives how a person performs an action which gives him the goodness of his heart, this soul will be pleased, will take pleasure in such an action. But this soul can now reflect on an action of this kind. It can say to itself: An action that is performed out of the goodness of the heart is one in which the performer does not follow his own interests, but the interests of his fellow human being. And such an act can be called a morally good one. Now, however, the contemplating soul can free itself entirely from the idea of the individual case in the external world which has given it joy or pleasure, and it can form the comprehensive idea of the goodness of the heart. It can imagine how goodness of heart arises when one soul absorbs the interest of another, as it were, and makes it its own. And the soul can now feel the joy of this moral idea of goodness of heart. This is not joy in this or that process of the sensory world, but joy in an idea as such. If one tries to keep such joy alive in the soul for a longer period of time, then this is immersion in a feeling, in a sensation. It is then not the idea that is effective in awakening the soul's inner faculties, but rather the long-lasting activity of the feeling within the soul that is not stimulated by a single external impression. - Since supersensible knowledge is able to penetrate deeper into the essence of things than ordinary imagination, sensations can be indicated from its experiences which have a much greater effect on the development of the soul's faculties when they are used for inner contemplation. As necessary as the latter is for higher degrees of training, it should be borne in mind that energetic immersion in such feelings and sensations, such as those characterized by the contemplation of the goodness of the heart, can already lead very far. - Since people's natures are different, different means of training are effective for different people. - As far as the length of time for contemplation is concerned, it should be borne in mind that the more serene and prudent this contemplation can be, the greater the effect. However, any exaggeration in this direction should be avoided. A certain inner rhythm, which results from the exercises themselves, can teach the student what he has to adhere to in this respect.
[ 13 ] As a rule, one will have to perform such exercises of inner contemplation for a long time before one can perceive their results oneself. Patience and perseverance are essential for training the mind. Those who do not awaken these two in themselves and do not do their exercises so calmly and continuously that patience and perseverance always form the basic mood of their soul cannot achieve much.
[ 14 ] It is evident from the foregoing description that inner contemplation (meditation) is a means of attaining knowledge of higher worlds, but also that not just any imaginative content leads to this, but only one that is directed in the manner described.
[ 15 ] The path referred to here first leads to what can be called imaginative cognition. It is the first higher level of cognition. Cognition that is based on sensory perception and on the processing of sensory perceptions by the mind bound to the senses can - in the sense of spiritual science - be called "objective cognition". Beyond this lie the higher levels of cognition, the first of which is imaginative cognition. The term "imaginative" could raise doubts in someone who thinks of "imagination" as merely an "imaginary" conception that corresponds to nothing real. In spiritual science, however, "imaginative" cognition should be understood as that which comes about through a supersensible state of consciousness of the soul. What is perceived in this state of consciousness are spiritual facts and entities to which the senses have no access. Because this state is awakened in the soul through immersion in symbolic images or "imaginations", the world of this higher state of consciousness can also be called the "imaginative" and the knowledge relating to it the "imaginative". "Imaginative" thus means something that is "real" in a different sense than the facts and entities of physical sense perception. Nothing depends on the content of the ideas that fulfill the imaginative experience; on the other hand, everything depends on the capacity of the soul that is formed by this experience.
[ 16 ] A very obvious objection to the use of the characterized symbolic ideas is that their formation springs from dreamy thinking and an arbitrary imagination and that they can therefore only be of dubious success. The misgivings expressed in this way are unjustified with regard to the allegories on which the proper training of the mind is based. For the symbolic images are chosen in such a way that their relationship to an external sensory reality can be completely disregarded and their value can only be sought in the power with which they act on the soul when it withdraws all attention from the external world, when it suppresses all impressions of the senses and also eliminates all thoughts that it can harbor in response to external stimulation. The process of meditation is most clearly illustrated by comparing it with the state of sleep. On the one hand it is similar to sleep, on the other it is completely opposite. It is a sleep that represents a higher awakening compared to daytime consciousness. The point is that by concentrating on the corresponding imagination or image, the soul is compelled to draw much stronger forces from its own depths than it uses in ordinary life or ordinary cognition. This increases its inner agility. It detaches itself from corporeality as it detaches itself in sleep; but it does not pass into unconsciousness as it does in sleep, but experiences a vastness which it has not experienced before. Its state, although it can be compared to sleep in terms of detachment from the body, is such that it can be characterized as an elevated wakefulness compared to ordinary daytime consciousness. In this way the soul experiences itself in its true inner, independent essence, whereas in ordinary daytime waking it only brings itself to consciousness with the help of the body through the weaker development of its powers present in it, thus not experiencing itself, but only becoming aware of itself in the image that - like a kind of mirror image - the body (actually its processes) creates before it.
[ 17 ] Those symbolic images that are constructed in the manner described above do not yet naturally refer to something real in the spiritual world. They serve to tear the human soul away from sensory perception and from the brain instrument to which the mind is initially bound. This detachment cannot take place before the human being feels: now I imagine something through powers in which my senses and the brain do not serve me as tools. The first thing a person experiences on this path is such a liberation from the physical organs. He can then say to himself: my consciousness is not extinguished when I leave sense perceptions and ordinary intellectual thinking out of consideration; I can lift myself out of this and then feel myself as a being next to what I was before. This is the first purely spiritual experience: the observation of a soul-spiritual I-entity. This has emerged as a new self from the self that is only bound to the physical senses and the physical mind. If one had detached oneself from the sensory and intellectual world without immersion, one would have sunk into the "nothingness" of unconsciousness. Of course, one already had the soul-spiritual entity before immersion. However, it did not yet have any tools for observing the spiritual world. It was like a physical body that has no eyes to see or ears to hear. The power expended in contemplation first created the soul-spiritual organs out of the previously disorganized soul-spiritual entity. What one has created in this way is what one first perceives. The first experience is therefore in a certain sense self-perception. It is part of the essence of spiritual training that the soul, through the self-education practiced on itself at this point in its development, has a full awareness of the fact that it first perceives itself in the pictorial worlds (imaginations) that arise as a result of the exercises described. Although these images appear as living in a new world, the soul must recognize that they are initially nothing other than the reflection of its own being, which has been strengthened by the exercises. And it must not only recognize this in the right judgment, but also have come to such a training of the will that it can remove the images from consciousness again at any time, erase them. The soul must be able to act completely freely and prudently within these images. This is part of the correct training of the spirit in this point. If it could not do this, it would be in the same situation in the realm of spiritual experiences as a soul would be in the physical world, which, if it turned its eye towards an object, would be bound by it so that it could no longer look away from it. The only exception to this possibility of erasure is a group of inner pictorial experiences that cannot be erased at the level of spiritual training attained. This corresponds to the soul's own core of being; and in these images the student of the spirit recognizes that in himself which runs through the repeated lives on earth as his basic being. At this point the feeling of repeated earth lives becomes a real experience. With regard to everything else, the aforementioned freedom of experience must prevail. And only after one has attained the ability of extinction does one approach the real spiritual outer world. In place of that which has been extinguished comes another in which one recognizes the spiritual reality. One feels how one grows mentally out of an indeterminate as a determinate. From this self-perception, one must then proceed to the observation of a soul-spiritual outer world. This occurs when one establishes one's inner experience in the sense that will be further indicated here.
[ 18 ] At first, the soul of the spiritual disciple is weak in relation to everything that can be perceived in the soul-spiritual world. He will have to expend a great deal of inner energy in order to hold on to the symbols or other ideas which he has built up from the stimuli of the sensory world in inner contemplation. But if he also wants to arrive at real observation in a higher world, he must not only be able to hold on to these ideas. After he has done this, he must also be able to remain in a state in which no stimuli from the sensory external world act on the soul, but in which the characterized imagined concepts themselves are also eradicated from consciousness. Only now can that which has been formed through immersion emerge in consciousness. It is a matter of there now being enough inner soul power so that what has thus been formed can really be seen spiritually, so that it does not escape attention. However, this is certainly the case when the inner energy is still weakly developed. What first emerges as a soul-spiritual organism and what is to be grasped in self-perception is delicate and fleeting. And the disturbances of the sensual outer world and their memory after-effects are great, no matter how hard one tries to keep them at bay. It is not only those disturbances that one pays attention to, but even more so those that one does not pay attention to at all in ordinary life. - But it is precisely the nature of the human being that makes a transitional state possible in this respect. What the soul cannot do in the waking state because of the disturbances of the physical world, it can do in the sleeping state. Anyone who surrenders to inner contemplation will become aware of something in his sleep if he pays proper attention. He will feel that he is "not completely asleep" during sleep, but that his soul has times in which it is active in a certain way while asleep. In such states, the natural processes keep out the influences of the outside world, which the soul cannot yet keep out by its own power when awake. If, however, the exercises of contemplation have already worked, then during sleep the soul releases itself from unconsciousness and feels the spiritual world. This can occur in two ways. It can be clear to the person during sleep: I am now in another world, or he can have the memory in himself after awakening: I was in another world. The former, however, requires a greater inner energy than the latter. Therefore, the latter will be the more common for the beginner in the training of the spirit. Gradually this can go so far that after awakening the pupil will think: I was in another world all the time I was asleep, from which I emerged when I woke up. And his memory of the beings and facts of this other world will become more and more definite. Then, in one form or another, the disciple of the spirit has entered into what can be called the continuity of consciousness. (The continuity of consciousness during sleep.) This does not mean, however, that a person is always conscious during sleep. Much has already been achieved in the continuity of consciousness if the human being, who otherwise sleeps like another, has certain times during sleep in which he can look at a spiritual world as if consciously, or if he can look at such short-lasting states of consciousness again in waking. However, it should not be forgotten that what is described here is only to be understood as a transitional state. It is good to go through this transitional state for the purpose of training; but one should certainly not believe that a conclusive view of the spiritual-soul world is to be drawn from this transitional state. In this state the soul is uncertain and cannot yet rely on what it perceives. But it gathers more and more strength through such experiences in order to then, also during waking, to keep the disturbing influences of the physical outer and inner world away from itself and thus to arrive at spiritual-soul observation when no impressions come through the senses, when the mind bound to the physical brain is silent and when also the ideas of contemplation are removed from consciousness, through which one has only prepared oneself for spiritual seeing. - What is published by spiritual science in this or that form should never originate from a spiritual observation other than one made in a fully awake state.
[ 19 ] Two experiences of the soul are important in the progress of spiritual training. One is that through which the human being can say to himself: even if I now disregard everything that the physical outer world can give me in the way of impressions, I do not look into my inner self as if at a being to which all activity is extinguished, but I look at a being that is conscious of itself in a world of which I know nothing, as long as I allow myself to be stimulated only by those sensual and ordinary impressions of the intellect. At this moment the soul has the sensation that it has given birth to a new being within itself as its soul essence in the manner described above. And this being is one with completely different characteristics to those that were previously in the soul. - The other experience consists in the fact that one can now have one's previous being next to oneself like a second being. That in which one knew oneself to be enclosed becomes something to which one finds oneself confronted in a certain way. One feels temporarily outside of what one has otherwise addressed as one's own being, as one's "I". It is as if one were now living in full contemplation in two "I's". One is the one you have known up to now. The other stands above it like a newborn being. And one feels how the former acquires a certain independence from the latter, just as the human body has a certain independence from the first self. - This experience is of great significance. For through it man knows what it means to live in that world which he strives to attain through training.
[ 20 ] The second - the newborn - I can now be led to perceive the spiritual world. It can develop what has the meaning for this spiritual world that the sense organs have for the sensory-physical world. When this development has progressed to the necessary degree, the human being will not only perceive himself as a newborn ego, but he will now perceive spiritual facts and spiritual beings around him, just as he perceives the physical world through the physical senses. And this is a third significant experience. In order to fully come to terms with this level of spiritual training, the human being must reckon with the fact that with the strengthening of the soul forces, self-love and self-awareness arise to a degree that is unknown to the ordinary life of the soul. It would be a misunderstanding if anyone were to believe that at this point we only have to speak of ordinary self-love. At this stage of development it intensifies in such a way that it takes on the appearance of a natural force within one's own soul, and it takes a strong training of the will to conquer this strong sense of self. This sense of self is not produced by the training of the spirit; it is always present; it only comes to consciousness through the experience of the spirit. The training of the will must certainly go side by side with the other training of the spirit. There is a strong urge to feel blessed in the world that one has created for oneself. And to a certain extent one must be able to extinguish, in the manner mentioned above, that which one has striven for with all one's effort. In the imaginative world we have reached, we must extinguish ourselves. But the strongest instincts of the sense of self fight against this. - It is easy to believe that the exercises of spiritual training are something external and detached from the moral development of the soul. On the contrary, it must be said that the moral strength necessary for the marked conquest of the sense of self cannot be attained without bringing the moral constitution of the soul to a corresponding level. Progress in the training of the spirit is inconceivable without moral progress at the same time. Without moral strength, the aforementioned conquest of the sense of self is not possible. All talk about true spiritual training not being moral training at the same time is inappropriate. Only those who do not know such an experience can raise the objection: how can one know that if one believes to have spiritual perceptions, one is dealing with realities and not with mere imaginations (visions, hallucinations, etc.)? - The point is that a person who has reached the stage described above through proper training can distinguish his own imagination from a spiritual reality in the same way that a person of sound mind can distinguish the imagination of a hot piece of iron from the actual presence of one that he touches with his hand. The difference is made by healthy experience and nothing else. And in the spiritual world, too, the touchstone is life itself. Just as one knows that in the world of the senses an imaginary piece of iron, however hot it is thought to be, does not burn the fingers, so the trained student of the spirit knows whether he is only experiencing a spiritual fact in his imagination or whether real facts or entities are making an impression on his awakened spiritual organs of perception. The measures to be observed during the training of the mind, so that one does not fall victim to deception in this respect, will be discussed in the following presentation.
[ 21 ] It is now of the greatest importance that the student of the spirit has attained a very specific state of soul when the consciousness of a newborn ego enters him. For it is through his ego that man is the leader of his sensations, feelings, ideas, instincts, desires and passions. Perceptions and ideas cannot be left to themselves in the soul. They must be regulated by thinking prudence. And it is the ego that handles these laws of thought and brings order to the life of imagination and thought through them. It is similar with desires, drives, inclinations and passions. The ethical principles become the guides of these powers of the soul. And through moral judgment the ego becomes the soul's guide in this area. If man now draws a higher ego out of his ordinary ego, the former becomes independent in a certain respect. As much living power is taken away from it as is given to the higher ego. Suppose, however, that man has not yet developed within himself a certain ability and consolidation in the laws of thought and in the power of judgment, and that he wanted to give birth to his higher ego at such a stage. He will only be able to leave so much thinking ability behind in his ordinary self as he has previously developed. If the degree of orderly thinking is too small, then disorderly, confused, fantastic thinking and judgment will appear in the ordinary ego that has become independent. And because the newborn ego can only be weak in such a personality, the confused lower ego will gain supremacy for the supersensible vision and the person will not show the balance of his power of judgment for the observation of the supersensible. If he had developed sufficient capacity for logical thinking, he could calmly leave his ordinary ego to its own devices. - And it is the same in the ethical sphere. If man has not attained firmness in moral judgment, if he has not become sufficiently master of inclinations, impulses and passions, then he will make his ordinary ego independent in a state in which the soul forces mentioned are at work. It can happen that a person does not allow the same high sense of truth to prevail in the ascertainment of the supersensible knowledge he experiences as in what he brings to his consciousness through the physical outer world. With such a loosened sense of truth, he could take anything for spiritual reality, which is only his fantasy. Into this sense of truth must enter firmness of ethical judgment, certainty of character, thoroughness of certainty, which are developed in the ego left behind before the higher ego becomes active for the purpose of supersensible knowledge. - This must by no means become a deterrent to training; but it must be taken quite seriously.
[ 22 ] Whoever has the strong will to do everything that brings the first ego to inner security in the performance of its tasks does not need to shy away from the detachment of a second ego brought about by spiritual training for the purpose of supersensible knowledge. But he must be aware that self-deception has great power over man when it is a question of his being "ripe" for something. In the mental training described here, man attains such an education of his thought life that he cannot be in danger of making the mistakes that are often suspected. This thought training ensures that all inner experiences that are necessary occur, but that they take place as they must be experienced by the soul, without being accompanied by harmful fantasy aberrations. Without appropriate thought training, the experiences can cause a strong insecurity in the soul. The way emphasized here causes the experiences to occur in such a way that one gets to know them completely, just as one gets to know the perceptions of the physical world in a healthy state of soul. Through the development of the mental life, one becomes more of an observer of what one experiences in oneself, while without the mental life one stands in the experience without thinking.
[ 23 ] Certain qualities are mentioned of proper training, which those who wish to find their way into the higher worlds should acquire through practice. Above all, these are: control of the soul over its thoughts, will and feelings. The way in which this mastery is to be brought about through practice has a twofold aim. On the one hand, it is intended to instill firmness, security and balance in the soul to such an extent that it retains these qualities even when a second self is born from it. On the other hand, this second self should be given strength and inner stability along the way.
[ 24 ] What man's thinking needs above all for the training of the spirit is objectivity. In the physical-sensual world, life is the great teacher of objectivity for the human ego. If the soul wanted to let its thoughts wander to and fro at will, it would soon have to allow itself to be corrected by life if it did not want to come into conflict with it. The soul must think according to the course of the facts of life. If man now diverts his attention from the physical-sensual world, he lacks the compulsory correction of the latter. If his thinking is then incapable of being its own corrector, it must become misleading. Therefore, the thinking of the student of the spirit must be practiced in such a way that it can give itself direction and purpose. Inner firmness and the ability to remain strictly with an object is what thinking must draw from within itself. For this reason, corresponding "mental exercises" should not be carried out on distant and complicated objects, but on simple and obvious ones. Whoever overcomes himself to turn his thoughts to an everyday object (for example, a pin, a pencil, etc.) for at least five minutes a day for months on end and during this time to exclude all thoughts that are not related to this object has done a great deal in this direction. (You can think about a new object every day or hold on to one for several days). Even those who feel themselves to be "thinkers" through scientific training should not disdain to "mature" themselves in this way for the training of the mind. For if one fixes one's thoughts for a while on something that is quite familiar to one, one can be sure that one is thinking appropriately. If you ask yourself: What components make up a pencil? How are the materials prepared to make the pencil? How are they assembled afterwards? When were pencils invented? and so on, and so on: such a person will certainly adapt their ideas more to reality than someone who thinks about the origins of man or what life is. One learns more through simple mental exercises for a proper conception of the world of Saturn's, the sun's and the moon's development than through complicated and learned ideas. For initially it is not a question of thinking about this or that, but of thinking appropriately through inner strength. If one has learned to think appropriately through an easily comprehensible sensory-physical process, then thinking becomes accustomed to wanting to be appropriate when it does not feel dominated by the physical-sensory world and its laws. And you get used to letting your thoughts rave improperly.
[ 25 ] As a ruler in the world of thoughts, so should the soul become in the realm of will. In the physical-sensual world it is also here that life appears as ruler. It asserts these or those needs for the human being; and the will feels stimulated to satisfy these needs. For higher training, man must become accustomed to strictly obeying his own commands. Whoever becomes accustomed to this will find it less and less pleasant to desire insubstantial things. However, the unsatisfactory, unsustainable aspect of the life of the will stems from the desire for such things, the realization of which is not clearly understood. Such unsatisfactoriness can disorder the whole emotional life if a higher self wants to emerge from the soul. A good exercise is to give yourself the command at a certain time of day for months on end: Today "at this particular time" you will perform "this". You then gradually come to command yourself the time of execution and the nature of the thing to be done in such a way that the execution is possible quite precisely. Thus one rises above the pernicious: "I want this; I want that", whereby one does not even think of the feasibility. A great personality has a seer say: "I love the one who desires the impossible". (Goethe, Faust II) And this personality (Goethe) himself says: "To live in the idea means to treat the impossible as if it were possible". (Goethe, Proverbs in Prose.) Such sayings should not, however, be used as objections to what is presented here. For the demand made by Goethe and his seer (Manko) can only be fulfilled by those who have first trained themselves in the desire for what is possible, in order to then be able to treat the "impossible" through their strong will in such a way that it is transformed into a possible through their will.
[ 26 ] With regard to the emotional world, the soul should be brought to a certain serenity for the training of the spirit. To this end, it is necessary for this soul to become master of the expression of pleasure and suffering, joy and pain. Many a prejudice can arise against the acquisition of this quality. One might think that one becomes dull and apathetic towards one's fellow human beings if one "should not rejoice over the pleasurable and feel pain over the painful". But that is not the point. A pleasant thing should delight the soul, a sad thing should hurt it. It should only come to master the expression of joy and pain, of pleasure and displeasure. If you strive for this, you will soon notice that you do not become duller but, on the contrary, more receptive to everything pleasant and painful in your surroundings than you used to be. However, if you want to acquire the quality we are talking about here, you need to pay close attention to yourself over a longer period of time. You have to make sure that you can fully experience pleasure and pain without losing yourself so much that you give involuntary expression to what you feel. It is not justified pain that should be suppressed, but involuntary weeping; not disgust at a bad action, but the blind raging of anger; not paying attention to danger, but the fruitless "being afraid" and so on. - Only through such practice does the student of the spirit attain that calmness in his mind which is necessary to prevent the soul from leading a second unhealthy life like a kind of double next to this higher self when it is born and especially when the higher self is active. It is precisely with regard to these things that one should not indulge in self-deception. It may seem to some that they already have a certain equanimity in ordinary life and that they therefore do not need this exercise. Such a person needs it twice over. For one can be quite serene when facing the things of ordinary life; and then, when ascending to a higher world, the lack of equilibrium, which was only repressed, can assert itself all the more. It must be recognized that the training of the spirit depends less on what one seems to have beforehand than on practicing what one needs in a lawful manner. As contradictory as this sentence may seem, it is correct. Even if life has taught you this or that: the qualities which you have taught yourself serve to train your mind. If life has taught you excitement, you should train yourself out of excitement; but if life has taught you equanimity, you should shake yourself up through self-education so that the expression of your soul corresponds to the impression you have received. He who cannot laugh at anything controls his life just as little as he who, without controlling himself, is continually provoked to laughter.
[ 27 ] For thinking and feeling, another means of education is the acquisition of the quality that can be called positivity. There is a beautiful legend that tells of Christ Jesus walking past a dead dog with some other people. The others turn away from the ugly sight. Christ Jesus speaks admiringly of the animal's beautiful teeth. One can practise maintaining a state of mind towards the world that is in the spirit of this legend. The erroneous, bad and ugly should not prevent the soul from finding the true, good and beautiful wherever it exists. This positivity should not be confused with a lack of criticism, with arbitrarily closing one's eyes to the bad, the false and the inferior. Anyone who admires the "beautiful teeth" of a dead animal also sees the decaying corpse. But this corpse does not prevent him from seeing the beautiful teeth. One cannot find the bad good, the error not true; but one can make it so that one is not prevented by the bad from seeing the good, by the error from seeing the true.
[ 28 ] Thinking in connection with the will undergoes a certain maturation if one tries never to allow anything that one has experienced or learned to rob one's unbiased receptivity to new experiences. For the spiritual disciple, the thought should completely lose its meaning: "I have never heard that before, I don't believe that." For a certain period of time, he should be prepared to be told new things and beings at every opportunity. One can learn from every breath of air, from every leaf of a tree, from every babble of a child, if one is prepared to apply a point of view that one has not yet applied. However, it will be easy to go too far with regard to such an ability. One should not disregard the experiences one has had about things at a certain age. One should judge what one experiences in the present according to the experiences of the past. That goes on one side of the scales; on the other, however, the student of the spirit must be inclined to constantly learn new things. And, above all, the belief in the possibility that new experiences can contradict the old ones.
[ 29 ] This mentions five qualities of the soul that the student of the spirit must acquire through proper training: mastery of thought, mastery of the impulses of the will, serenity towards pleasure and suffering, positivity in judging the world, impartiality in the perception of life. Whoever has used certain periods of time in succession to practise the acquisition of these qualities will then still need to bring these qualities into harmonious tune in the soul. In a sense, he will have to practice them two and two, three and one and so on at the same time in order to achieve harmony.
[ 30 ] The characterized exercises are indicated by the methods of spiritual training because, if performed thoroughly, they not only bring about in the spiritual disciple what has been mentioned above as a direct result, but also have many other indirect results that are needed on the path to the spiritual worlds. Whoever does these exercises to a sufficient degree will, during them, come across many deficiencies and faults in his soul life; and he will find the means he needs to strengthen and secure his intellectual, emotional and character life. He will certainly have need of many other exercises, according to his abilities, temperament and character; but these will arise if the above-mentioned are practiced extensively. Indeed, you will notice that the exercises described will also gradually give you what does not seem to be there at first. For example, if someone has too little self-confidence, they will notice after a certain amount of time that the exercises will give them the necessary self-confidence. And it is the same with other qualities of the soul. (Special, more detailed exercises can be found in my book: "How does one attain knowledge of the higher worlds?") - It is significant that the student of the spirit is able to increase the indicated abilities to ever higher degrees. He must master his thoughts and feelings to such an extent that the soul acquires the power to create times of perfect inner peace, in which man keeps away from his mind and heart everything that everyday, external life brings in the way of happiness and suffering, of satisfactions and worries, indeed of tasks and demands. At such times, only that which the soul itself wants to admit in a state of contemplation should be admitted into the soul. A prejudice can easily arise against this. The opinion could arise that one becomes alienated from life and its tasks if one withdraws from it with heart and mind for certain times of the day. In reality, however, this is not the case at all. Those who devote themselves to periods of inner stillness and peace in the manner described above will gain so much and such strong strength for the tasks of outer life that they will not only fulfill the duties of life no worse, but certainly better. - It is of great value if, during such periods, a person can completely free himself from thoughts of his personal affairs, if he is able to rise to what concerns not only him but man in general. If he is able to fill his soul with the messages from the higher spiritual world, if these are able to captivate his interest to such a high degree as a personal concern or matter, then his soul will reap special fruits from this. - Whoever endeavors to intervene in his soul life in this regulating way will also come to the possibility of self-observation, which looks at his own affairs with the calmness as if they were foreign ones. Being able to look at one's own experiences, one's own joys and sufferings as if they were those of another is a good preparation for training the spirit. You will gradually reach the necessary level in this respect if you allow the images of your daily experiences to pass before your mind every day after you have completed your daily work. One should see oneself in the picture within one's experiences; in other words, one should look at oneself in one's daily life as if from the outside. One achieves a certain practice in such self-observation when one begins by imagining individual small parts of this daily life. You will then become more and more skillful and adept at such retrospection, so that after a long period of practice you will be able to complete it in a short period of time. This looking backwards at experiences has a special value for the training of the spirit because it leads the soul to break away from the habit of only following the course of sensory events with the mind. In backward thinking one imagines correctly, but is not held by the sensory process. You need this to settle into the supersensible world. Imagining in a healthy way is based on this. Therefore it is also good to imagine other things backwards besides one's daily life, for example, the course of a drama, a story, a sequence of notes, etc. - The ideal for the student of the spirit will become more and more to behave towards the life events that approach him in such a way that he lets them approach him with inner security and peace of mind and does not judge them according to the state of his soul, but according to their inner meaning and their inner value. It is precisely by focusing on this ideal that he will create the spiritual foundation to be able to devote himself to the immersion in symbolic and other thoughts and feelings described above.
[ 31 ] The conditions described here must be fulfilled, because the supersensible experience is built on the ground on which one stands in the ordinary life of the soul before one enters the supersensible world. In two ways, all supersensible experience is dependent on the starting point of the soul on which one stands before entering. Anyone who is not careful to make sound judgment the basis of his spiritual training from the outset will develop supersensible abilities that perceive the spiritual world inaccurately and incorrectly. His spiritual organs of perception will, so to speak, develop incorrectly. And just as one cannot see correctly in the sensory world with a defective or diseased eye, so one cannot perceive correctly with spiritual organs that have not been developed on the basis of a healthy capacity for judgment. - He who takes an immoral state of mind as his starting point will rise up into the spiritual worlds in such a way that his spiritual vision will be numb, fogged over. He is to the supersensible worlds as someone is to the sensuous world who observes in a daze. But he will not come to any significant conclusions, whereas the spiritual observer in his stupor is at least more alert than a person in ordinary consciousness. His statements therefore become errors in relation to the spiritual world.
[ 32 ] The inner solidity of the imaginative level of cognition is achieved by the fact that the mental immersions (meditations) described are supported by what can be called the habituation to "sensuality-free thinking". If a thought is formed on the basis of observation in the physical-sensual world, then this thought is not free of sensuality. But it is not the case that man can only form such thoughts. Human thought need not become empty and devoid of content if it does not allow itself to be filled with sensory observations. The safest and most obvious way for the student of the spirit to arrive at such sensory-free thinking is to make the facts of the higher world communicated to him by spiritual science the property of his thinking. These facts cannot be observed by the physical senses. Nevertheless, man will realize that he can comprehend them if he has enough patience and perseverance. Without training one cannot investigate the higher world, one cannot make observations in it oneself; but without higher training one can understand everything that the researchers communicate from it. And if someone says: How can I accept in good faith what the spiritual researchers say, since I cannot see it myself? this is completely unfounded. For it is quite possible to obtain the certain conviction from mere reflection that what has been communicated is true. And if someone cannot form this conviction through reflection, this is not because it is impossible to "believe" in something that one does not see, but merely because one has not yet applied one's reflection unprejudicedly, comprehensively and thoroughly enough. In order to have clarity on this point, one must consider that human thinking, if it energetically pulls itself together, can comprehend more than it usually thinks. For in the thought itself there is already an inner entity which is connected with the supersensible world. The soul is usually unaware of this connection because it is accustomed to using the faculty of thought only on the world of the senses. It therefore considers what is communicated to it from the supersensible world to be incomprehensible. However, this is not only understandable for a mind that has been educated through spiritual training, but for any mind that is aware of its full power and wants to make use of it. - By constantly making what spiritual research says one's own, one becomes accustomed to a way of thinking that does not draw on sensory observations. One learns to recognize how, within the soul, thought weaves itself into thought, how thought seeks thought, even if the thought connections are not brought about by the power of sensory observation. The essential thing here is that one becomes aware of how the world of thought has inner life, how, by really thinking, one is already in the realm of a supersensible living world.
[ 33 ] You say to yourself: There is something in me that forms an organism of thought; but I am one with this "something". In devoting oneself to sensory-free thinking, one experiences that something essential exists which flows into our inner life, just as the qualities of sensory things flow into us through our physical organs when we observe sensually. Out there in space - the observer of the sensory world says to himself - there is a rose; it is not strange to me, for it announces itself to me through its color and its smell. One only needs to be sufficiently unprejudiced to say to oneself, when the sensuality-free thinking is at work in one, quite accordingly: an entity announces itself to me, which binds thought to thought in me, which forms a thought organism. There is, however, a difference in the sensations between what the observer of the outer sense world has in mind and that which announces itself essentially in the sensuality-free thinking. The first observer feels himself to be outside the rose, the one who is devoted to sensuality-free thinking feels the essence that announces itself in him as in himself, he feels at one with it. He who more or less consciously only wants to accept as essential that which confronts him like an external object will not, however, be able to maintain the feeling that what is essential in itself can also announce itself to me through the fact that I am united with it as if in one. In order to see correctly in this respect, one must be able to have the following inner experience. One must learn to distinguish between the thought connections that one creates through one's own arbitrariness and those that one experiences within oneself when one allows such arbitrariness to remain silent within oneself. In the latter case, one can then say: I remain completely silent within myself; I do not bring about any thought connections; I surrender to that which "thinks within me". Then it is fully justified to say: something essential works in me, just as it is justified to say: the rose works on me when I see a certain red, perceive a certain smell. - It is not a contradiction that one draws the content of one's thoughts from the communications of spiritual researchers. The thoughts are already there when you give yourself over to them, but you cannot think them if you do not recreate them in your soul. What matters is that the spiritual researcher evokes such thoughts in his listener and reader, which they must first draw from themselves, while the one who describes the sensual-real points to something that can be observed by the listener and reader in the sensory world.
[ 34 ] (The path that leads through the communications of spiritual science into sensuality-free thinking is an absolutely certain one. But there is another one, which is safer and, above all, more precise, but also more difficult for many people. It is described in my books "Erkenntnistheorie der Goetheschen Weltanschauung" and "Philosophie der Freiheit". These writings reflect what human thought can achieve when thinking does not surrender to the impressions of the physical-sensual outside world, but only to itself. Pure thinking then works in the human being, not the thinking that is merely lost in memories of the sensual, like an entity that is alive in itself. At the same time, nothing is included in these writings from the communications of spiritual science itself. And yet it is shown that pure thinking, working only within itself, can gain insights into the world, life and man. These writings stand on a very important intermediate stage between the cognition of the sense world and that of the spiritual world. They offer what thinking can gain when it rises above sensual observation but still avoids entering spiritual research. He who allows these writings to affect his whole soul is already in the spiritual world, except that it presents itself to him as a world of thought. Whoever feels able to allow such an intermediate stage to have an effect on him is walking a safe path; and he can thereby gain a feeling towards the higher world that will bear him the most beautiful fruits for all subsequent times.
[ 35 ] The goal of immersion (meditation) in the symbolic ideas and sensations described above is, to be precise, the development of the higher organs of perception within the astral body of the human being. They are initially created out of the substance of this astral body. These new organs of observation convey a new world, and in this new world the human being gets to know himself as a new ego. These new organs of observation differ from the organs of observation of the sensory-physical world in that they are active organs. While the eye and ear are passive and allow light and sound to affect them, it can be said of the spiritual-mental organs of perception that they are in constant activity while they perceive, and that they grasp their objects and facts in full consciousness, so to speak. This gives rise to the feeling that spiritual-soul cognition is a unification with the corresponding facts, a "living in them". - The individual spiritual-soul organs that form can be called "lotus flowers" in comparison, corresponding to the form that the supersensible consciousness must (imaginatively) make of them. (Of course, one must be aware that such a designation has no more to do with the matter than the term "wings" when one speaks of "lung wings"). Through very specific types of inner contemplation, the astral body is influenced in such a way that one or the other spiritual-soul organ, one or the other "lotus flower" is formed. After all that has been said in this book, it should be superfluous to emphasize that these "organs of observation" should not be imagined as something that is an imprint of its reality in the imagination of its sensory image. These "organs" are precisely supersensible and consist in a certain kind of soul activity; and they only exist insofar and as long as this soul activity is practiced. Something that can be seen as sensual is as little in man with these organs as any "haze" is around him when he thinks. Anyone who wants to imagine the supersensible in a sensual way will fall into misunderstandings. In spite of the superfluous nature of this remark, it may be included here because there are always confessors of the supersensible who only want to have a sensuality in their conceptions; and because there are always opponents of supersensible knowledge who believe that the spiritual researcher speaks of "lotus flowers" as if they were finer, sensuous formations. Every regular meditation made with a view to imaginative cognition has its effect on one organ or the other. (In my book "How does one attain knowledge of the higher worlds?" some of the methods of meditation and practice are given which have an effect on one organ or another). Proper training arranges the individual exercises of the student of the spirit in such a way and lets them follow each other in such a way that the organs can train themselves individually or successively. This training requires a great deal of patience and perseverance on the part of the spiritual disciple. Anyone who only has the level of patience that normal living conditions usually give a person will not be able to achieve this. For it takes a long time, often a very, very long time, until the organs are so far advanced that the spiritual disciple can use them for perceptions in the higher world. At this moment, what is called enlightenment occurs for him, in contrast to the preparation or purification that consists of the exercises for the training of the organs. (The term "purification" is used because through the corresponding exercises the disciple purifies himself of all that comes from the sensory world of observation for a certain area of inner life). It is quite possible that even before actual enlightenment, a person will repeatedly receive "flashes of light" from a higher world. He should gratefully accept such flashes. They alone can make him a witness of the spiritual world. But he should also not waver if this is not the case during his preparation time, which may seem too long to him. Whoever can fall into impatience "because he does not yet see anything" has not yet gained the right relationship to a higher world. The latter has only been grasped by those for whom the exercises they do through training can be something of an end in themselves. This practice is in truth work on a spiritual-soul, namely on one's own astral body. And one can "feel", even if "one sees nothing": "I am working spiritually and emotionally". Only if you form a certain opinion from the outset about what you actually want to "see", then you will not have this feeling. Then you won't think of anything that is actually something immeasurably meaningful. But you should pay subtle attention to everything you experience while practising, which is so fundamentally different from all experiences in the sensory world. You will then notice that you are not working into your astral body as into an indifferent substance, but that a completely different world lives in it, of which you know nothing through your sensory life. Higher beings work on the astral body, just as the physical-sensual outer world works on the physical body. And one "encounters" the higher life in one's own astral body, if only one does not close oneself off from it. If someone says to himself again and again: "I perceive nothing", then it is usually because he has imagined that this perception must look like this or that; and because he then does not see what he imagines he must see, he says: "I see nothing."
[ 36 ] But he who acquires the right attitude towards the practice of training will increasingly have something in this practice that he loves for its own sake. But then he knows that through practicing he himself is in a spiritual-soul world, and he waits in patience and surrender to see what further results. This attitude in the spiritual disciple can best be expressed in the following words: "I want to do everything that is appropriate for me as exercises, and I know that in the appropriate time I will receive as much as is important to me. I do not demand this impatiently; but always make myself ready to receive it." There is also no objection to this: "The spiritual disciple should therefore grope in the dark, perhaps for an immeasurably long time; for it can only become clear to him that he is on the right path with his practice when success is achieved." However, it is not the case that only success can bring the realization of the correctness of the practice. If the student is doing the exercises correctly, then the satisfaction he gets from practicing will give him the clarity that he is doing the right thing, not just the success. Practicing correctly in the field of spiritual training is associated with a satisfaction that is not mere satisfaction, but realization. Namely the realization that I am doing something that I can see is moving me forward in the right direction. Every student of the mind can have this realization at any moment, if only he is subtly attentive to his experiences. If he does not apply this attention, then he simply passes by the experiences, like a pedestrian lost in thought who does not see the trees on either side of the path, although he would see them if he looked at them attentively. - It is not at all desirable to hasten the occurrence of any other success than that which always results from practicing. For this could easily be only the smallest part of what should actually occur. With regard to spiritual development, partial success is often the cause of a great delay in full success. Movement under such forms of spiritual life as correspond to partial success blunts the influences of the forces which lead to higher points of development. And the gain that one achieves by having "looked into the spiritual world" is only an apparent one; for this looking in cannot provide the truth, but only illusions.
[ 37 ] The spiritual-soul organs, the lotus flowers, are formed in such a way that they appear to the supersensible consciousness of the person undergoing training as if they were close to certain physical body organs. Of the series of these soul organs, the following should be mentioned here: the one that is felt near the center of the eyebrow (the so-called two-petaled lotus flower), the one in the region of the larynx (the sixteen-petaled lotus flower), the third in the region of the heart (the twelve-petaled lotus flower), the fourth in the region of the pit of the stomach. Other such organs appear near other physical parts of the body. (The names "two-petaled" or "sixteen-petaled" can be used because the organs in question can be compared to flowers with the corresponding number of petals.
[ 38 ] The lotus flowers become conscious in the astral body. At the time when you have developed one or the other, you also know that you have them. One feels that one can make use of them and that one really enters a higher world through their use. The impressions one receives from this world are in some respects still similar to those of the physical-sensory world. Those who perceive imaginatively will be able to speak of the new higher world in such a way that they describe the impressions as sensations of warmth or cold, perceptions of sound or words, effects of light or color. For he experiences them as such. However, he is aware that these perceptions express something different in the imaginative world than in the sensual-real world. He recognizes that behind them are not physical-material causes, but mental-spiritual ones. If he has something like an impression of warmth, he does not attribute it to a hot piece of iron, for example, but regards it as the outflow of a mental process that he has only known in his inner mental life. He knows that behind the imaginative perceptions there are mental and spiritual things and processes, just as behind the physical perceptions there are material-physical beings and facts. - In addition to this similarity between the imaginative and the physical world, however, there is a significant difference. There is something in the physical world that appears quite differently in the imaginative world. In the latter we can observe a continuous coming into being and passing away of things, an alternation of birth and death. In the imaginative world, this phenomenon is replaced by a continuous transformation of one thing into another. In the physical world, for example, we see a plant decay. In the imaginative world, to the same extent that the plant withers away, the emergence of another entity appears, which is not physically perceptible and into which the decaying plant gradually transforms. When the plant has passed away, this entity is fully developed in its place. Birth and death are concepts that lose their meaning in the imaginative world. In their place comes the concept of the transformation of one into the other. - Because this is so, those truths about the essence of man, which have been communicated in this book in the chapter "Essence of Humanity", become accessible to imaginative cognition. Only the processes of the physical body are perceptible to physical-sensory perception. They take place in the "realm of birth and death". The other members of human nature: the vital body, the sensory body and the ego are subject to the law of transformation, and their perception opens up to imaginative cognition. Those who have progressed to this point perceive how that which lives on in a different mode of existence after death is, as it were, detached from the physical body.
[ 39 ] The development, however, does not stand still within the imaginative world. The human being who wanted to remain within it would indeed perceive the entities undergoing transformation; but he would not be able to interpret the processes of transformation, he would not be able to orient himself in the newly acquired world. The imaginative world is a restless area. There is only movement and transformation everywhere in it; nowhere are there points of rest. - Man only reaches such points of rest when he develops beyond the imaginative level of cognition to what can be called "cognition through inspiration". - It is not necessary for those who seek knowledge of the supersensible world to develop in such a way that they first fully acquire imaginative cognition and only then progress to "inspiration". His exercises can be arranged in such a way that what leads to imagination and what leads to inspiration go side by side. After a suitable period of time, he will then enter a higher world in which he not only perceives, but in which he can also orientate himself and which he knows how to interpret. As a rule, however, progress will be made in such a way that first the student of the spirit is presented with some phenomena of the imaginative world and after some time he receives the sensation within himself: Now I am also beginning to get my bearings. - Nevertheless, the world of inspiration is something quite new compared to that of mere imagination. Through the latter one perceives the transformation of one process into another, through the latter one learns about the inner qualities of beings that transform themselves. Through imagination one recognizes the spiritual expression of beings; through inspiration one penetrates into their spiritual interior. Above all, one recognizes a multiplicity of spiritual beings and the relationship of one to another. In the physical world we also have to deal with a multiplicity of different beings; in the world of inspiration, however, this multiplicity is of a different character. There each being is in quite definite relations to others, not as in the physical world through external influence on it, but through its inner constitution. When one perceives a being in the inspired world, there is not an external influence on another that could be compared with the effect of one physical being on another, but there is a relationship of one to the other through the inner nature of the two beings. This relationship can be compared with such a relationship in the physical world if one chooses the relationship between the individual sounds or letters of a word. If you have the word "human" in front of you, it is brought about by the harmony of the sounds: human. There is no impulse or other external influence, for example, from the M to the E, but both sounds work together within a whole through their inner nature. Therefore, observing in the world of inspiration can only be compared to reading; and the beings in this world have an effect on the observer like characters which he must get to know and whose relationships must reveal themselves to him like a supersensible writing. Spiritual science can therefore also call knowledge through inspiration comparatively the "reading of the hidden script".
[ 40 ] How this "hidden scripture" is read and how what has been read can be communicated will now be made clear in the preceding chapters of this book. First the essence of man was described, how it is made up of different parts. Then it was shown how the world being, on which the human being develops, passes through the various states, the Saturnian, solar, lunar and earthly states. The perceptions through which one can recognize the limbs of man on the one hand, and the successive states of the earth and its previous transformations on the other, are revealed by imaginative cognition. Now, however, it is further necessary to recognize what relationships exist between the Saturnian state and the physical human body, the solar state and the etheric body, and so on. It must be shown that the germ of the physical human body was already formed during the Saturnian state, that it then developed further to its present form during the solar, lunar and earthly states. It also had to be pointed out, for example, what changes took place in the human being when the sun separated from the earth and what happened to the moon. Furthermore, it had to be communicated what interacted so that such changes could take place with humanity, as they expressed themselves in the transformations during the Atlantean period, as they did in the successive periods, the Indian, the Urperian, the Egyptian, etc. The description of these connections does not result from imaginative perception, but from knowledge through inspiration, from the reading of the hidden Scriptures. For this "reading", the imaginative perceptions are like letters or sounds. However, this "reading" is not only necessary for enlightenments such as those just described. Even the course of life of the whole human being could not be understood if one were to view it only through imaginative cognition. One would indeed perceive how, with death, the soul-spiritual members detach themselves from what remains in the physical world; but one would not understand the relationship of what happens to the human being after death to the preceding and subsequent states if one could not orient oneself within the imaginatively perceived. Without knowledge through inspiration, the imaginative world would remain like a script that one stares at but is unable to read.
[ 41 ] When the student of the spirit progresses from imagination to inspiration, it very soon becomes apparent to him how wrong it would be to renounce the understanding of the great phenomena of the world and to limit himself only to those facts which, so to speak, touch the nearest human interest. He who is not initiated into these things might well say the following: "It only seems important to me to know the fate of the human soul after death; if someone tells me about it, that is enough for me: why does spiritual science show me remote things, such as the state of Saturn, the sun, the separation of the sun and moon, and so on." But he who is properly introduced to these things learns to recognize that a real knowledge of what he wants to experience can never be attained without a knowledge of what seems so unnecessary to him. A description of the human condition after death remains completely incomprehensible and worthless if the human being cannot connect it with concepts taken from those remote things. Even the simplest observation of the supersensible cognizer makes his acquaintance with such things necessary. For example, when a plant passes from the flowering state to the fruiting state, the supersensible observer sees a transformation taking place in an astral entity, which covered and enveloped the plant from above like a cloud during the flowering. If fertilization had not occurred, this astral entity would have changed into a completely different form than the one it assumed as a result of fertilization. Now one understands the whole process perceived through supersensible observation when one has learned to understand its essence from that great world process which took place with the earth and all its inhabitants at the time of the separation of the sun. Before fertilization the plant is in the same position as the whole earth was before the separation of the sun. After fertilization, the blossom of the plant shows itself as the earth was when the sun had separated and the lunar forces were still in it. If one has adopted the ideas that can be gained from the separation of the sun, then one will perceive the interpretation of the plant fertilization process appropriately in such a way that one says: The plant is in a solar state before fertilization and in a lunar state after fertilization. It is indeed the case that even the smallest process in the world can only be understood if it is recognized as a reflection of larger world processes. Otherwise it remains as incomprehensible in its essence as Raphael's Madonna remains for those who can only see a small blue spot while everything else is covered up. - Everything that happens to man is a reflection of all the great world processes that have to do with his existence. If one wants to understand the observations of the supersensible consciousness about the phenomena between birth and death and again from death to a new birth, one can do so if one has acquired the ability to decipher the imaginative observations through that which one has acquired in terms of ideas through the contemplation of the great world processes. - This contemplation provides the key to understanding human life. Therefore, in the sense of spiritual science, observing Saturn, the sun, the moon etc. is at the same time observing the human being.
[ 42 ] Through inspiration one comes to recognize the relationships between the beings of the higher world. Through a further level of knowledge, it becomes possible to recognize these entities within themselves. This level of cognition can be called intuitive cognition. (Intuition is a word that is misused in ordinary life for an unclear, indeterminate insight into a matter, for a kind of idea that sometimes coincides with the truth, but whose justification cannot initially be proven. What is meant here has nothing to do with this kind of "intuition". Of course, what is meant here has nothing to do with it. Intuition here refers to an insight of the highest, most luminous clarity, the justification of which, if one has it, one is fully aware of). - To recognize a sensory being means to stand outside it and judge it according to external impressions. To recognize a spiritual being through intuition means to have become completely one with it, to have united with its inner being. The student of the spirit gradually ascends to such knowledge. Imagination leads him to no longer perceive perceptions as external qualities of beings, but to recognize in them emanations of the soul-spiritual; inspiration leads him further into the inner being: Through it he learns to understand what these entities are to each other; in intuition he penetrates into the beings themselves. - Again, the importance of intuition can be seen in this book itself. In the preceding chapters we have not only spoken of the progress of the evolution of Saturn, the sun, the moon, etc., but we have also been told that beings take part in this progress in the most varied ways. Thrones or spirits of will, spirits of wisdom, of movement, etc. were mentioned. The spirits of Lucifer and Ahriman were spoken of in the development of the earth. The construction of the world was traced back to the entities that participate in it. What can be learned about these entities is gained through intuitive knowledge. This is also necessary if one wants to recognize the course of a person's life. That which separates itself from the physical body of the human being after death goes through various states in the following period. The next states after death could still be described to some extent by imaginative cognition. But what happens when the human being moves on in the time between death and a new birth would remain completely incomprehensible to the imagination if it were not for inspiration. Only inspiration can explore what can be said of man's life after purification in "spirit land". But then comes something for which inspiration is no longer sufficient, where it loses the thread of understanding, so to speak. There is a time in human development between death and a new birth when the human being is only accessible to intuition. - But this part of the human being is always within the human being; and if one wants to understand it according to its true inwardness, one must also seek it out through intuition in the time between birth and death. Anyone who wanted to recognize the human being only by means of imagination and inspiration would be deprived of the very processes of his innermost being, which take place from embodiment to embodiment. Only intuitive cognition therefore makes a proper investigation of repeated earth lives and karma possible. Everything that is to be communicated as truth about these processes must come from research through intuitive knowledge. - And if man wants to recognize himself according to his inner nature, he can only do so through intuition. Through it he perceives what moves within him from earthly life to earthly life.
[ 43 ] Man can only attain knowledge through inspiration and intuition through spiritual exercises. They are similar to those which have been described as "inner contemplation" (meditation) to achieve the imagination. However, while in those exercises that lead to imagination there is a connection to the impressions of the sensory-physical world, in those for inspiration this connection must increasingly fall away. To illustrate what has to happen, think again of the symbol of the rose cross. If you immerse yourself in it, you have before you an image whose parts are taken from impressions of the sensual world: the black color of the cross, the roses, etc. But the combination of these parts to form the rose cross is not taken from the sensual-physical world. If the spiritual disciple now tries to let the black cross and the red roses disappear completely from his consciousness as images of sensual-real things and to retain only in his soul that spiritual activity which has composed these parts, then he has a means of such meditation which will gradually lead him to inspiration. Ask yourself in your soul something like this: What have I done inwardly to put the cross and the rose together to form the symbol? I want to hold on to what I have done (my own soul process), but let the image itself disappear from my consciousness. Then I want to feel everything within me that my soul has done to create the image, but I don't want to imagine the image itself. I now want to live completely inwardly in my own activity that created the image. So I don't want to immerse myself in an image, but in my own image-creating soul activity. Such immersion must be undertaken in relation to many symbolic images. This then leads to realization through inspiration. Another example would be this: One immerses oneself in the image of a growing and decaying plant. One allows the image of a gradually developing plant to arise in the soul, how it sprouts from the seed, how it unfolds leaf by leaf until it blossoms and bears fruit. Then again, how it begins to wither away until it completely dissolves. By immersing oneself in such an image, one gradually arrives at a feeling of emergence and decay, for which the plant is only an image. From this feeling, if the exercise is continued persistently, the imagination of the transformation that underlies the physical arising and passing away can develop. But if you want to achieve the corresponding inspiration, you have to do the exercise in a different way. One must reflect on one's own soul activity, which has gained the idea of coming into being and passing away from the image of the plant. You must now let the plant disappear completely from your consciousness and only immerse yourself in what you have done inwardly. Only through such exercises is it possible to ascend to inspiration. At first it will not be easy for the student of the spirit to fully understand how to approach such an exercise. This is due to the fact that a person who is accustomed to allowing his inner life to be determined by external impressions immediately becomes uncertain and completely unstable if he is still to develop a soul life that has thrown off all ties to external impressions. To an even greater degree than with regard to the acquisition of imagination, the student of the spirit must be clear about these exercises for inspiration that he should only undertake them if he allows all the precautions to go alongside which can lead to the securing and consolidation of the faculty of judgment, the emotional life and the character. If he takes these precautions, his success will be twofold. Firstly, he will not be able to lose the balance of his personality in the supersensible vision through the exercises; secondly, he will at the same time acquire the ability to really carry out what is demanded in these exercises. These exercises will only be said to be difficult as long as one has not yet acquired a certain state of mind, certain feelings and sensations. He will soon gain understanding and also ability for the exercises who, through patience and perseverance, cultivates such inner qualities in his soul which are favorable to the germination of supersensible knowledge. Those who become accustomed to frequently contemplating their inner self in such a way that they are less concerned with brooding about themselves than with quietly organizing and processing the experiences they have had in life will gain much. They will see that their ideas and feelings are enriched when they relate one life experience to another. He will become aware of the extent to which he not only experiences new things by having new impressions and new experiences, but also by allowing the old ones to work within him. And if you go about it in such a way that you allow your experiences, even the opinions you have gained, to play against each other as if you were not even there with your sympathies and antipathies, with your personal interests and feelings, you will prepare particularly good ground for the supersensible powers of knowledge. In truth, he will develop what can be called a rich inner life. What matters above all, however, is the balance and equilibrium of the soul's qualities. Man is only too easily inclined to fall into one-sidedness when he indulges in a certain activity of the soul. Thus, when he becomes aware of the advantage of inner contemplation and of dwelling in his own imaginary world, he can become so inclined to do so that he closes himself off more and more from the impressions of the outside world. This, however, leads to the drying up and desolation of the inner life. The person who goes furthest is the one who, in addition to the ability to withdraw into his inner self, also retains an open receptivity to all impressions from the outside world. And it is not necessary to think only of the so-called significant impressions of life, but every person can experience enough in every situation - even in the poorest four walls - if he only keeps his mind receptive to them. There is no need to look for experiences; they are everywhere. - How experiences are processed in the human soul is also of particular importance. For example, someone may experience that a personality they or others admire has this or that quality, which they must describe as a character flaw. Such an experience can cause a person to reflect in two ways. He can simply say to himself: Now that I have recognized this, I can no longer worship that personality in the same way as before. Or he can ask himself the question: How is it possible that the revered personality is afflicted with that defect? How must I imagine that the fault is not just a fault, but something caused by the life of the personality, perhaps precisely by its great qualities? A person who asks himself these questions will perhaps come to the conclusion that his veneration cannot be diminished in the least by noticing the flaw. One will always have learned something from such a result, one will have added something to one's understanding of life. Now it would certainly be a bad thing for someone who could be tempted by the goodness of such a view of life to excuse all sorts of things or people who have his inclination, or even to get into the habit of ignoring everything that is reprehensible, because this would benefit his inner development. The latter is not the case when one receives the impulse to not only reprove mistakes but to understand them; but only when such behavior is demanded by the case in question, regardless of what the judge gains or loses in the process. It is quite true that one cannot learn by condemning a mistake, but only by understanding it. However, anyone who wanted to rule out disapproval on the basis of understanding would not get very far either. Here, too, it is not a question of one-sidedness in one direction or the other, but of balance and equilibrium of the soul's forces. - And this is particularly true of a characteristic of the soul that is of outstanding importance for human development: the feeling of devotion. Anyone who develops this feeling in himself or possesses it from the outset through a fortunate natural gift has a good basis for the supersensible powers of knowledge. Those who in their childhood and youth were able to look up with devoted admiration to persons and high ideals have something in the depths of their soul in which supersensible knowledge can flourish particularly well. And he who, in mature judgment, looks up to the starry heavens in later life and admires the revelation of high powers with complete devotion, thereby makes himself ripe for the recognition of the supersensible worlds. The same is the case with those who are able to marvel at the forces at work in human life. And it is of no small importance if, even as a mature person, one can still have reverence to the highest degree for other people whose value one suspects or believes to recognize. Only where such reverence exists can the prospect of the higher worlds open up. Those who are unable to worship will not make much progress in their knowledge. He who does not want to recognize anything in the world is closed to the essence of things. - However, those who allow themselves to be seduced by the feeling of worship and devotion into completely killing their healthy self-awareness and self-confidence are sinning against the law of balance and equilibrium. The student of the spirit will continue to work on himself in order to make himself more and more mature; but then he may also have confidence in his own personality and believe that its powers are growing more and more. Anyone who comes to the right feelings in this direction says to himself: "There are powers hidden within me and I can draw them out of my inner self. Therefore, where I see something that I must venerate because it is above me, I need not merely venerate it, but I may trust myself to develop everything within me that makes me equal to this or that venerated person.
[ 44 ] The greater a person's ability to pay attention to certain processes in life that are not familiar to his personal judgment from the outset, the greater the possibility for him to create a basis for development in spiritual worlds. An example may illustrate this. A person comes to a situation in life where he can do or refrain from a certain action. His judgment tells him: Do this. But there is a certain inexplicable something in his feelings that prevents him from doing so. It may be that the person pays no attention to this inexplicable something, but simply performs the action in a way that is appropriate to his judgment. But it can also be the case that the person gives in to the urge of that inexplicable something and refrains from the action. If he then pursues the matter further, it may turn out that disaster would have followed if he had followed his judgment, but that blessing has resulted from the omission. Such an experience can lead a person's thinking in a very specific direction. He can say to himself: Something lives in me that guides me more correctly than the degree of judgment I have in the present. I have to keep my mind open to this "something in me" that I have not yet matured to with my ability to judge. It has a highly beneficial effect on the soul when it focuses its attention on such cases in life. It then shows itself, as if in a healthy intuition, that there is more to man than he can overlook with his power of judgment. Such attention works towards an expansion of the soul's life. But here too, one-sidedness can arise, which is questionable. Anyone who wants to get into the habit of always turning off his judgment because "hunches" drive him to do this or that could become a plaything of all kinds of indeterminate urges. And it is not far from such a habit to lack of judgment and superstition. - Any kind of superstition is disastrous for the spiritual disciple. One only acquires the possibility of penetrating the realms of spiritual life in a true way by carefully guarding against superstition, fantasy and reverie. He does not enter the spiritual world in the right way who is happy if he can experience a process somewhere that "cannot be grasped by human imagination". A preference for the "inexplicable" certainly does not make anyone a student of the spirit. The latter must completely get rid of the prejudice that a "mystic is one who presupposes the inexplicable, the inscrutable" in the world wherever it seems appropriate to him. The right feeling for the student of the spirit is to recognize hidden powers and entities everywhere; but also to presuppose that the unexplored can be explored if the powers to do so are present.
[ 45 ] There is a certain state of mind which is important to the spiritual disciple at every stage of his development. It consists in not placing one's cognitive drive in such a way that it always focuses on: How can one answer this or that question? Rather: How can I develop this or that ability within myself? Once this or that ability has been developed through patient inner work, the answer to certain questions will come to the person. Students of the spirit will always cultivate this state of mind within themselves. This will lead them to work on themselves, to make themselves more and more mature and to deny themselves the desire to force answers to certain questions. They will wait until such answers come to them. - But those who become accustomed to one-sidedness will not make any real progress. The spiritual disciple can also have the feeling that at a certain point in time he can answer the highest questions for himself to the extent of his powers. So here too, balance and equilibrium in the constitution of the soul play an important role.
[ 46 ] Many more qualities of the soul could be discussed, the cultivation and development of which is beneficial if the student of the spirit wants to strive for inspiration through exercises. It should be emphasized that balance and equilibrium are the qualities of the soul that are important. They prepare the understanding and the ability for the characterized exercises that are to be done in order to attain inspiration.
[ 47 ] The exercises for intuition require that the student of the mind not only lets disappear from his consciousness the images to which he has devoted himself for the attainment of the imagination, but also the life in his own soul activity in which he has immersed himself for the acquisition of inspiration. He should then literally have nothing of previously known outer or inner experience in his soul. If, however, after this casting off of outer and inner experiences there were nothing in his consciousness, that is, if his consciousness were to disappear altogether and he were to sink into unconsciousness, he could recognize from this that he has not yet made himself ripe to undertake exercises for intuition; and he would then have to continue the exercises for imagination and inspiration. There comes a time when the consciousness is not empty, when the soul has thrown off the inner and outer experiences, but when after this throwing off something remains in the consciousness as an effect, to which one can then devote oneself in contemplation just as one has previously devoted oneself to that which owes its existence to outer or inner impressions. However, this "something" is of a very special kind. It is something truly new compared to all previous experiences. When you experience it, you know: I did not know this before. This is a perception, just as the real sound is a perception that the ear hears; but this something can only enter my consciousness through intuition, just as the sound can only enter consciousness through the ear. Through intuition, the last remnant of the sensual-physical is stripped away from man's impressions; the spiritual world begins to lie open to cognition in a form that no longer has anything in common with the characteristics of the physical-sensual world.
[ 48 ] Imaginative cognition is achieved through the formation of the lotus flowers out of the astral body. Through those exercises which are undertaken for the attainment of inspiration and intuition, special movements, formations and currents appear in the human etheric or vital body which were not there before. They are precisely the organs through which the human being absorbs the "reading of the hidden script" and that which lies beyond it into the realm of his abilities. For supersensible cognition, the changes in the etheric body of a person who has attained inspiration and intuition present themselves in the following way. As in the region near the physical heart, a new center becomes conscious in the etheric body, which develops into an etheric organ. From this, movements and currents run to the various limbs of the human body in the most varied ways. The most important of these currents go to the lotus flowers, run through them and their individual leaves and then go outwards, where they pour out like rays into the outer space. The more developed a person is, the larger the circle around him in which these currents are perceptible. However, the center in the region of the heart is not formed right from the start with proper training. It is first prepared. First, a provisional center is formed in the head; this then moves down into the larynx region and finally shifts to the vicinity of the physical heart. If the development were irregular, the organ in question could be formed immediately in the region of the heart. Then there would be the danger that the human being, instead of coming to a calm, proper supersensible formation, would become a 'raver and fantasist'. In his further development, the student of the spirit comes to make the developed currents and structures of his etheric body independent of the physical body and to use them independently. The lotus flowers serve him as tools through which he moves the etheric body. Before this happens, however, special currents and radiations must have formed in the entire circumference of the etheric body, which close it off as if through a fine network and make it a self-contained entity. When this has happened, the movements and currents taking place in the etheric body can touch and connect with the outer spiritual world without hindrance, so that outer spiritual events and inner events (those in the human etheric body) flow into one another. When this happens, the time has come when the human being consciously perceives the world of inspiration. This cognition occurs in a different way than cognition in relation to the sensory-physical world. In the latter, one receives perceptions through the senses and then forms ideas and concepts about these perceptions. This is not the case with knowledge through inspiration. What one recognizes is there immediately, in one act; there is no reflection after perception. In the case of sensory-physical cognition, what is only gained afterwards in the concept is given in inspiration at the same time as the perception. One would therefore merge into one with the soul-spiritual environment, would not be able to distinguish oneself from it at all, if one had not developed the network characterized above in the etheric body.
[ 49 ] When the exercises for intuition are done, they not only affect the etheric body, but also the supersensible powers of the physical body. However, one should not imagine that in this way effects take place in the physical body which are accessible to ordinary sensory observation. These are effects that can only be judged by supersensible cognition. They have nothing to do with all external cognition. They arise as a result of the maturity of consciousness when it can have experiences in intuition, even though it has separated all previously known outer and inner experiences from itself. - Now the experiences of intuition are delicate, intimate and subtle; and the physical human body at the present stage of its development is coarse in relation to them. It is therefore a powerful obstacle to the success of the exercises of intuition. If these are continued with energy and perseverance and with the necessary inner calm, they will ultimately overcome the formidable obstacles of the physical body. The student of the spirit notices this by the fact that he gradually takes control of certain manifestations of the physical body that previously took place entirely without his consciousness. He also notices it in the fact that for a short time he feels the need, for example, to arrange his breathing (or the like) in such a way that it comes into a kind of unison or harmony with what the soul does in the exercises or otherwise in inner contemplation. The ideal of development is that the physical body itself would not do any exercises at all, not even such breathing exercises, but that everything that has to happen with it would only occur as a consequence of pure intuition exercises.
[ 50 ] When the student of the spirit ascends to the higher worlds of knowledge, he notices at a certain stage that the cohesion of the forces of his personality takes on a different form than it has in the physical-sensual world. In the latter, the ego brings about a unified interaction of the soul forces, first of all of thinking, feeling and volition. These three powers of the soul are always in certain relationships in the ordinary situations of human life. For example, you see a certain thing in the outside world. It pleases or displeases the soul. That is to say, a feeling of pleasure or displeasure follows with a certain necessity from the perception of the thing. One also desires the thing or receives the impulse to change it in this or that direction. In other words, desire and will are added to an idea and a feeling.
[ 51 ] This joining together is brought about by the fact that the ego unifies imagination (thinking), feeling and volition and in this way brings order to the forces of the personality. This healthy order would be interrupted if the ego proved to be powerless in this direction, for example if desire wanted to go a different way from feeling or imagination. A person would not be in a healthy state of mind if he thought that this or that was right, but now wanted something that he did not believe to be right. It would be the same if someone did not want what he liked, but what he disliked. Now man notices that on the way to higher knowledge, thinking, feeling and willing do indeed become independent of each other and each assumes a certain independence, for example, that a certain way of thinking no longer pushes, as if by itself, towards a certain way of feeling and willing. The situation is such that one can perceive something correctly in thinking, but in order to arrive at a feeling or a decision of will at all, one needs an independent impulse from within oneself. Thinking, feeling and willing do not remain three forces during the supersensible contemplation, which radiate from the common ego center of the personality, but they become like independent entities, as it were three personalities; and one must now make one's own ego all the stronger, because it should not merely bring order into three forces, but direct and lead three entities. But this division may only exist during supersensible contemplation. And here again it becomes clear how important it is to accompany the exercises for higher training with those that give security and stability to the ability to judge and to the emotional and volitional life. For if you do not bring these with you into the higher world, you will soon see how the ego proves to be weak and cannot be a proper controller of thinking, feeling and willing. If this weakness were present, the soul would be pulled in different directions as if by three personalities, and its inner unity would have to cease. If, however, the development of the spiritual disciple proceeds in the right way, the marked transformation of forces signifies true progress; the ego remains the ruler over the independent entities which now form his soul. - In the further course of development the development indicated then progresses. Thinking, which has become independent, stimulates the appearance of a special fourth soul-spiritual entity, which can be described as a direct flow of currents into the human being that are similar to thoughts. The whole world appears as a structure of thoughts that stands before you, like the plant or animal world in the physical-sensual realm. In the same way, feeling and volition, which have become independent, stimulate two forces in the soul, which work in it like independent beings. And a seventh power and entity is added, which is similar to the self itself.
[ 52 ] This whole experience is combined with another. Before entering the supersensible world, man knew thinking, feeling and willing only as inner experiences of the soul. As soon as he enters the supersensible world, he perceives things that do not express the sensory-physical, but the soul-spiritual. Behind the qualities he perceives in the new world are now soul-spiritual entities. And these now present themselves to him as an external world in the same way as stones, plants and animals have presented themselves to his senses in the physical-sensual realm. The spiritual disciple can now perceive a significant difference between the soul-spiritual world that opens up to him and that which he was used to perceiving through his physical senses. A plant in the sensory world remains as it is, whatever the human soul feels or thinks about it. This is not initially the case with the images of the soul-spiritual world. They change depending on what a person feels or thinks about them. In this way, man gives them a character that depends on his own nature. Imagine a certain image appearing before a person in the imaginative world. If he is at first indifferent to it in his mind, it shows itself in a certain form. But the moment he feels pleasure or displeasure towards the image, it changes its form. The images thus not only express something that is independently outside the human being, but they also reflect what the human being himself is. They are completely permeated by man's own essence. This covers the entities like a veil. Even if a real entity stands opposite him, man does not see it, but his own product. Thus he can indeed have true things before him and yet see false things. Indeed, this is not only the case with regard to what man notices in himself as his own being; but everything about him has an effect on this world. For example, a person can have hidden inclinations that do not come to light in life through education and character; they have an effect on the spiritual world, and this gets its peculiar coloring through the whole being of man, no matter how much he knows or does not know about this being itself. - In order to be able to progress further from this stage of development, it is necessary for the human being to learn to distinguish between himself and the spiritual outer world. It becomes necessary for him to learn to eliminate all effects of his own self on the soul-spiritual world around him. There is no other way to do this than by acquiring a knowledge of what you yourself carry into the new world. It is therefore a matter of first having true, thorough self-knowledge in order to then be able to perceive the surrounding spiritual-mental world purely. Now certain facts of human development mean that such self-knowledge must naturally take place on entering the higher world. The human being develops his ego, his self-consciousness, in the ordinary physical-sensual world. This ego now acts like a center of attraction on everything that belongs to the human being. All his inclinations, sympathies, antipathies, passions, opinions etc. are grouped around this ego, as it were. And this ego is also the center of attraction for what is called a person's karma. If one were to see this ego unveiled, one would also notice in it that certain destinies must still befall it in this and the following embodiments, depending on whether it has lived in this or that way in the previous embodiments, whether it has acquired this or that. With all that clings to the ego, it must now appear as the first image before the human soul when it ascends into the soul-spiritual world. This double of the human being must, according to a law of the spiritual world, appear before all others as its first impression in that world. The underlying law can be easily understood by considering the following. In physical-sensory life man only perceives himself in so far as he experiences himself inwardly in his thinking, feeling and willing. But this perception is an inner one; it does not place itself in front of man as stones, plants and animals place themselves in front of him. Through inner perception, man also only partially gets to know himself. There is something within him that prevents him from a deeper self-knowledge. This is an impulse to rework a characteristic as soon as he has to admit it to himself through self-knowledge and does not want to indulge in any deception about himself.
[ 53 ] If he does not give in to this urge, if he simply diverts his attention from his own self and remains as he is, he naturally also denies himself the opportunity to recognize himself in the point in question. If, however, a person penetrates himself and without deception holds this or that of his qualities against himself, he will either be able to improve them in himself or he will not be able to do so in the present situation of his life. In the latter case, a feeling will creep over his soul which must be called a feeling of shame. This is indeed how man's healthy nature works: through self-knowledge it feels various kinds of shame. Now this feeling already has a very definite effect in ordinary life. The healthy-minded person will ensure that what fills him with this feeling in himself does not assert itself in outward effects, that it does not express itself in outward deeds. Shame is therefore a force that drives people to close something inside themselves and not allow it to become outwardly perceptible. If you consider this properly, you will understand that spiritual research ascribes much more far-reaching effects to an inner experience of the soul, which is very closely related to the feeling of shame. It finds that in the hidden depths of the soul there is a kind of hidden shame of which the human being is not aware in physical-sensory life. This hidden feeling, however, works in a similar way to the marked manifest feeling of ordinary life: it prevents man's innermost being from appearing before him in a perceptible image. If this feeling were not there, man would perceive before himself what he really is; he would not only experience his ideas, feelings and will inwardly, but would perceive them as he perceives stones, animals and plants. Thus this feeling is man's concealer from himself. And thus it is also the concealer of the entire spiritual world. For since man's own inner being is veiled from him, he cannot perceive that in which he should develop the tools to recognize the soul-spiritual world; he cannot transform his being so that it would receive spiritual organs of perception - but if man now works through proper training to receive these organs of perception, that which he himself is appears before him as the first impression. He perceives his double. This self-perception cannot be separated from the perception of the rest of the spiritual-soul world. In the ordinary life of the physical-sensory world, the characterized feeling works in such a way that it continually closes the gate to the spiritual-soul world in front of man. If a person wanted to take just one step to penetrate this world, the feeling of shame that immediately arises but does not come to consciousness hides the part of the spiritual world that wants to come to light. The exercises described, however, open up this world. Now the thing is that this hidden feeling acts as a great benefactor of man. For through all that one acquires in the power of judgment, emotional life and character without spiritual-scientific training, one is not able to bear the perception of one's own being in its true form without further ado. One would lose all sense of self, self-confidence and self-awareness through this perception. That this does not happen must again be ensured by the precautions which, in addition to the exercises for higher knowledge, one undertakes to cultivate one's healthy power of judgment, one's feelings and character. Through his regular training, man learns so much from spiritual science, as if unintentionally, and he also becomes aware of as many means of self-knowledge and self-observation as are necessary to powerfully confront his double. It is then the case for the student of the spirit that he only sees as an image of the imaginative world in a different form what he has already familiarized himself with in the physical world. He who has first grasped the law of karma in the right way in the physical world through his intellect will not be able to tremble particularly when he now sees the seeds of his destiny marked in the image of his double. He who through his power of judgment has acquainted himself with the development of the world and of mankind, and knows how at a certain point in this development the powers of Lucifer have penetrated into the human soul, will easily bear it when he becomes aware that in the image of his own being these Luciferic entities with all their effects are contained. - From this, however, one can see how necessary it is that man should not demand his own entry into the spiritual world before he has understood certain truths about the spiritual world through his ordinary power of judgment developed in the physical-sensual world. What is communicated in this book before the discussion of the "knowledge of the higher worlds", the spiritual disciple should have acquired in the regular course of development through his ordinary power of judgment before he has the desire to enter the supersensible worlds himself.
[ 54 ] If the training does not focus on the security and stability of the power of judgment, the emotional and character life, it can happen that the student encounters the higher world before he has the necessary inner abilities. Then the encounter with his double would depress him and lead to errors. If, however - which would also be possible - the encounter were completely avoided and the person were nevertheless introduced to the supersensible world, then he would be just as incapable of recognizing this world in its true form. For it would be quite impossible for him to distinguish between what he sees in things and what they really are. This distinction is only possible if one perceives one's own being as an image for oneself and thereby detaches everything that flows from one's own inner being from its surroundings. - The doppelganger has such an effect on a person's life in the physical-sensual world that it immediately makes itself invisible through the characteristic feeling of shame when a person approaches the soul-spiritual world. In doing so, however, it also conceals this entire world itself. Like a "guardian", he stands before this world to deny entry to those who are not yet fit to enter. He can therefore be called the "Guardian of the Threshold, which is before the spiritual-soul world".-Except by entering the supersensible world as described, man still encounters this "Guardian of the Threshold" when passing through physical death. And he gradually reveals himself in the course of life in the soul-spiritual development between death and a new birth. But the encounter cannot oppress the human being because he knows of other worlds than in the life between birth and death.
[ 55 ] If man were to enter the spiritual-mental world without the encounter with the "Guardian of the Threshold", he could fall prey to deception after deception. For he would never be able to distinguish between what he himself carries into this world and what really belongs to it. But a proper training must only lead the spiritual disciple into the realm of truth, not into that of illusion. Such a training will in itself be such that the encounter must necessarily take place once. For it is one of the precautions against the possibility of deception and fantasy that are indispensable for the observation of supersensible worlds. - It is one of the most indispensable precautions that every student of the spirit must take to work carefully on himself in order not to become a fantasist, a person who can fall prey to possible deception, self-deception (suggestion and self-suggestion). Where the instructions for training the mind are followed correctly, the sources that can bring deception are destroyed at the same time. Of course, it is not possible here to go into all the numerous details that are involved in such precautions. We can only hint at what is important. The deceptions under consideration here arise from two sources. They stem in part from the fact that one colors reality through one's own spiritual being. In the ordinary life of the physical-sensual world, this source of deception is of relatively little danger; for here the external world will always impose itself sharply on observation in its own form, just as the observer will want to color it according to his wishes and interests. However, as soon as one enters the imaginative world, its images are changed by such wishes and interests, and one has before one like a reality what one has first formed or at least helped to form oneself. This source of deception is eliminated by the fact that through the encounter with the "Guardian of the Threshold" the spiritual disciple gets to know everything that is in him, that he can carry into the soul-spiritual world. And the preparation that the spiritual disciple undergoes before entering the soul-spiritual world has the effect that he becomes accustomed to switching himself off when observing the sensual-physical world and allowing things and processes to speak to him purely through their own essence. Anyone who has gone through this preparation sufficiently can calmly await the encounter with the "Guardian of the Threshold". Through it, he will finally test himself as to whether he now really feels able to switch off his own essence even when he is confronted with the soul-spiritual world.
[ 56 ] In addition to this source of deception, there is another one. It comes to light when we misinterpret an impression that we receive. In physical-sensory life, a simple example of such an illusion is that which arises when one sits in a train and believes that the trees are moving in the opposite direction of the train, when in fact one is moving with the train. Although there are numerous cases where such deceptions are more difficult to correct in the sensory-physical world than in the simple one mentioned above, it is easy to see that within this world man also finds the means to dispel such deceptions if he considers with sound judgment everything that can serve the corresponding enlightenment. The situation is different, however, as soon as one enters the supersensible realms. In the sensory world, the facts are not altered by human deception; it is therefore possible to correct the deception of the facts through unbiased observation. In the supersensible world, however, this is not readily possible. If one wishes to observe a supersensible process and approaches it with an incorrect judgment, one carries this incorrect judgment into it; and it becomes so interwoven with the fact that it cannot be immediately distinguished from it. The error is then not in the man and the correct fact outside him, but the error itself is made a part of the external fact. It cannot therefore be corrected simply by an impartial observation of the fact. This points to what can be an abundant source of deception and fantasy for those who approach the supersensible world without the right preparation. - Just as the student of the spirit acquires the ability to exclude those deceptions that arise through the coloring of the supersensible world phenomena with his own being, he must also acquire the other gift: to make the second characterized source of deception ineffective. He can eliminate what comes from himself when he has first recognized the image of his own double; and he will be able to eliminate what is a second source of deception in the direction indicated if he acquires the ability to recognize from the nature of a fact of the supersensible world whether it is reality or deception. If the illusions looked exactly like the realities, then it would not be possible to distinguish between them. But this is not the case. Illusions of the supersensible worlds have properties in themselves that distinguish them from realities. And it is important that the student of the spirit knows by which characteristics he can recognize the realities. Nothing seems more self-evident than for a person who is not familiar with spiritual training to say: Where is there any possibility at all of protecting oneself against deception, since the sources for it are so numerous? And when he goes on to say: Is any student of the spirit safe from the fact that not all his supposed higher insights are based only on deception and self-deception (suggestion and auto-suggestion)? Those who speak in this way do not take into account that in every true spiritual training the sources of deception are blocked by the whole way in which it proceeds. Firstly, the true student of the spirit will, through his preparation, acquire sufficient knowledge of everything that can bring about deception and self-deception, and thus put himself in a position to guard against them. In this respect, he really has the opportunity like no other person to make himself sober and capable of judgment for the course of life. Everything he experiences causes him to think nothing of vague premonitions, intuitions, etc. The training makes him as cautious as possible. In addition, every true training first leads to concepts about the great events of the world, i.e. to things which make it necessary to strain the power of judgment, but which at the same time refine and sharpen it. Only those who refuse to go into such remote areas and only want to stick to closer "revelations" could lose the sharpening of that healthy power of judgment that gives them certainty in distinguishing between deception and reality. But all this is not the most important thing. The most important thing lies in the exercises themselves, which are used in a proper training of the mind. These must be set up in such a way that the consciousness of the spiritual disciple can see exactly what is going on in the soul during inner contemplation. First, a symbol is formed to induce the imagination. This still contains ideas of external perceptions. The human being is not solely involved in their content; he does not create them himself. He can therefore delude himself as to how it comes about; he can misinterpret its origin. But the student of the spirit removes this content from his consciousness when he ascends to the exercises for inspiration. There he immerses himself only in his own soul activity, which has formed the symbol. Here, too, error is still possible. Man has acquired the nature of his soul activity through education, learning and so on. He cannot know everything about its origin. But now the student of the spirit also removes his own soul activity from his consciousness. If something now remains, nothing adheres to it that cannot be surveyed. Nothing can interfere with it that cannot be judged in relation to its entire content. In his intuition, therefore, the student of the spirit has something that shows him how a very clear reality of the spiritual-soul world is constituted. If he now applies the thus recognized characteristics of spiritual-mental reality to everything that approaches his observation, then he can distinguish appearance from reality. And he can be sure that by applying this law he will be protected from deception in the supersensible world, just as he cannot be deceived in the physical-sensible world into mistaking an imaginary hot piece of iron for one that is really burning. It is self-evident that one will only behave in this way towards those insights which one regards as one's own experiences in the supersensible worlds, and not towards those which one receives as communications from others and which one comprehends with one's physical intellect and one's healthy sense of truth. The student of the spirit will endeavor to draw a precise boundary between what he has acquired in one way and what in another. On the one hand, he will willingly accept the messages about the higher worlds and seek to comprehend them through his faculty of judgment. But if he describes something as self-experience, as an observation made by himself, he will have checked whether it has confronted him exactly with the qualities which he has learned to perceive in his unerring intuition.
[ 57 ] Once the spiritual disciple has had the encounter with the designated "Guardian of the Threshold", further experiences await him on his ascent into the supernatural worlds. First of all, he will notice that there is an inner relationship between this "Guardian of the Threshold" and that soul power which, in the above description, has emerged as the seventh and has formed itself into an independent entity. Indeed, this seventh entity is in a certain respect nothing other than the double, the "Guardian of the Threshold" itself. And it presents the spiritual disciple with a special task. He has to guide and lead what he is in his ordinary self and what appears to him in the image through the newborn self. There will be a kind of struggle against the double. It will continually strive for the upper hand. However, placing oneself in the right relationship to it, not allowing it to do anything that does not happen under the influence of the newborn "I", also strengthens and consolidates man's powers. - Now in the higher world, self-knowledge in a certain direction is different from that in the physical-sensual world. Whereas in the latter, self-knowledge only occurs as an inner experience, the newborn self immediately presents itself as a soul-outward appearance. You see your newborn self before you like another being. But you cannot perceive it completely. For whatever stage one may have climbed on the way up into the supersensible worlds, there are still higher stages. On such levels you will always perceive more of your "higher self". It can therefore only partially reveal itself to the spiritual disciple at any one stage. But now the temptation is tremendously great, which befalls man when he first becomes aware of something of his "higher self", to view this "higher self" as it were from the standpoint which one has gained in the physical-sensory world. This temptation is even good, and it must occur if development is to proceed correctly. One must look at what appears as the double, the "guardian of the threshold", and place it in front of the "higher self" so that one can notice the distance between what one is and what one is to become. In this contemplation, however, the "Guardian of the Threshold" begins to take on a completely different form. It presents itself as an image of all the obstacles that stand in the way of the development of the "higher self". You will realize the burden you are carrying on your ordinary self. And if you are not strong enough through your preparations to say to yourself: I will not stop here, but will continue to develop towards the "higher self", then you will weaken and shrink back from what lies ahead. You are then immersed in the soul-spiritual world, but give up working further. You become a prisoner of the figure that now stands before your soul through the "Guardian of the Threshold". The significant thing is that in this experience you do not have the feeling of being a prisoner. Rather, you will believe you are experiencing something completely different. The figure that the "Guardian of the Threshold" evokes can be such that it creates the impression in the soul of the observer that he now has the entire scope of all possible worlds before him in the images that appear at this stage of development; he has arrived at the summit of knowledge and needs to strive no further. Instead of being a prisoner, you can feel like the immeasurably rich owner of all the secrets of the world. The fact that one can have such an experience, which represents the opposite of the true facts, will not surprise anyone who considers that when one experiences this, one is already standing in the soul-spiritual world, and that it is a peculiarity of this world that events in it can present themselves in reverse. In this book, this fact has been pointed out in the consideration of life after death.
[ 58 ] The form which one perceives at this stage of development shows the spiritual disciple something else than that in which the "Guardian of the Threshold" first presented himself to him. In this double were to be perceived all those qualities which the ordinary self of man has as a result of the influence of the powers of Lucifer. But now, in the course of human development, another power has entered the human soul through the influence of Lucifer. It is that which is described as the power of Ahriman in earlier sections of this book. It is the power which prevents man in his physical-sensual existence from perceiving the spiritual-soul entities of the outer world which lie behind the surface of the sensual. What has become of the human soul under the influence of this force is shown in the picture by the form that appears in the characterized experience. - Whoever approaches this experience suitably prepared will give it its true interpretation; and then another form will soon show itself, the one that can be called the "great guardian of the threshold" in contrast to the characterized "small guardian". This one informs the spiritual disciple that he must not stop at this stage, but must continue to work energetically. He evokes in the observer the awareness that the world that has been conquered will only become a truth and will not turn into an illusion if the work is continued in the appropriate manner. - But whoever would approach this experience unprepared by an incorrect training of the spirit, would then, when he comes to the "great guardian of the threshold", have something poured into his soul which can only be compared to the "feeling of an immeasurable terror", a "boundless fear".
[ 59 ] Just as the encounter with the "small guardian of the threshold" gives the spiritual disciple the opportunity to test whether he is protected against illusions which can arise by carrying his being into the supersensible world, so he can test himself by the experiences which finally lead to the "great guardian of the threshold" whether he is equal to those illusions which were traced back to the second marked source above. If he is able to offer resistance to the powerful illusion that makes him believe that the world of images he has attained is a rich possession, while he is still only a prisoner, he is also protected from taking appearance for reality in the further course of his development.
[ 60 ] The "Guardian of the Threshold" will take on an individual form for each person to a certain degree. The encounter with him corresponds precisely to that experience through which the personal character of supersensible observations is overcome and the possibility is given to enter a region of experience that is free of personal coloring and valid for every human being.
[ 61 ] When the student of the spirit has had the experiences described, then he is able to distinguish in the soul-spiritual environment that which he himself is from that which is outside him. He will then recognize how the understanding of the world process described in this book is necessary in order to understand man and his life itself. One can only understand the physical body if one recognizes how it has developed through the evolution of Saturn, the sun, the moon and the earth. One understands the etheric body when one follows its formation through the development of the sun, moon and earth, etc. But one also understands that which is currently connected with the earth's development when one recognizes how everything has gradually unfolded. Through the training of the spirit one is put in a position to recognize the relationship of everything that is in man to the corresponding facts and entities of the world outside man. For this is how it is: every part of man stands in a relationship to the rest of the world. In this book we have only been able to give a sketchy outline of this. It must be remembered, however, that the physical human body, for example, was only present in the first stage of Saturn's development. Its organs: the heart, the lungs and the brain developed later, during the solar, lunar and terrestrial periods, from the first anlage. Thus the heart, lungs, etc. are related to the development of the sun, moon and earth. It is quite corresponding with the members of the etheric body, the sensory body, the sensory soul, etc. The human being is formed out of the whole world that lies before him; and every detail that is in him corresponds to a process, a being of the outer world. At the appropriate stage of his development, the student of the spirit comes to recognize this relationship of his own being to the great world. And this stage of cognition can be called the realization of the correspondence between the "small world", the microcosm, which is man himself, and the "great world", the macrocosm. When the spiritual disciple has come to this realization, a new experience can occur for him. He begins to feel as if he has grown together with the whole structure of the world, even though he feels fully independent. This feeling is an absorption into the whole world, a becoming one with it, but without losing its own essence. This stage of development can be described as "becoming one with the macrocosm". It is significant that this becoming one should not be thought of as if the special consciousness would cease and the human being would flow out into the universe. Such a thought would only be the expression of an opinion flowing from untrained judgment. The individual stages of higher knowledge in the sense of the initiation process described here can now be described in the following way:
- The study of spiritual science, whereby one first makes use of the power of judgment which one has gained in the physical-sensual world.
- The acquisition of imaginative knowledge
- Reading the hidden Scriptures (corresponding to inspiration).
- Living in the spiritual environment (according to intuition).
- The realization of the relationship between microcosm and macrocosm.
- Becoming one with the macrocosm.
- The overall experience of the previous experiences as a basic mood of the soul.
[ 62 ] However, these stages need not be thought of as being experienced one after the other. Rather, the training can proceed in such a way that, depending on the individuality of the spiritual disciple, a previous stage is only passed through to a certain degree when he begins to do exercises that correspond to the following stage. For example, it can be quite good that one has only gained a few imaginations in a safe way and yet is already doing exercises that draw inspiration, intuition or the realization of the connection between the microcosm and macrocosm into the realm of one's own experience.
[ 63 ] When the student of the spirit has gained an experience of intuition, he not only knows the images of the soul-spiritual world, he can not only read their relationships in the "hidden script": he comes to the realization of the beings themselves, through whose interaction the world to which the human being belongs comes into being. And he thereby learns to know himself in the form he has as a spiritual being in the soul-spiritual world. He has come to a realization of his higher self, and he has noticed how he must continue to work in order to master his double, the "guardian of the threshold". However, he has also had an encounter with the "great guardian of the threshold", who stands before him like a constant encouragement to continue working. This "great guardian of the threshold" now becomes his role model, whom he wants to follow. When this feeling arises in the spiritual disciple, then he has gained the opportunity to recognize who actually stands before him as the "great guardian of the threshold". This guardian is now transformed in the disciple's perception into the figure of Christ, whose nature and intervention in earthly development can be seen in the previous chapters of this book. The spiritual disciple is thereby initiated into the sublime mystery itself, which is linked to the name of Christ. The Christ shows himself to him as the "great human earthly model". - If the Christ is recognized in the spiritual world in this way through intuition, then it also becomes understandable what took place on earth historically in the fourth post-Atlantean period of the earth's development (in the Greco-Latin period). How the high solar being, the Christ-being, intervened in the earth's development at this time, and how it now continues to work within this earth's development, becomes a self-experienced realization for the student of the spirit. It is therefore an insight into the meaning and significance of earthly development, which the spiritual disciple receives through intuition.
[ 64 ] The path to knowledge of the supersensible worlds described here is one that every human being can take, regardless of the situation in which he finds himself within the present conditions of life. When speaking of such a path, one must bear in mind that the goal of knowledge and truth is the same at all times of earthly development, but that man's starting points were different at different times. At present, man cannot start from the same point of departure if he wants to enter the supersensible realms, as for example the ancient Egyptian initiate did. Therefore, the exercises that were imposed on the spiritual disciple in ancient Egypt cannot easily be carried out by the man of today. Since that time human souls have passed through various embodiments; and this progression from embodiment to embodiment is not without meaning and significance. The abilities and characteristics of souls change from embodiment to embodiment. Anyone who takes even a superficial look at human historical life can see that since the twelfth and thirteenth centuries after Christ, all living conditions have changed in comparison with the past, and that people's opinions, feelings and abilities have become different from what they were before. The path to higher knowledge described here is one that is suitable for souls who embody themselves in the immediate present. It is such that it sets the starting point of spiritual development at the point where man stands in the present, when he finds himself in any of the living conditions given to him by this present. - Progressive development leads mankind from period to period to ever different forms with regard to the paths to higher knowledge, just as outer life changes its forms. And there must always be perfect harmony between the outer life and the initiation.